MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL MANUAL
FOR THE
Army & Air Force Exchange Service
Ft. Irwin New Express Ft. Irwin, CA
PN: 4742-20-000002 Bldg. #973 Facility #4742 0000 000
July 15, 2021
100% Construction Documents
Architects West PN: 20014
Signatures:
Project Manager ______Date ______
Contracting Officer ______Date ______
Architect ______Date ______
Contractor ______Date ______
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL MANUAL
ARMY & AIR FORCE EXCHANGE SERVICE
Ft. Irwin Express
PN: 4742-20-000002 Bldg. #973 Facility #4742 0000 000
EXCHANGE PROJECT MANAGER: David Ivey 3911 S. Walton Walker Blvd. Dallas, TX 75236 (214) 312-4727
Architect: Architects West, INC 210 E. Lakeside Ave. Coeur d’ Alene, ID 83814 Ph (208) 667-9402
Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, Civil Engineer: & Fire Protection Engineer: DCI Engineers Coffman Engineers 707 W 2nd Ave. 10 N. Post St., Ste. 500 Spokane, WA 99201 Spokane, WA 99201 Ph (509) 455-4448 Ph (509) 328-2994; Fx (509) 328-2999
AW #20014 July 15, 2021
Mechanical Specifications
for
ARMY & AIR FORCE EXCHANGE SERVICE
Ft. Irwin Express PN: 4742-20-000002 Bldg # 973 Facility # 4742 0000 000
MECHANICAL ENGINEER:
COFFMAN ENGINEERS 10 N. Post Street, Ste. 500 Spokane, WA 99201 Ph (509) 328-2994; Fx (509) 328-2999
07/15/2021
MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 22 – SPECIFICATIONS
22 00 00 - Plumbing General Provisions 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 19 - Meters and Gages for Plumbing 22 05 23 - General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping Equipment 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation 22 11 16 - Domestic Water Piping 22 11 19 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 13 16 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 13 19 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 14 13 - Facility Storm Drainage Piping 22 14 23 - Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 22 34 00 - Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 – SPECIFICATIONS
23 00 00 - HVAC General Provisions 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and HVAC Equipment 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC 23 11 26 - Liquified Petroleum Gas Piping 23 31 13 - Metal Ducts 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories 23 34 23 - HVAC Power Ventilators 23 37 13 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 74 13 -Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
07/15/21 MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 000100 - 1
SECTION 22 00 00 - PLUMBING – GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 01 of these specifications, which govern work under DIVISION 23. Refer to other sections of these specifications for additional related requirements.
1.2 SCOPE OF REQUIREMENTS
A. The work covered by Division 22 of the specifications shall include but not be limited to:
1. Furnishing all materials and supplying all labor, equipment and services to install the complete mechanical system as shown on the accompanied drawings and specified herein.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The contract documents including specifications and construction drawings are intended to provide all material and labor to install complete plumbing, heating ventilating and air conditioning systems for the building.
B. Every effort has been made on the design to meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the Codes; therefore, unless Contractor before signing his Contract, shall have notified the Architect, in writing, of any items in conflict with said Codes, he shall thereafter make any minor adjustments necessary to meet said Codes at no cost to the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall refer to the architectural interior detail, floor plans, elevations, and the structural and other Contract Drawings and he shall coordinate his work with that of the other trades to avoid interference. The plans are diagrammatic and show generally the locations of the equipment and are not to be scaled; all dimensions shall be checked at the building.
D. The Contractor shall comply with the project close-out requirements as detailed in General Requirements of Division 01.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS
A. Specifications:
1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment. 2. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences.
B. Drawings:
1. Drawings in general are diagrammatic and indicate sizes, locations, connections to equipment and methods of installation. 2. Scaled and figured dimensions are approximate and are for estimating purposes only.
07/15/21 Plumbing – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220000 - 1 3. Before proceeding with work check and verify all dimensions. 4. Assume all responsibility for fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of equipment and structure. 5. Make adjustments that may be necessary or requested in order to resolve space problems, preserve headroom, and avoid architectural openings, structural members and work of other trades. 6. If any part of Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, apply to Architect or Engineer for his interpretation and decision as early as possible.
1.5 CODES PERMITS AND FEES
A. Mechanical work shall be in accordance with the following:
1. The Contractor at his expense shall obtain permits and inspections required for the mechanical work on this project. Deliver all inspection certificates to the Owner’s Representative prior to final acceptance of the work. 2. Contractor shall pay all costs levied by utility companies and/or governing agencies associated with gas connections and include these costs within his bid. This shall include but not be limited to tap fees, service mains, meter, and vault charges.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. The terms “The Contractor”, when used in Division 22 shall mean the Contractor for mechanical work.
B. The term “Owners Representative” as used in Division 22 generally refers to the Architect or his designated representative in accordance with the General Conditions.
C. The term “Provide” shall mean furnish and install.
1.7 TEMPORARY HEATING
A. See Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.8 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
A. Safety Measures: The Engineer has not been retained to provide design and construction services relating to the Contractor’s safety precautions, or means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours. Provide all required safety measures and consult with the State or Federal safety inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether compliance with State or Federal regulations exist.
B. Head protection: Where pipe hangers, equipment support angles, etc., are exposed in access ways for any maintenance, cover all such potentially injurious protrusions less than 7’-0” above the floor with padding; secure and permanently fasten, and finish to match adjacent finishes.
07/15/21 Plumbing – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220000 - 2 1.9 MECHANICAL COST BREAKDOWN
A. Cost breakdown not required.
1.10 GUARANTEE
A. The Mechanical equipment and installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance unless and individual item or specification is otherwise noted as longer. The Contractor shall make-good at his own expense all defects in his work, and/or equipment furnished by him, which shall develop at any time during the one year guarantee period and shall stand any expense of cutting and patching and repairing made necessary by his corrections of unsatisfactory work or equipment operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK AND PIPING COORDINATION
A. Prior to installation of the new Division 22 systems, the Contractor shall coordinate the proposed installation with the Architectural and Structural requirements, and all other trades (including HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Ceiling Suspension and Tile systems), and provide reasonable maintenance access requirements.
B. Provide means of access to all valves, dampers, controllers, operable devices and other apparatus which may require adjustment or servicing.
C. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding all existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise the Owners Representative of any discrepancies between that indicated on the Drawings and that existing in the field prior to any installation. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the removal or relocation of installed systems that have been installed without prior notification of the Owners Representative.
2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data per the requirements of Section 013300 Submittals Procedures.
B. See individual Division 22 specification sections for additional submittal requirements.
C. Submittals of Product Data shall be bound in a black 3-ring binder with the project name on the cover. Data within this binder shall be arranged as follows:
1. Provide index tabs for each specification section in the same order and using the same name as appears in the Specifications. 2. Data shall be black and white, on 8 ½” x 11” or 11” x 17”, single, one-sided sheets suitable for copying. Diagrams and drawings larger than 11” x 17” shall be submitted in reproducible form (translucent bond paper). 3. Drawings and catalog data must be clean, neat copies. Fax material or other poor quality copies will not be acceptable.
D. If material or equipment is not as specified or submittal is not complete, it will be rejected. Only completed submittal including all applicable specification sections will be reviewed.
07/15/21 Plumbing – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220000 - 3 E. Indicate manufacturer, trade name and model number. Include copies of applicable brochure or catalogue material. Indicate sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and options actually being proposed.
F. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation, and technical data sufficient to confirm that equipment meets requirements of drawings and specifications.
G. Include wiring, piping and service connection data, motor sizes complete with voltage ratings and schedules.
H. Submit five (5) copies of each shop drawing. The Engineer will retain one stamped copy, one will be provided to the Architect, one will be provided to the owner and a two stamped copies will be returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for distribution of required number of reviewed copies to parties other than the Owner’s Representative(s).
I. An electronic version of the shop drawings in AutoCAD format must be provided to DPW as part of the closeout documents for future reference.
2.3 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 01.
B. Keep on site, an extra set of drawings and specifications recording changes and deviations daily. Return these drawings to the Owner’s Representative at the completion of the Project. These drawings shall not be used for any other purposes.
2.4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Section 017800 Closeout Submittals.
B. See individual Division 23 specification sections for additional Operating and Maintenance Manual requirements.
2.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING/STARTUP
A. Instruct the Owners representative(s) in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
B. Individuals present shall include Contractors, subcontractors and equipment factory representatives. These individuals shall assist in instruction and start-up.
C. Instruction period shall occur after final inspection when systems are properly working.
07/15/21 Plumbing – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220000 - 4 D. Prepare statement and check list to be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. This Statement shall read as follows:
“The Contractor, associated factory representatives and subcontractors, have started each system and the total system and have proved their normal operation to the Owner’s representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof.”
Owner’s Representative Contractor
2.6 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS – STANDARDS/CODES
A. Materials used under this Contract, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be new and of the latest and most current model line produced by the manufacturer. Each item of equipment shall conform to the latest Standard Specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials and shall conform to any applicable standards of the United States Department of Commerce.
B. Instruct the Owners representative(s) in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when the Project is turned over to the Owner.
C. All electrically driven or connected equipment shall be provided with UL or equivalent label and/or listing in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.
D. All control panels shall be provided with UL or equivalent Label and/or listing in accordance with the requirements of the NEC an applicable local codes.
2.7 EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Section 012500 Substitution Procedures for product prior approval and substitution requirements.
B. Throughout these specifications and drawings, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., are specified or scheduled by manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number. Such designation is to establish standards of desired quality and construction and shall be the basis of design and the bid.
C. Submit proposals to supply alternative materials or equipment in writing, in accordance with Section 012500 Substitution Procedures.
D. Equipment manufacturers listed in individual sections are approved alternatives for this project and are subject to requirements of drawings and specifications. Revisions required to adapt alternatives shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
E. Products furnished other than the (basis of design) shall have similar electrical characteristics as the scheduled or specified equipment. Contractor shall be responsible for any electrical changes caused by products not in accordance with this requirement.
07/15/21 Plumbing – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220000 - 5 2.8 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP
A. Protect equipment and materials in storage on site, during and after installation until final acceptance. Leave factory covers in place and take special precautions to prevent entry of foreign material into working parts and duct systems.
B. Protect equipment with polyethylene covers and crates.
C. Operate, drain and flush bearings and refill with change of lubricant before final acceptance.
D. Protect bearings and shafts during installation. Grease shafts and sheaves to prevent corrosion. Provide extended nipples for lubrication.
E. Ensure that existing equipment is carefully dismantled and not damaged or lost. Do not re-use existing materials and equipment unless specifically indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LOCATIONS
A. Coordination of Division 22 equipment and systems to the available space, with other trades. The access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
B. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction of pipes and ducts, as required to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines and avoid structural, electrical, pipe and duct interference’s whether or not indicated on Drawings. Furnish fittings, etc., as required to make these offsets, transitions and changes in direction at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Determine exact route and location of ducts and coordinate and obtain approval for changes from the layout indicated on the drawings with the Owner’s Representative prior to fabrication.
D. Locations of equipment and devices, as shown on the drawings, are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of mechanical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Owner’s Representative prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear.
E. All wiring, equipment, ductwork, tubing, etc., shall be concealed within building construction unless otherwise noted, or in mechanical rooms.
F. Arrange ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All cutting and patching of new and existing construction required for the installation of systems and equipment specified in Division 22 shall be the responsibility of the Division 23 Contractor. All cutting shall be accomplished with masonry saws, drills or similar equipment to provide neat uniform openings.
07/15/21 Plumbing – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220000 - 6 B. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings and roof with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials. All patching shall meet the approval of the Owner’s Representative.
C. All cutting and patching made necessary to repair defective equipment, defective workmanship or be neglect of this Contractor to properly anticipate his requirements shall be included in Division 23.
D. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses or other structural members without the Owner Representative’s written approval.
E. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavement, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work specified or indicated under this Division is responsibility of Division 23.
3.3 SCHEDULING
A. It is understood that while drawings are to be followed as closely as circumstances permit, the Contractor shall be responsible for installation of systems according to the true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. Anything not clear or in conflict will be explained by making application to Owner’s Representative. Should conditions arise where certain changes would be advisable, secure approval from Owner’s Representative for those changes before proceeding with work.
B. Coordinate with the work of various trades when installing interrelated work. Before installation of mechanical items, make proper provision to avoid interference’s. Changes required in work specified in Division 22 caused by neglect to do so shall be made at no cost to Owner.
C. Furnish and install inserts and supports required by Division 23 unless otherwise noted. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are an integral part of other Divisions of the Work to those involved in sufficient time to be built into construction as the Work proceeds. Locate these items and see that they are properly installed. Expense resulting from improper location or installation of items above shall be borne under Division 23.
3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. The locations of existing concealed lines and connection points have been indicated as closely as possible from available information. The Contractor shall assume that such connection points are within a Ten foot (10') radius of the indicated location. Where connection points are not within this radius, the Contractor shall contact the Owner’s Representative for a decision before proceeding or may proceed at his own expense.
B. Connection points to existing work shall be located and verified prior to starting new work.
C. Prior to commencing any excavation or ditching activity, the Contractor shall verify the exact location and inverts of all existing utilities and connection points in the area of his proposed excavation. Notify Owner’s representative for further direction if actual inverts will not allow the proper installation of new work.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages, which might be caused by his failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities.
07/15/21 Plumbing – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220000 - 7 3.5 PROJECT FINALIZATION & STARTUP
A. Upon completion of the equipment and systems installation and connections, the Contractor shall assemble all major equipment factory representatives and subcontractors together for system start-up and Owner instructional period.
B. These individuals shall assist in start-up and check out of their systems and shall remain at the site until the system operation is acceptable and understood to the Owner's maintenance and/or operation personnel.
C. To provide acceptance of operation and instruction by the Owner's representative, the Contractor shall prepare a written statement of acceptance explaining same for the Owner's signature.
The statement should read as follows:
"I, the Contractor, associated factory representative and subcontractor, have started each system and the total system and have proved their normal operation to the Owner's representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof."
Owner's Representative Contractor
D. Copies of this acceptance shall be sent to the Engineer and the Architect and one copy shall be put in each maintenance manual.
3.6 PUNCH LIST PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative in wiring when the project is ready for punch lists. After punch lists are complete, written notice must be forwarded to the Owner’s Representative requesting final checkout.
B. At the time of final observation, the project foreman shall accompany the observation party and shall remove access panels as required, to allow complete observation of the entire mechanical system.
END OF SECTION 220000
07/15/21 Plumbing – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220000 - 8 SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 6. Supports and anchorages. 7. Access doors.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and plumbing equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.4 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
07/15/21 Common Work Results for Plumbing Ft. Irwin Express 220500- 1 1.5 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
1.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder- joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
1.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
07/15/21 Common Work Results for Plumbing Ft. Irwin Express 220500- 2 D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
1.9 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
N. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
O. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
1.10 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
07/15/21 Common Work Results for Plumbing Ft. Irwin Express 220500- 3 C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
1.11 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
1.12 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
1.13 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
07/15/21 Common Work Results for Plumbing Ft. Irwin Express 220500- 4 1.14 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
1.15 ACCESS DOORS
A. Access doors to match surrounding surface, provided with recess to accept matching finish.
B. Provide 12”x12” access doors for maintenance or adjustments purposes for all mechanical system components including valves, volume dampers, clean outs, traps and controls.
C. Refer to Section 083100 "Access Doors and Panels.”
END OF SECTION 220500
07/15/21 Common Work Results for Plumbing Ft. Irwin Express 220500- 5
SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermometers. 2. Gages.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Case: Die-cast aluminum or brass, 7 inches (178 mm) long.
B. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
C. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
D. Window: Glass or plastic.
E. Connector: Adjustable, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
G. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range.
2.2 THERMOWELLS
A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.3 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Liquid-filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter. 2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
07/15/21 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220519- 1 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN 8), bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Red[ or other dark-color metal. 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Ring: Metal. 9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half 10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure (100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure). 11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
B. Pressure-Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) brass or stainless-steel needle type. 2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 (DN 8) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous- metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the outlet of each domestic, hot-water storage tank.
B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions (Minus 1 to plus 82 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions). 2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions (Minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions).
3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
B. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of diameter of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most readable position.
D. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage.
E. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.
07/15/21 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220519- 2 F. Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
END OF SECTION 220519
07/15/21 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220519- 3
SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves. 3. Bronze swing check valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. HVAC valve applications specified in this Section are limited to NPS 24 (DN 600).
B. Refer to Plumbing valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
C. Caution: Revise pressure ratings and insert temperature ratings in valve articles if valves with higher ratings are required. Valves larger than NPS 12 (DN 300) typically have a lower pressure rating than smaller valves. Verify pressure requirements for large valves.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller.
07/15/21 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220523 - 1 G. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:
1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.
H. Valve-End Connections:
1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES
A. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Brass or bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Regular.
2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.
B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. 07/15/21 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220523 - 2 e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full.
2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.
B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
07/15/21 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220523 - 3 C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves. 2. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder- joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: One or Two piece, regular port, brass or bronze with bronze trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.
END OF SECTION 220523
07/15/21 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220523 - 4 SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems.
B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
C. See Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire- protection piping.
D. See Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
07/15/21 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220529 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Coordinate first paragraph and list below with Part 2 "Manufacturers" Article. Retain "Available" for nonproprietary and delete for semiproprietary specifications.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Metal framing systems in this Article require calculation and detail of each unit.
B. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- (690-kPa-) minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
07/15/21 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220529 - 2 2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750). 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200). 5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750). 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 07/15/21 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220529 - 3 F. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500). 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
G. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.
H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 6. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 7. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
J. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
K. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
07/15/21 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220529 - 4 B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
J. Install building attachments in accordance with limitations of structure as per the structural design and component limitations. Do not suspend piping, ductwork or equipment directly off of bare metal roof decking. Provide appropriate cross-bracing as necessary. Do not use eccentric beam clamps on metal bare joists, instead use concentric hangers or bolt through center section.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
07/15/21 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220529 - 5 M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick.
5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
N. Pipe hangers and supports shall be of the same material as the piping. Do not support piping with dissimilar metals. Piping shall be insulated if dissimilar metals are used.
3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
END OF SECTION 220529
07/15/21 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220529 - 6 SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black or blue. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
07/15/21 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220553 - 1 C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 15 feet (3.8 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
END OF SECTION 220553
07/15/21 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220553 - 2 SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Mineral or glass fibers.
2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory-applied jackets. 7. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh. 8. Field-applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
07/15/21 Plumbing Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220700 - 1 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6- mm) dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 93 deg C). 3. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: Aluminum.
07/15/21 Plumbing Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220700 - 2 C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: White.
2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms (0.013 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing
C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.
1. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. 2. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 3. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 4. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. c. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End caps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.
07/15/21 Plumbing Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220700 - 3 2.8 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
2.9 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm)wide with wing or closed seal.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
07/15/21 Plumbing Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220700 - 4 D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [2 inches (50 mm)] [4 inches (100 mm)] o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
07/15/21 Plumbing Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220700 - 5 O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
07/15/21 Plumbing Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220700 - 6 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
3.5 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
07/15/21 Plumbing Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220700 - 7 3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless- steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. 2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. 3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. 4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-) circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. 5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. 07/15/21 Plumbing Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220700 - 8 C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Pipe insulation thickness shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1.
B. Insulate the following piping systems:
1. Domestic Hot Water and Recirculation Hot Water.
a. 1” thick for piping smaller than 1-1/2” in size. b. 1-1/2” thick for piping 1-1/2” and larger in size.
2. Domestic Cold Water.
a. 1/2” thick for all piping.
3. Exposed plumbing fixtures for People with Disabilities. 4. Storm Drainage Roof Drain Leaders and Overflow Leaders – Aboveground.
a. 1” thick for all piping
5. Exposed plumbing fixtures for People with Disabilities.
END OF SECTION 220700
07/15/21 Plumbing Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 220700 - 9
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Specialty valves. 3. Flexible connectors. 4. Retain one of first two subparagraphs below; delete both if water meters are furnished and installed by the utility company. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping and water meters outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE7 .
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components.[ Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.]
C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 1 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn temper.
1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 5. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general- duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.
2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
B. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 2 2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Couplings:
1. Description:
a. Galvanized-steel coupling. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). c. End Connections: Female threaded. d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.
D. Dielectric Nipples:
1. Description:
a. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. b. Pressure Rating: [300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C)]
2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 3 B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.
C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.
D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with setscrew or spring clips.
E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.
F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, setscrew or spring clips.
G. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
2.9 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc- coated, with plain ends.
E. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
2.10 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: [Carbon steel] [Plastic] [Stainless steel]. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: [Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating,] [Stainless steel] of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.11 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic- cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
F. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
G. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
H. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
I. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
J. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
K. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
N. Install piping free of sags and bends.
O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 5 P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
Q. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.
R. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
G. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 6 D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves.
3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.
B. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.
3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 7 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
I. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.10 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
B. Escutcheons for New Piping:
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish. 3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish 07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 8 4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome- plated finish. 5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass. 6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.
3.11 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe. 2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas or Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe.
a. Extend sleeves 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:
a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger. c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes for individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 9 4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe. 5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:
a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger. c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used.
3.12 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building.
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.13 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Piping Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 10 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.15 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable[ and non-potable] domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.16 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 11 B. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); wrought-copper solder- joint fittings; and brazed joints.
C. Aboveground domestic water piping,[NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper pressure-seal- joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.
3.17 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 2. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves. 3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
END OF SECTION 221116
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221116 - 12 SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1. Adjust list below to suit Project. 2. Vacuum breakers. 3. Backflow preventers. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Hose bibbs. 8. Drain valves. 9. Water hammer arresters. 10. Trap-seal primer valves.
B. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
C. See Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for water coolers.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless otherwise indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. 2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221119 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers
1. Standard: ASSE 1001. 2. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping. 3. Body: Bronze. 4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 5. Finish: [Rough bronze] [Chrome plated].
B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers
1. Standard: ASSE 1001. 2. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 3. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 4. Finish: [Chrome or nickel plated] [Rough bronze].
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers
1. Standard: ASSE 1012. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 3. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) or NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Union, solder joint. 6. Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow
1. Standard: ASSE 1013. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 3. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 4. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, or stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 6. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
C. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies
1. Standard: ASSE 1015. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221119 - 2 3. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 4. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 6. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
D. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits
1. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test- procedure instructions.
2.3 BALANCING VALVES
A. Memory-Stop Balancing
1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Port: Standard or full port. 6. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 7. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 8. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 9. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.
2.4 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES
A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices
1. Standard: ASSE 1017. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 3. Type: Thermostatically controlled water mixing valve. 4. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 5. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 6. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature- control handle. 7. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.
2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221119 - 3 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm). b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.045 inch (1.14 mm). c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.10 inch (2.54 mm).
6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.
2.6 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose Bibbs
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
2.7 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221119 - 4 2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water Hammer
1. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 2. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston. 3. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
2.9 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves
1. Standard: ASSE 1018. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum. 3. Body: Bronze. 4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint. 5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint. 6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
E. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
F. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve, and pump.
G. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221119 - 5 H. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
I. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
J. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:
1. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 3. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 4. Water pressure-reducing valves. 5. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
K. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow- prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
07/15/21 Domestic Water Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221119 - 6 SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion- resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. b. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
B. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40, solid wall.
1. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.
C. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221316 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.
C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 2. Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221316 - 2 G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
I. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.
J. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.
K. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
L. Install underground ABS and PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221316 - 3 C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 4. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221316 - 4 B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.
END OF SECTION 221316
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221316 - 5
SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 4. Flashing materials. 5. Grease interceptors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts
1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 3. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts
1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Type: Adjustable housing. 4. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 5. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket 6. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 7. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 8. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 9. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. 10. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221319 - 1 C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts
1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 7. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover.
2.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains
1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 2. Pattern: Area, Floor, Funnel floor or Sanitary drain. 3. Body Material: Gray iron. 4. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel on sanitary drains. 5. Sediment Bucket: Required on sanitary drains. 6. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze. 7. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze or Polished bronze. 8. Top Shape: Round for floor drains, Square for sanitary drains. 9. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: Grated strainer, or partial strainer for sanitary drains. 10. Top Loading Classification: [Extra Heavy-Duty] [Heavy Duty] [Light Duty] [Medium Duty]
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Open Drains
1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping[ with increaser fitting of size indicated].
B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.
C. Air-Gap Fittings
1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221319 - 2 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping.
D. Sleeve Flashing Device
1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 2 inches (51 mm) above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab. 2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
E. Stack Flashing Fittings
1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
F. Vent Caps
1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness. 3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.
B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.5 GREASE INTERCEPTORS
A. Grease Interceptors – Fabricated Type
1. Standard: ASME A112.14.3 and PDI-G101, for intercepting and retaining fats, oils, and greases from food-preparation wastewater.
2. Plumbing and Drainage Institute Seal: Required. 3. Body Material: Seamless thermoplastics.. 4. Two traffic-rated access covers. 5. Cleanout: Integral or field installed on outlet.
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221319 - 3 6. Flow-Control Fitting: Required. 7. Operation: Manual cleaning. 8. As detailed on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
H. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch (25 mm) above floor.
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221319 - 4 I. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.
1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
J. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.
K. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.
L. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
M. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.
1. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on outlet.
N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.
O. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow-control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around sleeve.
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221319 - 5 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
07/15/21 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221319 - 6 SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building.
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion- resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. b. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
B. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40, solid wall.
1. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.
07/15/21 Facility Storm Drainage Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221413 - 1 C. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground storm drainage piping shall be any of the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and coupled joints.
C. Underground storm drainage piping shall be any of the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and coupled joints. 2. Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping."
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
E. Install wall-penetration-fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.
F. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
G. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
07/15/21 Facility Storm Drainage Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221413 - 2 H. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
I. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger. 2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.
K. Install ABS storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2661.
L. Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.
M. Install underground ABS and PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
N. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
C. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
07/15/21 Facility Storm Drainage Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221413 - 3 C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 4. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 (DN 80): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
K. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
L. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 07/15/21 Facility Storm Drainage Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221413 - 4 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221413
07/15/21 Facility Storm Drainage Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221413 - 5
SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties:
1. Cleanouts. 2. Roof drains. 3. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings]
a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: [ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron]
07/15/21 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221423 - 1 2.2 ROOF DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Roof Drains
1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Pattern: Balcony, Canopy, Cornice, Roof, or Scupper drain. 3. Body Material: Cast iron. 4. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 5. Dome Material: Cast iron or PE. 6. Extension Collars: Required. 7. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 8. Sump Receiver: Required.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Downspout Boots:
1. Description: ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe. 2. Size: Same as or larger than connected downspout.
B. Conductor Nozzles:
1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting holes. 2. Size: Same as connected conductor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roof materials are specified in Division 07.
1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 07/15/21 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221423 - 2 2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
F. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.
G. Install cast-iron soil pipe downspout boots at grade with top of hub 12-18 inches above grade.
H. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.
I. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221423
07/15/21 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 221423 - 3
SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired water heaters:
1. Commercial, power direct vent, storage, gas water heaters. 2. Water heater accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
D. Warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
a. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters: Five years.
07/15/21 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 223400 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMMERCIAL, GAS WATER HEATERS
A. Commercial, Power Direct Vent, Storage, Gas Water Heaters: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Bock b. Bradford White Corporation. c. Lochinvar. d. Rheem Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company. e. Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company. f. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.
2. General: Each water heater shall be UL Listed; and, ASME Section IV (HLW) coded and stamped. Each unit shall operate with ASHRAE 118.1 efficiency of not less than 93% at full fire and not less than 97% at minimum fire. 3. Description: Water heater shall be direct fired with modulating pre-mix burner, shall be fully condensing, shall have heat exchanger integrated within the water storage vessel as a unitized structure, and, shall have Impressed Current Cathodic Protection. Power burner shall have full modulation and a minimum firing rate not to exceed 135,000BTU/HR input. Water heaters not having fully modulating input, or, not of unitized heat exchanger integrated within water storage vessel construction, or, not having Impressed Current Cathodic Protection will not be considered equal. 4. Heat Exchanger: The heat exchanger shall be a three-pass configuration integrated within the water storage vessel and shall consist of a dual stage helical fin flue heat exchanger and third-pass glass-lined condensing flues with stainless steel baffles. 5. Water Storage Vessel: The water storage vessel shall be fabricated from carbon steel and have a glass lining bonded to the tank interior by firing at 1500°F to ensure a molecular fusing of glass and steel. 6. Corrosion Control: Impressed Current Cathodic Protection technology shall provide automated corrosion control to the water contact surface of the heat exchanger and water storage vessel. 7. Modulating Air/Fuel Valve and Burner: The water heater burner shall be capable of operating between its rated maximum Input and 135,000 minimum Input at a continuous variable turndown without loss of combustion efficiency. The burner shall not exceed 20 ppm of NOx corrected to 3% excess oxygen. 8. Exhaust flue venting piping shall be polypropylene or AL29-4c stainless steel. Air intake piping may be Schedule 40 PVC, polypropylene, or as approved by the manufacturer.
2.2 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CGA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.
B. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type. Include pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required between gas supply and water heater.
C. Gas Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.
D. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Provide dimensions not less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 07/15/21 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 223400 - 2 E. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.
F. Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks:
1. Manufacturers:
a. AMTROL Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Honeywell Sparco d. Smith, A. O.; Aqua-Air Div. e. State Industries, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co. g. Wessels Co.
2. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory- installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank. 3. Construction:
a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
2.3 INLINE CARTRIDGE CIRCULATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong 2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. 3. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
B. Features:
1. The pumps shall be of the horizontal system lubricated type specifically designed and 2. guaranteed for quiet operation. 3. Pump to be suitable for 225°F at 150 psig working pressure. 4. The pumps shall have a ceramic shaft supported by carbon bearings. Bearings are to 5. be lubricated by the circulating fluid. 6. Pump body shall be lead-free bronze for NBF circulators or stainless steel for SSF 7. circulators. 8. Motor stator to be isolated from circulating fluid through use of stainless steel can. Rotor 9. to be sheathed in stainless steel. 10. Motors shall be non-overloading at any point on the pump curve. Motors to have built-in impedance protection.
07/15/21 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 223400 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated. 2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.
1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves. 2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner. 3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of safety control.
D. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial, water-heater, relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
E. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.
F. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
G. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
H. Fill water heaters with water.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
07/15/21 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 223400 - 4 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect installation, including connections.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 223400
07/15/21 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 223400 - 5
SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Faucets for lavatories and sinks. 2. Flushometers. 3. Toilet seats. 4. Protective shielding guards. 5. Fixture supports. 6. Water closets. 7. Urinals. 8. Lavatories. 9. Kitchen sinks. 10. Service sinks.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.
C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
D. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.
E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
F. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
07/15/21 Plumbing Fixtures Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 224000 - 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.
F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:
1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 3. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3. 4. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 5. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 6. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021. 4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 07/15/21 Plumbing Fixtures Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 224000 - 2 5. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. 6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. 7. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430. 2. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021. 3. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 4. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 5. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 6. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499. 7. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 9. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 10. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. Lavatory Faucets – Sensor Operated - Hardwired
1. Description: Sensor operated, hardwired, Single-control mixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
2.2 SINK FAUCETS
A. Sink Faucets :
1. Description: Kitchen faucet type, three-hole fixture. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
2.3 FLUSHOMETERS
A. Flushometers – Sensor Operated – Hardwired
1. Description: Flushometer for urinal or water-closet-type fixture. Sensor operated, hardwired. Include brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold- open feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts.
a. Dual Flush Design for Water Closets
2.4 TOILET SEATS
1. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.
a. Material: Molded, solid plastic. b. Configuration: Open front without cover. 07/15/21 Plumbing Fixtures Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 224000 - 3 c. Size: Elongated. d. Hinge Type: SS, self-sustaining. e. Class: Standard commercial. f. Color: White.
2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,
1. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold- water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Water-Closet Supports:
1. Description: Combination carrier designed for accessible or standard mounting height of wall-mounting, water-closet-type fixture. Include single or double, vertical or horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.
B. Urinal Supports :
1. Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. 2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
C. Lavatory Supports – Wall Mounted:
1. Description: Type I, lavatory carrier with exposed arms and tie rods for wall-mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. 2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
2.7 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets
1. Description: Wall-mounting, floor-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation. 2. Style: Flushometer – Wall Mounted..
a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture. b. Height: Standard or Accessible. c. Flushometer: Auto Sensor actuator. d. Color: White.
3. Toilet Seat: Elongated.
07/15/21 Plumbing Fixtures Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 224000 - 4 2.8 URINALS
A. Urinals
1. Description: Accessible, wall or Wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation.
a. Type: Washout with extended shields. b. Strainer or Trapway Open trapway with integral trap. c. Color: White. d. Flushometer: Auto Sensor actuator e. Fixture Support: Urinal chair carrier.
2.9 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatories,
1. Description: Accessible, wall, Wall or counter-top vitreous-china fixture.
a. Type: Ledge back or drop-in. b. Color: White. c. Faucet: Lavatory – Auto Sensor Type. d. Supplies: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) chrome-plated copper with stops. e. Drain: Grid or Grid with offset waste.. f. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/2 (DN 32 by DN 40) chrome-plated, cast-brass P- trap; tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon. g. Protective Shielding Guard(s): Required on Accessible Wall Mounted Lavatories. h. Fixture Support: Lavatory .
2.10 SINKS
A. Sinks
1. Description: One, Two or Three-bowl, commercial, counter-mounting] stainless-steel sink.
a. Metal Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm). b. Sink Faucet: manual, two handle. c. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops. d. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 0.045-inch- (1.1- mm-) thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon(s).
2.11 SERVICE SINKS
A. Service Sinks
1. Shoulders shall not be less than 9-3/4” high inside measurement, and not less than 1-1/4" wide. 2. All models have 6” drop at threshold. 3. Drain shall be cast brass with stainless steel strainer cast integral and shall provide for a caulked lead connection not less than 1” deep to a 3” pipe.
07/15/21 Plumbing Fixtures Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 224000 - 5 4. Receptor composed of pearl gray marble chips and white Portland cement ground smooth, grouted and sealed to resist stains. 5. Stainless steel cap of one piece 20 ga. 302 stainless steel cast integral on threshold
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.
E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.
I. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.
J. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.
K. Install toilet seats on water closets.
L. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
M. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.
N. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
07/15/21 Plumbing Fixtures Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 224000 - 6 O. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
P. Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
Q. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 224000
07/15/21 Plumbing Fixtures Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 224000 - 7
SECTION 230000 - HVAC – GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 01 of these specifications, which govern work under DIVISION 23. Refer to other sections of these specifications for additional related requirements.
1.2 SCOPE OF REQUIREMENTS
A. The work covered by Division 23 of the specifications shall include but not be limited to:
1. Furnishing all materials and supplying all labor, equipment and services to install the complete mechanical system as shown on the accompanied drawings and specified herein.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The contract documents including specifications and construction drawings are intended to provide all material and labor to install complete plumbing, heating ventilating and air conditioning systems for the building.
B. Every effort has been made on the design to meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the Codes; therefore, unless Contractor before signing his Contract, shall have notified the Architect, in writing, of any items in conflict with said Codes, he shall thereafter make any minor adjustments necessary to meet said Codes at no cost to the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall refer to the architectural interior detail, floor plans, elevations, and the structural and other Contract Drawings and he shall coordinate his work with that of the other trades to avoid interference. The plans are diagrammatic and show generally the locations of the equipment and are not to be scaled; all dimensions shall be checked at the building.
D. The Contractor shall comply with the project close-out requirements as detailed in General Requirements of Division 01.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS
A. Specifications:
1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment. 2. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences.
B. Drawings:
1. Drawings in general are diagrammatic and indicate sizes, locations, connections to equipment and methods of installation. 2. Scaled and figured dimensions are approximate and are for estimating purposes only. 3. Before proceeding with work check and verify all dimensions.
07/15/21 HVAC – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230000-1 4. Assume all responsibility for fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of equipment and structure. 5. Make adjustments that may be necessary or requested in order to resolve space problems, preserve headroom, and avoid architectural openings, structural members and work of other trades. 6. If any part of Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, apply to Architect or Engineer for his interpretation and decision as early as possible.
1.5 CODES PERMITS AND FEES
A. Mechanical work shall be in accordance with the following:
1. The Contractor at his expense shall obtain permits and inspections required for the mechanical work on this project. Deliver all inspection certificates to the Owner’s Representative prior to final acceptance of the work. 2. Contractor shall pay all costs levied by utility companies and/or governing agencies associated with gas connections and include these costs within his bid. This shall include but not be limited to tap fees, service mains, meter, and vault charges.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. The terms “The Contractor”, when used in Division 23 shall mean the Contractor for mechanical work.
B. The term “Owners Representative” as used in Division 23 generally refers to the Architect or his designated representative in accordance with the General Conditions.
C. The term “Provide” shall mean furnish and install.
1.7 TEMPORARY HEATING
A. See Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.8 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
A. Safety Measures: The Engineer has not been retained to provide design and construction services relating to the Contractor’s safety precautions, or means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours. Provide all required safety measures and consult with the State or Federal safety inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether compliance with State or Federal regulations exist.
B. Head protection: Where pipe hangers, equipment support angles, etc., are exposed in access ways for any maintenance, cover all such potentially injurious protrusions less than 7’-0” above the floor with padding; secure and permanently fasten, and finish to match adjacent finishes.
07/15/21 HVAC – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230000-2 1.9 GUARANTEE
A. The Mechanical equipment and installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance unless and individual item or specification is otherwise noted as longer. The Contractor shall make-good at his own expense all defects in his work, and/or equipment furnished by him, which shall develop at any time during the one year guarantee period and shall stand any expense of cutting and patching and repairing made necessary by his corrections of unsatisfactory work or equipment operation.
1.10 DUCTWORK AND PIPING COORDINATION
A. Prior to installation of the new Division 23 systems, the Contractor shall coordinate the proposed installation with the Architectural and Structural requirements, and all other trades (including HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Ceiling Suspension and Tile systems), and provide reasonable maintenance access requirements.
B. Provide means of access to all valves, dampers, controllers, operable devices and other apparatus which may require adjustment or servicing.
C. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding all existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise the Owners Representative of any discrepancies between that indicated on the Drawings and that existing in the field prior to any installation. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the removal or relocation of installed systems that have been installed without prior notification of the Owners Representative.
1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data per the requirements of Section 013300 Submittals Procedures.
B. See individual Division 23 specification sections for additional submittal requirements.
C. Submittals of Product Data shall be bound in a black 3-ring binder with the project name on the cover. Data within this binder shall be arranged as follows:
1. Provide index tabs for each specification section in the same order and using the same name as appears in the Specifications. 2. Data shall be black and white, on 8 ½” x 11” or 11” x 17”, single, one-sided sheets suitable for copying. Diagrams and drawings larger than 11” x 17” shall be submitted in reproducible form (translucent bond paper). 3. Drawings and catalog data must be clean, neat copies. Fax material or other poor quality copies will not be acceptable.
D. If material or equipment is not as specified or submittal is not complete, it will be rejected. Only completed submittal including all applicable specification sections will be reviewed.
E. Indicate manufacturer, trade name and model number. Include copies of applicable brochure or catalogue material. Indicate sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and options actually being proposed.
F. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation, and technical data sufficient to confirm that equipment meets requirements of drawings and specifications.
07/15/21 HVAC – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230000-3 G. Include wiring, piping and service connection data, motor sizes complete with voltage ratings and schedules.
H. Submit five (5) copies of each shop drawing. The Engineer will retain one stamped copy, one will be provided to the Architect, one will be provided to the owner and a two stamped copies will be returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for distribution of required number of reviewed copies to parties other than the Owner’s Representative(s).
I. An electronic version of the shop drawings in AutoCAD format must be provided to DPW as part of the closeout documents for future reference.
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 01.
B. Keep on site, an extra set of drawings and specifications recording changes and deviations daily. Return these drawings to the Owner’s Representative at the completion of the Project. These drawings shall not be used for any other purposes.
1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Section 017800 Closeout Submittals.
B. See individual Division 23 specification sections for additional Operating and Maintenance Manual requirements.
1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING/STARTUP
A. Instruct the Owners representative(s) in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
B. Individuals present shall include Contractors, subcontractors and equipment factory representatives. These individuals shall assist in instruction and start-up.
C. Instruction period shall occur after final inspection when systems are properly working.
D. Prepare statement and check list to be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. This Statement shall read as follows: “The Contractor, associated factory representatives and subcontractors, have started each system and the total system and have proved their normal operation to the Owner’s representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof.”
Owner’s Representative Contractor
1.15 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS – STANDARDS/CODES
A. Materials used under this Contract, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be new and of the latest and most current model line produced by the manufacturer. Each item of equipment shall conform to the latest Standard Specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials and shall conform to any applicable standards of the United States Department of Commerce.
07/15/21 HVAC – General Provisions Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230000-4 B. Instruct the Owners representative(s) in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when the Project is turned over to the Owner.
C. All electrically driven or connected equipment shall be provided with UL or equivalent label and/or listing in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.
D. All control panels shall be provided with UL or equivalent Label and/or listing in accordance with the requirements of the NEC an applicable local codes.
1.16 EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Section 012500 Substitution Procedures for product prior approval and substitution requirements.
B. Throughout these specifications and drawings, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., are specified or scheduled by manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number. Such designation is to establish standards of desired quality and construction and shall be the basis of design and the bid.
C. Submit proposals to supply alternative materials or equipment in writing, in accordance with Section 012500 Substitution Procedures.
D. Equipment manufacturers listed in individual sections are approved alternatives for this project and are subject to requirements of drawings and specifications. Revisions required to adapt alternatives shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
E. Products furnished other than the (basis of design) shall have similar electrical characteristics as the scheduled or specified equipment. Contractor shall be responsible for any electrical changes caused by products not in accordance with this requirement.
1.17 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP
A. Protect equipment and materials in storage on site, during and after installation until final acceptance. Leave factory covers in place and take special precautions to prevent entry of foreign material into working parts and duct systems.
B. Protect equipment with polyethylene covers and crates.
C. Operate, drain and flush bearings and refill with change of lubricant before final acceptance.
D. Protect bearings and shafts during installation. Grease shafts and sheaves to prevent corrosion. Provide extended nipples for lubrication.
E. Ensure that existing equipment is carefully dismantled and not damaged or lost. Do not re-use existing materials and equipment unless specifically indicated.
1.18 LOCATIONS
A. Coordination of Division 23 equipment and systems to the available space, with other trades. The access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
07/15/21 HVAC – General Ft. Irwin Express (20014) Provisions 230000-5 B. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction of pipes and ducts, as required to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines and avoid structural, electrical, pipe and duct interference’s whether or not indicated on Drawings. Furnish fittings, etc., as required to make these offsets, transitions and changes in direction at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Determine exact route and location of ducts and coordinate and obtain approval for changes from the layout indicated on the drawings with the Owner’s Representative prior to fabrication.
D. Locations of equipment and devices, as shown on the drawings, are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of mechanical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Owner’s Representative prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear.
E. All wiring, equipment, ductwork, tubing, etc., shall be concealed within building construction unless otherwise noted, or in mechanical rooms.
F. Arrange ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels.
1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All cutting and patching of new and existing construction required for the installation of systems and equipment specified in Division 23 shall be the responsibility of the Division 23 Contractor. All cutting shall be accomplished with masonry saws, drills or similar equipment to provide neat uniform openings.
B. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings and roof with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials. All patching shall meet the approval of the Owner’s Representative.
C. All cutting and patching made necessary to repair defective equipment, defective workmanship or be neglect of this Contractor to properly anticipate his requirements shall be included in Division 23.
D. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses or other structural members without the Owner Representative’s written approval.
E. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavement, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work specified or indicated under this Division is responsibility of Division 23.
1.20 SCHEDULING
A. It is understood that while drawings are to be followed as closely as circumstances permit, the Contractor shall be responsible for installation of systems according to the true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. Anything not clear or in conflict will be explained by making application to Owner’s Representative. Should conditions arise where certain changes would be advisable, secure approval from Owner’s Representative for those changes before proceeding with work.
07/15/21 HVAC – General Ft. Irwin Express (20014) Provisions 230000-6 B. Coordinate with the work of various trades when installing interrelated work. Before installation of mechanical items, make proper provision to avoid interference’s. Changes required in work specified in Division 23 caused by neglect to do so shall be made at no cost to Owner.
C. Furnish and install inserts and supports required by Division 23 unless otherwise noted. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are an integral part of other Divisions of the Work to those involved in sufficient time to be built into construction as the Work proceeds. Locate these items and see that they are properly installed. Expense resulting from improper location or installation of items above shall be borne under Division 23.
1.21 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. The locations of existing concealed lines and connection points have been indicated as closely as possible from available information. The Contractor shall assume that such connection points are within a Ten foot (10') radius of the indicated location. Where connection points are not within this radius, the Contractor shall contact the Owner’s Representative for a decision before proceeding or may proceed at his own expense.
B. Connection points to existing work shall be located and verified prior to starting new work.
C. Prior to commencing any excavation or ditching activity, the Contractor shall verify the exact location and inverts of all existing utilities and connection points in the area of his proposed excavation. Notify Owner’s representative for further direction if actual inverts will not allow the proper installation of new work.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages, which might be caused by his failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities.
1.22 PHASING AND SEQUENCE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall be aware that this is a remodel project. There will be occupied areas in the construction areas that must remain operable.
B. Work shall be bid to allow for the remodel nature of this project and the concurrent occupied areas.
C. All systems shall be fully operational to the extent that they are installed at the termination of each phase of the work.
D. System passing through existing, future, or other phase areas shall be installed, if required, to make work installed under the current phase operational.
E. All connections to and disconnection’s from existing utilities shall be coordinated with and approved by the Owner prior to proceeding with the work. Work shall be planned so as to minimize impact to areas not involved in ongoing construction. Where areas not involved in ongoing construction are to be impacted, the contractor shall identify such areas, the extent to which they will be affected and the period of time for which they will be affected. The contractor is advised that the above notification and scheduling requirement may necessitate rescheduling, partial completion and reconnection, overtime work at night or on weekends or delay of the work. Contractor costs incurred due to the above shall be included in the original bid price and shall not be the cause for additional claims or charges to the Owner.
07/15/21 HVAC – General Ft. Irwin Express (20014) Provisions 230000-7 1.23 PROJECT FINALIZATION & STARTUP
A. Upon completion of the equipment and systems installation and connections, the Contractor shall assemble all major equipment factory representatives (Exhaust fans) and subcontractors together for system start-up and Owner instructional period.
B. These individuals shall assist in start-up and check out of their systems and shall remain at the site until the system operation is acceptable and understood to the Owner's maintenance and/or operation personnel.
C. To provide acceptance of operation and instruction by the Owner's representative, the Contractor shall prepare a written statement of acceptance explaining same for the Owner's signature.
The statement should read as follows:
"I, the Contractor, associated factory representative and subcontractor, have started each system and the total system and have proved their normal operation to the Owner's representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof."
Owner's Representative Contractor
Copies of this acceptance shall be sent to the Engineer and the Architect and one copy shall be put in each maintenance manual.
1.24 PUNCH LIST PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative in wiring when the project is ready for punch lists. After punch lists are complete, written notice must be forwarded to the Owner’s Representative requesting final checkout.
B. At the time of final observation, the project foreman shall accompany the observation party and shall remove access panels as required, to allow complete observation of the entire mechanical system.
END OF SECTION 230000
07/15/21 HVAC – General Ft. Irwin Express (20014) Provisions 230000-8 SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Adjust list below to suit Project. 2. Isolation pads. 3. Isolation mounts. 4. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 5. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 6. Housed spring mounts. 7. Elastomeric hangers. 8. Spring hangers. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Restraining braces and cables.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind-Restraint Loading:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 120 mph 2. Building Classification Category: II. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.
B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Sds: 1.2. 3. Sd1: 0643.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint calculations and details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
E. Field quality-control test reports. 07/15/21 Vibration and Seismic Ctrls. for Plumbing Piping and HVAC Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230548 - 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic- restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
B. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge- bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
C. Restrained Mounts : All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge- bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
D. Spring Isolators : Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 07/15/21 Vibration and Seismic Ctrls. for Plumbing Piping and HVAC Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230548 - 2 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa). 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.
E. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
F. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar.
G. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
H. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.
07/15/21 Vibration and Seismic Ctrls. for Plumbing Piping and HVAC Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230548 - 3 I. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig (3.45 MPa) and for equal resistance in all directions.
J. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
B. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized or ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
E. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.
G. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
07/15/21 Vibration and Seismic Ctrls. for Plumbing Piping and HVAC Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230548 - 4 B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.
3.2 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
C. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).
D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
H. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.
07/15/21 Vibration and Seismic Ctrls. for Plumbing Piping and HVAC Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230548 - 5 3.3 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible connections.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members. 4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION 230548
07/15/21 Vibration and Seismic Ctrls. for Plumbing Piping and HVAC Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230548 - 6 SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels. 2. Duct labels.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black or blue. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: White. 07/15/21 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230553 - 1 C. Background Color: Blue, Yellow or Green.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic-laminated or self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:
1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. 3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. Do not label ducts that are exposed to view in finished spaces without ceilings.
END OF SECTION 230553
07/15/21 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230553 - 2 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
2. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. 3. Kitchen hood airflow balancing. 4. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 5. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
B. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.
C. Warranties specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." SMACNA's TABB "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." TAB firm's forms approved by Architect. TABB "Contractors Certification Manual."
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.
07/15/21 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230593 - 1 B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.
B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow- control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents."
D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
07/15/21 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230593 - 2 E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.
J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
Q. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in variable-air-volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 07/15/21 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230593 - 3 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
R. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in [AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems"] [NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems"] [SMACNA's TABB "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing"] and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed- control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. 07/15/21 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230593 - 4 E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. 07/15/21 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230593 - 5 B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
07/15/21 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230593 - 6 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
B. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each kitchen hood. For kitchen hoods designed with integral makeup air, measure and adjust the exhaust and makeup airflow. Measure airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, provide an explanation in the report of the reason(s) why and also the reason why the method used was chosen.
1. Install welded test ports in the sides of the exhaust duct for the duct Pitot-tube traverse. Install each test port with a threaded cap that is liquid tight.
B. After balancing is complete, do the following:
1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection. 2. Measure and record the hood face velocity. Make measurements at multiple points across the face of the hood. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 inches (300 mm) between points and between any point and the perimeter. Calculate the average of the measurements recorded. Verify that the hood average face velocity complies with the Contract Documents and governing codes. 3. Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device. Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to room airflow patterns to achieve optimum results.
C. Visually inspect the hood exhaust duct throughout its entire length in compliance with authorities having jurisdiction. Begin at the hood connection and end at the point it discharges outdoors. Report findings.
1. Check duct slopes as required. 2. Verify that duct access is installed as required. 3. Verify that point of termination is as required. 4. Verify that duct air velocity is within the range required. 5. Verify that duct is within a fire-rated enclosure. 07/15/21 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230593 - 7 D. Report deficiencies.
3.10 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.
G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.12 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data.
07/15/21 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230593 - 8 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fan performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.
3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. 07/15/21 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230593 - 9 B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
07/15/21 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230593 - 10 SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Mineral or glass fibers. b. Flexible elastomeric.
2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory-applied jackets. 7. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh. 8. Field-applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements. 11. Corner angles.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 5. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 6. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 7. Detail field application for each equipment type.
C. Field quality-control reports.
07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I with factory-applied vinyl jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
H. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.
I. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide with factory-applied ASJ. .
J. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.
07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 2 2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive,
C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6- mm) dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 93 deg C). 3. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 3 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: White.
2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms (0.013 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms (0.007 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
7. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms (0.86 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave, for duct, equipment, and pipe.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing
B. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.
1. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. 2. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 3. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 4 4. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. c. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End caps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.
C. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with [white] [stucco-embossed] aluminum-foil facing.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm)wide with wing or closed seal.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square. 07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 5 b. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter. b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches (63 mm). c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
3. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square. b. Spindle: [Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel] [Aluminum] [Stainless steel], fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm) thick, [galvanized-steel] [aluminum] [stainless-steel] sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
5. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel .
2.11 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 6 B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), aluminum according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 7 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
3. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 4. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. 07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 8 B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
3.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3.5 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor- discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 9 b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor- discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. 07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 10 c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless- steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 11 3.7 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. 2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field- applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.
3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply air: 2” thick duct wrap, 0.75 pound density (R-6 minimum). 2. Where indicated on plans, 1.5” thick duct liner, 1.5 pound density (R-6 minimum). 3. Indoor, exposed supply air: none required. 4. Indoor, return air: none required. 5. Indoor, exhaust air: none required.
END OF SECTION 230700
07/15/21 HVAC Insulation Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230700 - 12 SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The rooftop units shall have integral controls. The units shall be capable of connection to the Niagara BAS via BACnet in the future.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each control device indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Schematic flow diagrams. 2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. 3. Details of control panel faces. 4. Damper schedule. 5. Meter schedule 6. DDC System Hardware: Wiring diagrams, schematic floor plans, and schematic control diagrams. 7. Control System Software: Schematic diagrams, written descriptions, and points list.
C. Software and firmware operational documentation.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PROPANE METER
A. The thermal mass flow meter shall directly measure the gas mass flow for calibrated Full Scale velocity settings from 0 to 7,000 feet per minute (with a turndown ratio of at least 100:1).
B. The flowmeter shall track the of overall gas consumption with an accuracy of 1% of reading
C. The flowmeter shall provide repeatability of 0.2% Full Scale
D. The meter shall provide an update of 1 second for a step change in measurement up to 63% of final flow value
E. The flowmeter shall have a 4-20mA flow signal output for rate, a 24VDC pulse for totalized value, and BACnet MS/TP
F. The flow meter shall be In-Line Style
G. The flowmeter shall support field adjustments of the Full Scale flow range, engineering units, pipe size, low flow cutoff, filtering, etc. (SageCom software required).
07/15/21 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230900 - 1 H. The flowmeter shall provide a field In-Situ Calibration Check Verification using the displayed mW
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches (1220 mm) above the floor.
B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated.
C. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.
E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
F. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.
3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.
D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
07/15/21 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230900 - 2 E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test, and adjust, field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. DDC Verification:
1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self- contained pressure regulators. 6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 7. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 8. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 9. Check DDC system as follows:
a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable. b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
07/15/21 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230900 - 3 3.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. RTU-1 & RTU-2
1. Rooftop Units RTU-1 and RTU-2 are constant volume units that operate in occupied mode 24/7. 2. Unit Operation: Unit operation shall be automatic and activated through the programable thermostat. 3. Occupied Mode
a. Airflow 1) Supply fan shall run continuously. 2) The outside air damper shall open to the minimum position to provide the minimum ventilation rate. Coordinate damper position setpoint with balancing contractor. 3) Power exhaust to remain off unless RTU goes into economizer mode.
b. Heating mode 1) Cycle/modulate heat pump compressor in heating mode to maintain room heating setpoint. Modulate the electric heat SCR if heat pump compressor is at full capacity. When the outside air ambient temperature is at 20°F or lower, turn off compressors and use electric heat only. 2) Heat pump defrost cycle to be initiated and controlled by integral controller.
c. Cooling Mode 1) Cycle/modulate heat pump compressor in cooling mode to maintain room cooling setpoint.
4. Economizer Control
a. On a call for cooling, if the outside air temperature is less than the return air temperature, the outside air damper shall modulate open. b. The power exhaust fan shall modulate to maintain a positive building pressure setpoint of 0.01” WC (adj). c. The outside air damper shall return to the minimum position and the power exhaust fan shall turn off when the outside air temperature is greater than the return air temperature.
5. Alarms
a. Dirty filter exceeds 0.65” WG (adj). b. Supply fan failure c. Power exhaust fan failure d. Compressor failure
6. Thermostat Setpoints
a. Heating 70°F (adj). b. Cooling 75°F (adj).
07/15/21 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230900 - 4 B. RTU-3 & RTU-4
1. Rooftop Units RTU-3 and RTU-4 are constant volume units that operate in occupied mode 24/7. 2. Unit Operation: Unit operation shall be automatic and activated through the programable thermostat. 3. Occupied Mode
a. Airflow 1) Supply fan shall run continuously. 2) The outside air damper shall open to the minimum position to provide the minimum ventilation rate. Coordinate damper position setpoint with balancing contractor.
b. Heating mode 1) Cycle/modulate heat pump compressor in heating mode to maintain room heating setpoint. Modulate the electric heat SCR if heat pump compressor is at full capacity. When the outside air ambient temperature is at 20°F or lower, turn off compressors and use electric heat only. 2) Heat pump defrost cycle to be initiated and controlled by integral controller.
c. Cooling Mode 1) Cycle/modulate heat pump compressor in cooling mode to maintain room cooling setpoint.
4. Economizer Control
a. On a call for cooling, if the outside air temperature is less than the return air temperature, the outside air damper shall modulate open. b. As the building pressure increased, excess air will relief through the barometric damper at the RTU. c. The outside air damper shall return to the minimum position when the outside air temperature is greater than the return air temperature.
5. Alarms
a. Dirty filter exceeds 0.65” WG (adj). b. Supply fan failure c. Compressor failure
6. Thermostat Setpoints
a. Heating 70°F (adj). b. Cooling 75°F (adj).
C. EF-1
1. Exhaust Fan EF-1 provides general exhaust for the building and serves restrooms, housekeeping, and the break room. The fan shall operate continuously in conjunction with RTU-4. 2. The control damper shall fully open when the fan is activated and fully close when the fan is off.
07/15/21 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230900 - 5 D. EF-2
1. Exhaust Fan EF-2 serves the Type I hood in “CHOPZ 115”. The fans shall be controlled with a wall switch.
E. AC-1
1. Air Conditioner AC-1 is a cooling-only unit that serves the Managers Office to cool the Data/Communications equipment. Controls are integral to the unit. 2. Set the room temperature to 75°F (adj).
F. DHWP-1
1. Pump DHWP-1 recirculate domestic hot water. Pump shall cycle to maintain water setpoint temperature.
END OF SECTION 230900
07/15/21 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 230900 - 6 SECTION 231126 - LIQUIFIED PETROLEUM GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
B. LPG System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) but not more than 2 psig (13.8 kPa), and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less. Coordinate available gas pressure with Utility Company.
C. Seismic Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated in Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
07/15/21 Facility Propane Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 231126 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends.
4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.
1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe. 2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.
a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet. b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering.[ Vent casing aboveground.] c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. d. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.
4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.
a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet. b. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.
07/15/21 Facility Propane Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 231126 - 2 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 4. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa). 5. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 6. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 7. Maximum Length: 72 inches ((1830 mm).)
B. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: [40] [60]-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).
C. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa). 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.
C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
07/15/21 Facility Propane Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 231126 - 3 3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). 8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. General Requirements:
1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 5. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 8. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 9. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).
C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 6. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 7. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).
07/15/21 Facility Propane Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 231126 - 4 2.6 DIELECTRIC UNIONS
A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1034 kPa)]
B. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.
C. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.
D. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
2.8 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe and sleeve. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one nut and bolt for each sealing element.
2.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 or the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
07/15/21 Facility Propane Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 231126 - 5 C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.
M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.
N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment.
S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.
07/15/21 Facility Propane Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 231126 - 6 U. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing or copper connector.
B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.
D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.
E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints:
1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
D. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
07/15/21 Facility Propane Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 231126 - 7 3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches (1800 mm) of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.
E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.
3.6 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 or the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.8 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
3.9 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:
1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
07/15/21 Facility Propane Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 231126 - 8 B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be one of the following:
1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1. Two-piece, [full] [regular]-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
END OF SECTION 231126
07/15/21 Facility Propane Piping Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 231126 - 9
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. 6. Seismic-restraint devices.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1. Static-Pressure Classes:
a. Supply Ducts 2-inch wg (500 Pa). b. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg (250 Pa). c. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg (250 Pa).
2. Leakage Class:
a. Round Supply-Air Duct: 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa). b. Rectangular Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.29 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa). c. Flexible Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.29 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa).
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and SEI/ASCE 7.>
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
07/15/21 Metal Ducts Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233113 - 1 B. Shop Drawings:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment[,seismic restraints, and vibration isolation.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal:
1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation] for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static- pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
07/15/21 Metal Ducts Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233113 - 2 2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm) in Diameter: Flanged.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches (2286 mm) in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: [G60 (Z180)] [G90 (Z275)]. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
07/15/21 Metal Ducts Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233113 - 3 B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches (102 mm). 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum.
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O.
E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class, positive or negative.
2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
07/15/21 Metal Ducts Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233113 - 4 B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
D. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
2.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by the Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
B. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.
C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized or ASTM A 492, stainless-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double- cable clips.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
E. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
07/15/21 Metal Ducts Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233113 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints for duct static-pressure and leakage classes specified in "Performance Requirements" Article, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1-2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1- 2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements."
07/15/21 Metal Ducts Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233113 - 6 3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.
C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
D. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).
E. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SEI/ASCE 7.
1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c. 2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).
B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.
E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved the Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.
G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.
07/15/21 Metal Ducts Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233113 - 7 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for applications exposed to weather.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel.
B. Intermediate Reinforcement:
1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. Stainless-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
C. Elbow Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."
a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.
07/15/21 Metal Ducts Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233113 - 8 b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm)] and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or Welded.
D. Branch Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."
a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap.
END OF SECTION 233113
07/15/21 Metal Ducts Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233113 - 9
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Control dampers. 3. Flange connectors. 4. Turning vanes. 5. Duct-mounted access doors. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Flexible ducts. 8. Duct accessory hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control damper installations. d. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
07/15/21 Air Duct Accessories Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233300 - 1 B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: [G60 (Z180)] [G90 (Z275)]. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Standard leakage rating. 2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 3. Frames:
a. Hat-shaped, galvanized or stainless-steel channels, 0.064-inch (1.62-mm) minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
4. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized or stainless-steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.
5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or stainless steel. 6. Bearings:
a. Molded synthetic or stainless-steel sleeve. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
B. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick zinc- plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.3 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Frames:
1. Hat, U, or Angle shaped. 2. Galvanized or stainless-steel channels, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick. 3. Mitered and welded corners.
07/15/21 Air Duct Accessories Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233300 - 2 B. Blades:
1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches (200 mm).
2. Parallel- and opposed-blade design. 3. Galvanized or stainless steel. 4. 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick. 5. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
C. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter; galvanized steel or stainless steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.
1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
D. Bearings:
1. Molded synthetic or stainless-steel sleeve. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.
B. Material: Galvanized steel.
C. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.5 TURNING VANES
A. Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
B. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
C. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches (1200 mm) wide and double wall for larger dimensions.
07/15/21 Air Duct Accessories Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233300 - 3 2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression latches d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
2.7 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
B. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch (1.3-mm) carbon steel.
C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
D. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F (1093 deg C).
E. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive or negative.
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches (146 mm) wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
07/15/21 Air Duct Accessories Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233300 - 4 D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
E. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement at start and stop.
2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C).
B. Flexible Duct Connectors:
1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 through 460 mm), to suit duct size. 2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Liquid adhesive plus tape or adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. 07/15/21 Air Duct Accessories Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233300 - 5 B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel.
C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, and equipment. 3. Elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
H. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm). 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm). 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm). 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
I. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
J. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
K. Connect diffusers to low-pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch (1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
L. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
END OF SECTION 233300
07/15/21 Air Duct Accessories Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233300 - 6 SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
C. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. General Description:
1. Maximum continuous operating temperature is 180 Fahrenheit 2. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacture's engraved metal nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number.
B. Wheel: 1. Constructed of aluminum 2. Non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal 3. Statically and dynamically balanced in accordance to AMCA Standard 204-05 4. The wheel cone and fan inlet will be matched and shall have precise running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency.
07/15/21 HVAC Power Ventilators Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233423 - 1 C. Motors:
1. Electronically Commutated Motor
a. Motor enclosures: Open type or Totally enclosed fan cooled. b. Motor to be a DC electronic commutation type motor (ECM) specifically designed for fan applications. AC induction type motors are not acceptable. Examples of unacceptable motors are: Shaded Pole, Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC), Split Phase, Capacitor Start and 3 phase induction type motors. c. Motors are permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with the fan load and pre-wired to the specific voltage and phase. d. Internal motor circuitry to convert AC power supplied to the fan to DC power to operate the motor. e. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed (80% turndown). Speed shall be controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted at the motor or by a 0-10 VDC signal. f. Motor shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds.
D. Housing:
1. Motor cover, shroud, curb cap, and lower windband shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum 2. Shroud shall have an integral rolled bead for extra strength 3. Shroud shall be drawn from a disc and direct air downward 4. Lower windband shall have a formed edge for added strength 5. Motor cover shall be drawn from a disc 6. All housing components shall have final thicknesses equal to or greater then preformed thickness. 7. Curb cap shall have pre-punched mounting holes to ensure correct attachment 8. Rigid internal support structure 9. Leak proof
E. Housing Supports and Drive Frame:
1. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators
F. Vibration Isolation:
1. Rubber isolators 2. Sized to match the weight of each fan
G. Disconnect Switches:
1. NEMA rated: 3R 2. Positive electrical shut-off 3. Wired from fan motor to junction box installed within motor compartment
H. Options/Accessories:
1. Birdscreen:
I. Material Type: Galvanized 07/15/21 HVAC Power Ventilators Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233423 - 2 J. Protects fan discharge
1. Roof Curbs:
K. Types: GPI
L. Mounted onto roof with fan
M. Material: Galvanized
N. Insulation thickness: 1 inch
O. Coating Type: None
1. Curb Seal:
P. Rubber seal between the fan and the roof curb
1. Dampers (EF-1 only):
Q. Type: Motorized
R. Prevents outside air from entering back into the building when fan is off
S. Balanced for minimal resistance to flow
T. Galvanized frames with prepunched mounting holes
U. Types: None
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers or spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
F. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
07/15/21 HVAC Power Ventilators Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233423 - 3 G. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
END OF SECTION 233423
07/15/21 HVAC Power Ventilators Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233423 - 4 SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSERS
A. Round Ceiling Diffuser:
1. Material: Steel or Aluminum. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Style: Multi-cone. 4. Pattern: Two position horizontal. 5. Dampers: Radial opposed blade or butterfly.
B. Square Plaque Diffusers:
1. Diffusers shall consist of a precision formed back cone of one-piece seamless construction which incorporates a round inlet collar of sufficient length for connecting rigid or flexible duct. An inner plaque assembly shall be incorporated that drops no more than ¼” below the ceiling plane to assure proper air distribution performance. The inner plaque assembly shall be completely removable from the diffuser face to allow full access to any dampers or other ductwork components located near the diffuser neck. Finish shall be white powder coat. 2. Provide plaster frame for installation in hard ceilings. 3. Provide and install factory baffles for airflow directional control where indicated on drawings.
C. Steel Supply Grilles:
1. Grilles shall be double deflection type unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 2. Grilles shall be steel construction with a 1-1/4" wide border on all sides, having a minimum thickness of 20-gauge. Screw holes shall be countersunk. Corners shall be welded with full penetration resistance welds with a reinforcing steel patch for extra strength.
07/15/21 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233713 - 1 3. Deflection blades shall be spaced on 3/4" centers. Blades shall extend completely through the side frame on each side to provide stability throughout the complete CFM operating range of the grille. Blades shall be individually adjustable without loosening or rattling, and shall be held in place with tension wire.
2.2 RETURN AND EXHAUST AIR GRILLES
A. Wall-mounted Steel Return and Exhaust Grilles:
1. Grilles shall have fixed deflection blades, which shall be horizontal when viewed from the room (typically, the first dimension indicated is the horizontal dimension). 2. Grilles shall be steel construction with a 1-1/4" wide border on all sides, having a minimum thickness of 20-gauge. Screw holes shall be countersunk. Corners shall be welded with full penetration resistance welds with a reinforcing steel patch for extra strength. 3. Blades shall have a formed curvature, laboratory tested and certified for performance. Blades shall be 20-gauge minimum construction. Fixed deflection angle shall be 35°. 4. Where indicated, integral opposed blade dampers shall be provided, constructed of heavy gauge steel. Damper shall be operable from the face of the grille. 5. Borders of grilles shall be suitable for installation surface and materials. Border type shall be surface mount or otherwise as indicated or required for the associated surface. Verify border requirements.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713
07/15/21 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 233713 - 2 SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, ROOFTOP UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and accessories:
1. Direct-expansion cooling. 2. Electric-heating coils. 3. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section. 4. Integral, space temperature controls. 5. Roof curbs.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.
B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.
C. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.
D. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply-air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
E. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus..
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind-Restraint Performance:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 120 mph. 2. Building Classification Category: II. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by the maximum area of the mechanical component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.
07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 1 B. Seismic Performance: RTUs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
E. Warranty.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ARI Compliance:
1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigerant system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 for minimum efficiency of heating and cooling.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufacturer
A. Products shall be provided by the following manufacturers:
1. Carrier 2. Daikin 3. Trane 4. York 5. (No AAON)
2.2 Rooftop Units – GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish as shown on plans, Daikin Applied Rebel Single Zone Heating and Cooling Unit(s) model DPS. Unit performance and electrical characteristics shall be per the job schedule.
B. Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on prints and drawings:
1. Return plenum / economizer section 2. Filter section 3. Cooling coil section 4. Supply fan section 5. Condensing unit section
C. The complete unit shall be cETLus listed.
D. The unit shall be ASHRAE 90.1-2016 compliant and labeled.
E. Each unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application and include a weatherproof cabinet. Each unit shall be completely factory assembled and shipped in one piece. Packaged units shall be shipped fully charged with R-410 Refrigerant and oil.
F. The unit shall undergo a complete factory run test prior to shipment. The factory test shall include a refrigeration circuit run test, a unit control system operations checkout, a unit refrigerant leak test and a final unit inspection.
G. All units shall have decals and tags to indicate caution areas and aid unit service. Unit nameplates shall be fixed to the main control panel door. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be attached to the control panels. Installation, operating and maintenance bulletins and start-up forms shall be supplied with each unit.
H. Performance: All scheduled EER, IEER, capacities and face areas are minimum accepted values. All scheduled amps, kW, and HP are maximum accepted values that allow scheduled capacity to be met.
I. Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide 12-month parts only warranty. Defective parts shall be repaired or replaced during the warranty period at no charge. The warranty period shall commence at startup or six months after shipment, whichever occurs first.
07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 3 2.3 CABINET, CASING, AND FRAME
A. Panel construction shall be double-wall construction for all panels. All floor panels shall have a solid galvanized steel inner liner on the air stream side of the unit to protect insulation during service and maintenance. Insulation shall be a minimum of 1" thick with an R-value of 7.0 and shall be 2-part injected foam. Panel design shall include no exposed insulation edges. Unit cabinet shall be designed to operate at total static pressures up to 5.0 inches w.g.
B. Exterior surfaces shall be constructed of painted galvanized steel, for aesthetics and long-term durability. Paint finish will include a base primer with a high-quality polyester resin topcoat. Finished, unabraded panel surfaces shall be exposed to an ASTM B117 salt spray environment and exhibit no visible red rust at a minimum of 3,000 hours exposure. Finished, abraded surfaces shall be tested per ASTM D1654, having a mean scribe creepage not exceeding 1/16” at 1,000 hours minimum exposure to an ASTM B117 salt spray environment. Measurements of results shall be quantified using ASTM D1654 in conjunction with ASTM D610 and ASTM D714 to evaluate blister and rust ratings.
C. Service doors shall be provided on the fan section, filter section, control panel section, and heating vestibule in order to provide user access to unit components. All service access doors shall be mounted on multiple, stainless steel hinges and shall be secured by a latch system. Removable service panels secured by multiple mechanical fasteners are not acceptable.
D. The unit base shall overhang the roof curb for positive water runoff and shall seat on the roof curb gasket to provide a positive, weathertight seal. Lifting brackets shall be provided on the unit base to accept cable or chain hooks for rigging the equipment.
2.4 OUTDOOR/RETURN AIR SECTION
A. Unit shall be provided with an outdoor air economizer section. The economizer section shall include outdoor, return, and exhaust air dampers. The economizer operation shall be fully integral to the mechanical cooling and allow up to 100% of mechanical cooling if needed to maintain the cooling discharge air temperature. The outdoor air hood shall be factory installed and constructed from galvanized steel finished with the same durable paint finish as the main unit. The hood shall include moisture eliminator filters to drain water away from the entering air stream. The outside and return air dampers shall be sized to handle 100% of the supply air volume. The dampers shall be parallel blade design. Damper blades shall be gasketed with side seals to provide an air leakage rate of 1.5 cfm / square foot of damper area at 1” differential pressure in according with testing defined in AMCA 500. A barometric exhaust damper shall be provided to exhaust air out of the back of the unit. A bird screen shall be provided to prevent infiltration of rain and foreign materials. Exhaust damper blades shall be lined with vinyl gasketing on contact edges. Control of the dampers shall be by a factory installed direct coupled actuator. Damper actuator shall be of the modulating, spring return type. A comparative enthalpy control shall be provided to sense and compare enthalpy in both the outdoor and return air streams to determine if outdoor air is suitable for “free” cooling. If outdoor air is suitable for “free” cooling, the outdoor air dampers shall modulate in response to the unit’s temperature control system.
B. Economizer assembly Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) shall be 90.1, IECC, and California Title 24 compliant. MicroTech III controls shall display a warning, and write a warning to the BAS, if the economizer malfunctions in accordance with 90.1, IECC, and Title 24 specifications.
07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 4 2.5 EXHAUST FAN
A. Exhaust fan shall be a single width, single inlet (SWSI) airfoil centrifugal fan. The fan wheel shall be Class II construction with aluminum fan blades that are continuously welded to the hub plate and end rim. The exhaust fan shall be a direct drive fan mounted to the motor shaft. Belts and sheaves are not acceptable due to the additional maintenance.
B. The fan motor shall be a totally enclosed EC motor that is speed controlled by the rooftop unit controller. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase. Motors shall be premium efficiency.
C. The unit DDC controller shall provide building static pressure control. The unit controller shall provide proportional control of the exhaust fans from 25% to 100% of the supply air fan designed airflow to maintain the adjustable building pressure setpoint. The field shall mount the required sensing tubing from the building to the factory mounted building static pressure sensor.
2.6 FILTERS
A. Unit shall be provided with a draw-through filter section. The filter rack shall be designed to accept a 2” prefilter and a 4” final filter. The unit design shall have a hinged access door for the filter section. The manufacturer shall ship the rooftop unit with 2” MERV 8 and 4" MERV 14 filters.
2.7 COOLING COIL
A. The indoor coil section shall be installed in a draw through configuration, upstream of the supply air fan. The coil section shall be complete with a factory piped cooling coil and an ASHRAE 62.1 compliant double sloped drain pan.
B. The direct expansion (DX) cooling coils shall be fabricated of seamless high efficiency copper tubing that is mechanically expanded into high efficiency aluminum plate fins. Coils shall be a multi-row, staggered tube design with a minimum of 3 rows. All cooling coils shall have an interlaced coil circuiting that keeps the full coil face active at all load conditions. All coils shall be factory leak tested with high pressure air under water.
C. The cooling coil shall have an electronic controlled expansion valve. The unit controller shall control the expansion valve to maintain liquid subcooling and the superheat of the refrigerant system.
D. The refrigerant suction lines shall be fully insulated from the expansion valve to the compressors.
E. The drain pan shall be stainless steel and positively sloped. The slope of the drain pan shall be in two directions and comply with ASHRAE Standard 62.1. The drain pan shall have a minimum slope of 1/8" per foot to provide positive draining. The drain pan shall extend beyond the leaving side of the coil. The drain pan shall have a threaded drain connection extending through the unit base.
07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 5 2.8 SUPPLY FAN
A. Supply fan shall be a single width, single inlet (SWSI) airfoil centrifugal fan. The fan wheel shall be Class II construction with fan blades that are continuously welded to the hub plate and end rim. The supply fan shall be a direct drive fan mounted to the motor shaft. Belts and sheaves are not acceptable due to the additional maintenance.
B. All fan assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory, including a final trim balance, prior to shipment.
C. Supply fan and motor assembly combinations larger than 8 hp or 22” diameter shall be internally isolated on 1” deflection, spring isolators and include removable shipping tie downs.
D. The fan motor shall be a totally enclosed EC motor that is speed controlled by the rooftop unit controller. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase. Motors shall be premium efficiency.
E. The supply fan shall be capable of airflow modulation from 30% to 100% of the scheduled designed airflow. The fan shall not operate in a state of surge at any point within the modulation range.
2.9 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME CONTROL
A. The unit controller shall include proportional control of the ECM motors on the supply fan based on space temperature. The unit controller shall increase/decrease the speed of the supply fan in order to maintain the space temperature within its setpoint and deadband. The unit controller shall provide discharge air temperature control with the compressor modulation.
2.10 HEATING SECTION
A. The rooftop unit shall include an electrical resistance heating coil section. Staged electric heating coil modules shall be factory installed downstream of the supply air fan in the heating section of the rooftop unit. Heating coils shall be constructed of a low watt density, nickel - chromium alloy resistance wire with intermediate supports that include ceramic bushings. The electrical contactors shall be of the full line-breaking type with all the electrical power legs being disconnected when the contactors are not energized. All electrical circuit wiring shall be designed with copper conductors, aluminum wires are not acceptable. Heating element branch circuits shall be individually fused to a maximum of 48 Amps per NEC requirements. The power supply for the electric heater shall be factory wired into the units’ main power block or disconnect switch.
B. The heating modules shall have an automatic reset, high temperature limit safety protection. A secondary high limit protection shall also be provided that requires a manual reset. An airflow switch shall be provided with the heating module to prevent the electric heater from operating in the event of no airflow.
C. The electric heat elements shall be controlled by the factory installed DDC unit control system. The heater shall have proportional SCR control. The unit controller shall modulate the electric heater to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.
07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 6 D. Field installed heating modules shall require a field ETL certification. Duct heaters mounted within the rooftop unit in the field shall not be acceptable. The manufacturer’s rooftop unit ETL certification shall cover the complete unit including the electric heating modules.
2.11 HEAT PUMP HEATING
A. The evaporator coil, condenser coil, compressors and refrigerant circuit shall be designed for heatpump operation. The refrigerant circuit shall contain a 4-way reversing valve for the heatpump operation. The outdoor coil shall have an electronic expansion valve to control the refrigerant flow. The unit controller shall modulate the expansion valve to maintain compressor operation within the compressor operational envelope.
B. The refrigerant system shall have a pump-down cycle.
C. The unit shall have an electric resistance heating coil for auxiliary heating. When the heatpump operation cannot maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint the electric heating coil shall temper the airstream to the discharge air temperature setpoint.
2.12 CONDENSING SECTION
A. Outdoor coils shall have seamless copper tubes, mechanically bonded into aluminum plate-type fins. The fins shall have full drawn collars to completely cover the tubes. A sub-cooling coil shall be an integral part of the main outdoor air coil. Each outdoor air coil shall be factory leak tested with high-pressure air under water.
B. Outdoor air coils shall be protected from incidental contact to coil fins by a coil guard. Coil guard shall be constructed of cross wire welded steel with PVC coating.
C. Fan motors shall be an ECM type motor for proportional control. The unit controller shall proportionally control the speed of the condenser fan motors to maintain the head pressure of the refrigerant circuit from ambient condition of 25~120°F. Mechanical cooling shall be provided to 25º F. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase.
D. The condenser fan shall be low noise blade design. Fan blade design shall be a dynamic profile for low tip speed. Fan blade shall be of a composite material.
E. The unit shall have scroll compressors. One of the compressors shall be an inverter compressor providing proportional control. The unit controller shall control the speed of the compressor to maintain the discharge air temperature. The inverter compressor shall have a separate oil pump and an oil separator for each compressor that routes oil back to the compressor instead of through the discharge line.
F. Pressure transducers shall be provided for the suction pressure and head pressure. Temperature sensor shall be provided for the suction temperature and the refrigerant discharge temperature of the compressors. All of the above devices shall be an input to the unit controller and the values be displayed at the unit controller.
07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 7 G. Refrigerant circuit shall have a bypass valve between the suction and discharge refrigerant lines for low head pressure compressor starting and increased compressor reliability. When there is a call for mechanical cooling the bypass valve shall open to equalizing the suction and discharge pressures. When pressures are equalized the bypass valve shall close and the compressor shall be allowed to start.
H. Each circuit shall be dehydrated and factory charged with R-410A Refrigerant and oil.
2.13 ELECTRICAL
A. Unit wiring shall comply with NEC requirements and with all applicable UL standards. All electrical components shall be UL recognized where applicable. All wiring and electrical components provided with the unit shall be number and color-coded and labeled according to the electrical diagram provided for easy identification. The unit shall be provided with a factory wired weatherproof control panel. Unit shall have a single point power terminal block for main power connection. A terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Branch short circuit protection, 115-volt control circuit transformer and fuse, system switches, and a high temperature sensor shall also be provided with the unit. Each compressor and condenser fan motor shall be furnished with contactors and inherent thermal overload protection. Supply fan motors shall have contactors and external overload protection. Knockouts shall be provided in the bottom of the main control panels for field wiring entrance.
B. A single non-fused disconnect switch shall be provided for disconnecting electrical power at the unit. Disconnect switches shall be mounted internally to the control panel and operated by an externally mounted handle.
2.14 CONTROLS
A. Provide a complete integrated microprocessor based Direct Digital Control (DDC) system to control all unit functions including temperature control, scheduling, monitoring, unit safety protection, including compressor minimum run and minimum off times, and diagnostics. This system shall consist of all required temperature sensors, pressure sensors, controller and keypad/display operator interface. All MCBs and sensors shall be factory mounted, wired and tested.
B. The stand-alone DDC controllers shall not be dependent on communications with any on-site or remote PC or master control panel for proper unit operation. The microprocessor shall maintain existing set points and operate stand alone if the unit loses either direct connect or network communications. The microprocessor memory shall be protected from voltage fluctuations as well as any extended power failures. All factory and user set schedules and control points shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory. No settings shall be lost, even during extended power shutdowns.
C. The DDC control system shall permit starting and stopping of the unit locally or remotely. The control system shall be capable of providing a remote alarm indication. The unit control system shall provide for outside air damper actuation, emergency shutdown, remote heat enable/disable, remote cool enable/disable, heat indication, cool indication, and fan operation.
D. All digital inputs and outputs shall be protected against damage from transients or incorrect voltages. All field wiring shall be terminated at a separate, clearly marked terminal strip.
07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 8 E. The DDC controller shall have a built-in time schedule. The schedule shall be programmable from the unit keypad interface. The schedule shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory to ensure that it is not lost during a power failure. There shall be one start/stop per day and a separate holiday schedule. The controller shall accept up to sixteen holidays each with up to a 5- day duration. Each unit shall also have the ability to accept a time schedule via BAS network communications.
F. The keypad interface shall allow convenient navigation and access to all control functions. The unit keypad/display character format shall be 4 lines x 20 characters. All control settings shall be password protected against unauthorized changes. For ease of service, the display format shall be English language readout. Coded formats with look-up tables will not be accepted. The user interaction with the display shall provide the following information as a minimum:
1. Return air temperature. 2. Discharge air temperature. 3. Outdoor air temperature. 4. Space air temperature. 5. Outdoor enthalpy, high/low. 6. Compressor suction temperature and pressure 7. Compressor head pressure and temperature 8. Expansion valve position 9. Condenser fan speed 10. Inverter compressor speed 11. Dirty filter indication. 12. Airflow verification. 13. Cooling status. 14. Control temperature (Changeover). 15. VAV box output status. 16. Cooling status/capacity. 17. Unit status. 18. All time schedules. 19. Active alarms with time and date. 20. Previous alarms with time and date. 21. Optimal start 22. Supply fan and exhaust fan speed. 23. System operating hours.
a. Fan b. Exhaust fan c. Cooling d. Individual compressor e. Heating f. Economizer g. Tenant override
G. The user interaction with the keypad shall provide the following:
1. Controls mode
a. Off manual b. Auto c. Heat/Cool d. Cool only 07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 9 e. Heat only f. Fan only
2. Occupancy mode
a. Auto b. Occupied c. Unoccupied d. Tenant override
3. Unit operation changeover control
a. Return air temperature b. Space temperature c. Network signal
4. Cooling and heating change-over temperature with deadband 5. Cooling discharge air temperature (DAT) 6. Supply reset options
a. Return air temperature b. Outdoor air temperature c. Space temperature d. Airflow (VAV) e. Network signal f. External (0-10 vdc) g. External (0-20 mA)
7. Temperature alarm limits
a. High supply air temperature b. Low supply air temperature c. High return air temperature
8. Lockout control for compressors. 9. Compressor interstage timers 10. Night setback and setup space temperature. 11. Building static pressure. 12. Economizer changeover
a. Enthalpy b. Drybulb temperature
13. Currently time and date 14. Tenant override time 15. Occupied/unoccupied time schedule 16. One event schedule 17. Holiday dates and duration 18. Adjustable set points 19. Service mode
a. Timers normal (all time delays normal) b. Timers fast (all time delays 20 sec) 07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 10 H. If the unit is to be programmed with a night setback or setup function, an optional space sensor shall be provided. Space sensors shall be available to support field selectable features. Sensor options shall include:
1. Zone sensor with tenant override switch 2. Zone sensor with tenant override switch plus heating and cooling set point adjustment. (Space Comfort Control systems only)
I. To increase the efficiency of the cooling system the DDC controller shall include a discharge air temperature reset program for part load operating conditions. The discharge air temperature shall be controlled between a minimum and a maximum discharge air temperature (DAT) based on one of the following inputs:
1. Airflow 2. Outside air temperature 3. Space temperature 4. Return air temperature 5. External signal of 1-5 vdc 6. External signal of 0-20 mA 7. Network signal
2.15 ROOF CURB
A. A prefabricated heavy gauge galvanized steel, mounting curb shall be provided for field assembly on the roof decking prior to unit shipment. The roof curb shall be a full perimeter type with complete perimeter support of the air handling section and condensing section. The curb shall be a minimum of 14" high and include a nominal 2" x 4" wood nailing strip. Gasket shall be provided for field mounting between the unit base and roof curb.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.
B. Unit Support: Install unit roof curb level on structural sub-base. Coordinate penetrations and flashing with building construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.
C. Install wind and seismic restraints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.
07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 11 E. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.
1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
F. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." 4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air- distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.
END OF SECTION 237413
07/15/21 Packaged, Outdoor, Rooftop Units Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 237413 - 12
Electrical Specifications
for
ARMY & AIR FORCE EXCHANGE SERVICE
Ft. Irwin Express PN: 4742-20-000002 Bldg # 973 Facility # 4742 0000 000
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER:
COFFMAN ENGINEERS 10 N. Post Street, Ste. 500 Spokane, WA 99201 Ph (509) 328-2994; Fx (509) 328-2999
7/15/21
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 26 – SPECIFICATIONS
26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems 26 09 23 - Network Lighting Control Systems & Lighting Control Devices 26 24 16 - Panelboards 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - Wiring Log 26 51 10 - Interior Lighting
DIVISION 28 - SPECIFICATIONS
28 16 03 - Intrusion Detection System
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
07/15/21 ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 000100 - 1
SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Division 07, Penetration Firestopping.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This specification section provides the minimum requirements for a complete and operational electrical system for an Express. The electrical and low-voltage systems shall include but are not limited to all design, equipment, materials, labor, installation, documentation, testing and services necessary to furnish and install a complete, operational Exchange Express to include but are not limited to the following functions:
1. Retail Store 2. Snack Avenue 3. MPA Area 4. Communications IT Rooms and Hubs and horizontal data cabling 5. Electrical Rooms and Equipment Rooms for panels, sub-distribution, fire alarm and fuel dispensing systems 6. Lighting and Control System to meet current Exchange and UFC Requirements and codes. 7. Fire Alarm Notification System to meet UFC Standards 8. Security Intrusion System – To meet current Base, Fort Standards. 9. Primary medium voltage cabling, underground duct bank, and vault mounted oil-filled transformers for new electrical services to building
B. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation 2. Grout, concrete 3. Access doors and frames 4. Common electrical installation requirements 5. Fire stopping 6. Cleanup/Touchup paint 7. Safety conditions 8. EF/EI material and equipment 9. EF/CI equipment
1.3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. All electrical and limited energy systems, mounting hardware, labor and other items indicated on the Division 26, 27 and 28 drawings, schedules and/or in the specifications shall be included in the Contractor’s bid, unless specifically indicated otherwise. The specifications, schedules, diagrams, details and plans are complementary and what is indicated on any is as binding as if indicated on all. Where a conflict exists between what is shown and what is specified, the more stringent shall govern.
07/15/21 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260500 - 1 B. The contract drawings indicate the extent and the general character and approximate location and arrangement of material and equipment. The documents do not necessarily show the total number of conductors, raceways, boxes, support, access panels, actual routing, block outs, exact device or equipment locations or other such detailed information for the work required. The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials as required by applicable code and product specification for a complete and fully operational installation in accordance with the true intent of the drawings and specifications.
C. All dimensions indicated in the Division 26, 27 and 28 drawings are approximate and are indicated as a guideline only. The Contractor shall adjust the exact rough-in locations as necessary to avoid conflict with structural components or other materials and to assure that fixtures, boxes, etc., can be installed as close to the intended location as possible. Working measurements shall be taken from the building and checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. If conflicts are found the Contractor shall request verification from the Architect before proceeding with that work.
D. The Division 26, 27 and 28 documents do not separate work or responsibilities of sub- contractors. The General Contractor is responsible for defining the scope of work of each contractor. This specification recognizes only one contractor. That is the General Contractor who signs the contract with the Owner. Where the term ‘The Contractor’ is used, it applies to the contractor responsible for the installation of the work described
1.4 ELECTRICAL REFERENCE SYMBOLS & DEFINITIONS
ADA Americans With Disabilities Act AFC Above Finished Ceiling AFF Above Finished Floor Ampacity Capacity expressed in amperes ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials CF/CI Contractor-Furnished and Contractor-Installed Concealed Hidden from sight as in trench, chases, slabs, furred spaces or hung ceilings Contractor Shall mean the General Contractor who signs the contract with the Owner EF/CI Exchange Furnished and Contractor Installed EF/EI Exchange Furnished and Exchange Installed EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. Exposed ‘Not concealed’ as defined above Furnish Supply Galv. Galvanized GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter IBC International Building Code IEC International Energy Code IFC International Fire Code IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association Indicated Indicated on drawings Install Install or apply Mfg. Manufacturer NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters Pub. 70 (latest edition) NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
07/15/21 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260500 - 2 NFPA National Fire Protection Association NREC Non-Residential Energy Code Provide Furnish and install UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UBC Uniform Building Code
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. It is understood that before the manufacture or installation of any of the work under this contract is carried forward, shop drawings of such work shall be submitted for review. Shop drawings shall be submitted in ample time to avoid delay in any of the work. The Contractor shall allow for 30 days minimum for completion of review and processing. Items requiring prompt attention due to long lead delivery or for early construction rough-in, are to be identified. The review of these items will be expedited, with advanced copies returned.
B. The Architect and Engineer’s review of the submittals/shop drawings is intended as a check for general conformance with contract documents only. Failure by the Architect or Engineer to discover an error on a submittal does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications.
C. The Division 26 Contractor shall provide electronic submittals and shop drawings as required by Section 01300 for distribution. In addition, one paper copy of each brochure or shop drawing (up to 11”x17” size) shall be inserted in a common binder, index referenced and equipped with tabbed partitions. Larger size shop drawings shall be submitted separately to the Electrical Engineer.
D. Upon request from the Architect or Engineer, provide material samples for examination, color selection and/or quality control. These samples shall be delivered to the Architect’s or Engineer’s office as directed.
E. Prior to forwarding to the Architect, the Contractor shall review the submittals; mark them with their comments, corrections and approval stamp. The Contractor shall verify that all of the specified requirements are indicated and ensure that the intended items have been identified on the submittal. Submittals shall be clearly marked as to which items, options, colors; models, etc. are being provided. Only the items marked or indicated will be considered as being submitted. If no marks or indications are present on a page, then it will be assumed that nothing applies to this project and the submittal will be rejected. Indicate additional information necessary for the Architect and Engineer to determine the Contractor’s intention, such as the method of feeding panel boards (top or bottom), color selection, equipment options, etc.
F. For material requiring color or finish selection ‘by Architect’, provide separate copies marked ATTENTION (ARCHITECTS NAME) – COLOR/FINISH SELECTION REQUIRED’.
G. Provide brochures and shop drawings on the following materials:
Interior dimensioned plan view and elevations of electrical rooms showing main component arrangement with NEC required working clearances shown Dimensioned elevations and plan view of all electrical spaces Panelboards Safety Switches Fuses Motor Starters Manual Starters 07/15/21 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260500 - 3 Wiring Devices Extra receptacle log with fair cost estimate Relays Wiring (feeders, branch circuits, etc) Lighting Fixtures and drivers Occupancy Sensors Lighting Control Grounding Equipment Conduit and Fittings Identification
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. Show connecting raceways, cables, wire-ways, cable trays, and bus-ways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. 5. To maintain access and keep passageways clear.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section ‘Access Doors and Frames’.
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of fire-stopping specified in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Fire-stopping’.
E. Coordinate all rough-in and circuit routing with other division manufacturer’s shop drawings and submittals for casework and equipment, which requires power or systems connections. Verify the exact locations of all electrical rough-in, devices, equipment or apparatus to be pre- determined work required and to ensure that Division 26, 27 and 28 equipment will fit and function as intended before proceeding with rough-in or installation. Carefully lay out all devices and equipment so that they are not blocked, hidden or rendered inaccessible due to conflict with structure, casework, ductwork, piping, etc.
F. The Contractor shall coordinate all device locations with the architectural documents. Check all door swings (locate switches on strike side of door), window casings, counter back splash, sinks and casework knee spaces and on countertops so that electrical outlets and equipment are accessible and in proper relation to these items.
G. The Contractor shall coordinate and verify the exact location and requirements for connections to equipment furnished under other divisions which require electrical systems connections provided under Division 26, 27 and 28. Verify the location of ductwork, grilles, plumbing, access panels, control devices and other equipment requiring electrical installation.
07/15/21 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260500 - 4 H. The Contractor shall coordinate exact location and requirements for connections to equipment furnished by the Owner. Where equipment is existing to be relocated, field verify circuiting and connection requirements prior to rough-in. where equipment is being purchased new, verify connections with the Owner’s representative.
I. Verify that the wall depth is adequate to allow flush mounting of all panels or enclosures in the intended location prior to installing underground feeders.
J. Verify that all switchgear, panelboards, transformers, enclosures, backboards and other Division 26 provided equipment are located and installed to meet NEC working clearance requirements.
K. The Contractor will not receive extra compensation for cutting, patching, re-finishing or re- wiring required for relocation of work installed due to interference between the various work that could have been avoided, had proper coordination been applied.
1.7 CODES AND CRITERIA
A. Systems will be designed to comply with the following:
1. International Building Code as modified by UFC 1-200-01 2. International Energy Conservation Code 3. International Fire Alarm Code 4. National Electric Code 5. ASHRAE Standard 90.1, 2010 Energy Standards for Buildings 6. Americans with Disability Act (ADA) 7. ANSI/TIA 942 – Telecom Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers 8. UFC 3-400-01 Energy Conservation 9. UFC 3-501-03N Electrical Engineering Preliminary Considerations 10. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems 11. UFC 3-530-01 Interior and Exterior Lighting and Controls 12. UFC 3-55-03 FA Electrical Power Supply and Distribution 13. UFC 3-550-03N Power Distribution Systems 14. UFC 3-560-01 Electrical Safety, O&M; with Change 2 15. UFC 3-580-01 Telecommunications Building Cabling Systems Planning and Design 16. UFC 4-010-01 DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standard for Buildings 17. DoD 5200.1-R DoD Information Security Program 18. DCID 6/9 Physical Security for Sensitive Compartmented Information Facilities 19. JAFAN 6/9 Physical Security Standards for Special Access Program Facilities (DOS) 20. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 21. High Performance Sustainable Building (HPSB) 22. ASHRAE 189.1-2009 Standard for the Design of High Performance Green Buildings 23. 10 CFR 435 Energy Performance Standards (Jan 93) 24. 10 CFR 436 Federal Energy Management and Planning Programs 25. 10 CFR 450 Energy Measures and Energy Audits 26. 24 CFR 39 Cost Effective Energy Conservation and Effectiveness Standards 27. 40 CFR 24 Guideline for Federal Procurement of Building Projects
B. The installation of this work shall comply in every way with the requirements of the laws, ordinances and rules of the State, the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the National Electric Code.
07/15/21 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260500 - 5 C. If any conflict occurs between these rules and this specification, the rules shall govern. Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming with governing codes. This shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the plans or specifications which may be in excess of requirements of hereinbefore mentions rules and not contrary to same.
D. Obtain and pay for all licenses, permits, registration fees and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing the work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of the work by inspectors and give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, non-metallic aggregate grout, non-corrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Access panels shall be the responsibility of each related section of Division 26. All access doors on the project are to be the product of one manufacturer and are to meet the requirements of Division 08 Section ‘Access Doors and Frames’. Closely coordinate the type of access doors and locations with all other Divisions.
B. Where required for access to hidden junction boxes or other Division 26 equipment, the doors shall be sized as necessary to provide proper working clearance. Provide access door at all roll- up gate motors above gyp-board ceilings.
C. Provide identification tags for all Division 26 access doors.
PART 3 – EXECUTIOIN
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
07/15/21 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260500 - 6 F. All material and equipment shall be installed symmetrical, level, plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, except where otherwise indicated.
G. Use ‘water-guard’ compound for all watertight seals to outside or freezer/coolers.
3.2 UTILITIES
A. Power: (Existing)
3.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.
3.4 CLEANUP
A. Removal of refuse, debris, cuttings, packaging, cartons, etc. for work provided under Division 26 shall be the responsibility of each related section of Division 26.
B. Cleanup shall be done continually during construction, at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard to the public, occupants, workmen, the premise and adjacent property.
C. Before acceptance of the installation, carefully clean cabinets, panels, boxes, wiring devices, cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applied.
3.5 TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Touch up or repair of factory finishes that are scratched or marred in shipment or installation shall be the responsibility shall be the responsibility of each related section of Division 26.
B. Thoroughly clean damaged areas and provide primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.
C. Follow paint manufacturer’s written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.
D. Repairs shall be made to the satisfaction of the Government and Contracting Officer.
3.6 SAFETY CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Contracting Officer to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's performance measures, in, on, or near the construction site.
B. Furnish, erect and maintain all barricades, guard structures, warning signs, detour signs, lights and flares as may be required to protect and safeguard from injury or damage.
07/15/21 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260500 - 7 C. Provide bracing, scaffolding, guard rails and protective devices necessary to protect workmen and personnel from personal injury due to electrical installations while on the jobsite.
D. Contractor shall be liable for all damage and injury occurring to the Government’s property on or in the adjacent areas of the work, or which shall occur to any person or property whatsoever by reason of the negligence of the Contractor or any of his employees, or sub- Contractors, or of any breach or violation of the provisions of this agreement, or of any of his duties or obligations under the contract.
E. Temporary power used for construction shall be ground fault protected.
3.7 ELECTRICAL PHASING REQUIREMENTS
A. Construction phasing unless specifically indicated in the architectural drawings or specifications is the responsibility of the General Contractor.
3.8 EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
A. Certain items of equipment will be furnished and installed by Exchange. See drawings references to (EF/EI).
1. See Division 10.
B. The Contractor shall provide for a cooperative with personnel installing Exchange furnished materials and equipment, should overlap of work occur.
3.9 TYPICAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (EF/EI)
A. Equipment or material to be furnished and installed by Exchange but not limited to, is as follows and as indicated on the drawings:
1. All store shelving and fixtures in Sales and Snack Avenue 2. Check-out fixtures in Sales 3. Signage 4. Data and Telephone CAT 6 Cabling Per 271500
3.10 FINAL CONNECTIONS
A. All final electrical connections to Exchange furnished and installed equipment shall be made by the Electrical Contractor as part of the construction contract. The electrical contractor shall provide all conduit, wire, J-boxes, and miscellaneous equipment necessary and make the equipment operational.
B. The Contractor shall adjust all wire sizes and breakers, and disconnect sizes, at no extra cost to the Owner. This cost shall be included in the Bid for connection to all Exchange provided equipment.
3.11 EXCHANGE FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
A. The material noted below will be furnished by the Exchange and shall be installed and made operational by the Contractor. See drawing references to (EF/EI). The Contractor shall provide for and cooperate with personnel furnishing the designated material. 07/15/21 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260500 - 8 B. Provide all conduit and wire to equipment. Electrical Contractor shall field verify nameplate rating prior to pulling in wire and purchasing and installation of disconnects, breakers, etc. after all equipment is on site and ready for installation.
C. Provide cost in bid to adjust all breakers, conduits, wire size, disconnect sizes either direction larger or smaller to equipment after equipment is on site.
3.12 DELIVERY
A. Contractor shall unload, handle, store, protect, uncrate, assemble, set in final position, align, join, and level all Exchange-furnished material, and shall make all utility connections thereto. Exchange will provide supervision for installation of the material. Electrical Contractor shall field verify nameplate ratings of the equipment prior to pulling in wire and making final connections. Contractor shall adjust wire sizes and breaker disconnect sizes (either direction larger or smaller) at no extra cost to the Owner. This cost shall be included in Bid.
3.13 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (EF/CI)
A. Contractor shall install and make connections but not limited to the following Exchange furnished items at locations indicated on drawings:
1. Snack Avenue equipment and vendors equipment
B. Execution
1. Snack Avenue: Provide matching receptacles, three phase and single phase for all cord plug equipment. Provide and include different receptacle combinations from Exchange documents for equipment being furnished with different plug and amp ratings than cut sheet furnished during design. Include cost in bid. Allow $1,500.00 2. Equipment Branch Circuits: Provide different breakers to make connections to Exchange equipment with different amp rating. Install in finished walls and ceilings. Include cost in bid. Allow $1,000.00
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
07/15/21 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260500 - 9
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Copper Conductors – 600 Volt and Less
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 27 Section ‘Communications Horizontal Cabling’ for cabling used for voice and data circuits. 2. Division 26 Section 260553 ‘Identification of Electrical Systems’.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S
A. Manufacturers of wires and cables, subject to requirements of the specifications are Okanite, Pirelli, American Insulated Wire Co., Anaconda-Ericson Inc.; Wire and Cable Division, Belden Division, Cooper Industries, General Cable Corp., Rome Cable Corp., or accepted equal.
B. General: Provide electrical wires and cables of manufacturer’s standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation, and for application indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 degrees C (68 degrees F).
07/15/21 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS /CABLES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260519 - 1 C. All wire shall be rated for the area or method it is to be installed; ie., air plenum, cable tray, direct bury, etc.
2.2 BUILDING WIRE (600V)
A. A complete system of copper conductors shall be installed in the conduit systems. Wire and cable shall be brought to the job in original containers bearing the Underwriters Label. Wire shall be color coded per NEC and marked with gauge, type, and make. All feeders and wiring larger than #2 AWG shall be type THHH or XHHW rated 75 degrees C only. #2 AWG and smaller wire to be type THHN/ THWN.
B. Minimum wire sizes to be as follows:
Lighting and power branch circuits #12 AWG Min Stranded Neutral conductor shared by more than one ckt #10 AWG Min Stranded Control circuits for motors and generators #14 AWG Min Stranded Grounding Conductor #12 AWG Min Communications Systems As noted in respective section of these specification
C. All service conductors shall be stranded. Wires and cables #6 and smaller shall be factory color coded. Wires shall be color coded as follows:
Maximum 250 V Maximum 600V Phase to Phase Phase to Phase
Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red* Orange Phase C Blue Yellow Neutral White Gray Ground Green Green
Use orange for a three phase, four wire delta system.
D. All line voltage circuit conduits shall be provided with a grounding conductor.
2.3 ALUMINUM SUBSTITUTION
A. None Allowed.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal all cables in Raceways finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
07/15/21 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS /CABLES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260519 - 2 D. No more than four branch circuits in any home run. No more than one branch circuit per neutral conductor. When more than three current carrying conductors are installed in a single raceway, wire and/ or conduit size shall be increased to comply with Article 310-17 and 310.15(B)(3)(a) of the NEC.
E. Each branch circuit phase conductor serving isolated ground type receptacles shall be run with a dedicated neutral and dedicated ground wire.
F. For isolated ground circuits provide isolated ground bus and all required switchgear/ panelboard modifications to accommodate the additional neutral grounding conductors.
G. All plastic bushings or other such items shall be installed prior to wire pulling.
H. Where phase tape is required to identify the conductor phase it shall be located at the termination point.
I. Where motor rotation dictates that two conductors be swapped, such swap shall occur at the motor end not the panelboard end or on the load side of any disconnecting device servicing said motor.
J. Each branch circuit phase conductor serving lighting circuits with electronic dimmers shall be provided with a dedicated neutral conductor and such neutral conductors shall not be intermixed.
K. Neatly train wire inside boxes, equipment, contactors, panelboard and other such electrical equipment. Do not bundle conductors with tie-wraps, etc.
L. Conductor length for parallel feeders shall be identical.
M. Conductors shall be suitably protected against painting or other substances throughout the entire installation process. It shall be the Division 26 Contractors’ responsibility to assure that the insulation is in no way susceptible to substances such as paint or plaster. All device openings shall be protected with masking tape or similar protection and this protection maintained until device installation time.
N. Prior to final installation, all conductors shall be pigtail connected. Pigtails to device shall be limited to the minimum number of conductors required to place the device into service.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un-spliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150mm). All outlets shall be connected by 6 inch (150mm) pigtails from the outlet to the branch circuit wiring.
07/15/21 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS /CABLES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260519 - 3 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
C. Remove and replace any defective wire or cable.
END OF SECTION 260519
07/15/21 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS /CABLES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260519 - 4 SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force, or as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
07/15/21 HANGER & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260529 - 1 B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified structural professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4. 4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
07/15/21 HANGER & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260529 - 2 F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. 2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, single-bolt conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. 07/15/21 HANGER & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260529 - 3 C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts, Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or Spring-tension clamps. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi ,28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 07/15/21 HANGER & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260529 - 4 3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
07/15/21 HANGER & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260529 - 5
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.4 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 27 Section ‘Communication Horizontal Cabling’ for interior communication conduits.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
07/15/21 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260533 - 1 C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will retain its enclosure characteristics, including its interior accessibility, after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
E. Source quality-control test reports.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.3 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1; UL 6
1. Rigid threaded zinc-coated steel conduit.
B. IMC: ANSI C80.6; UL 1242
1. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
C. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit or IMC.
1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
07/15/21 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260533 - 2 F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, compression type. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.
2.4 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
B. LFNC: UL 1660
C. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC3, match to conduit type and material.
D. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
E. ENT: Not Allowed
2.5 OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS
A. Description: Comply with UL. 2024 Flex 166 type, approved for plenum on general use installations. Maxcell inner duct styles 3 inch, 3 cell.
2.6 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type, screw-cover type, or flanged-and-gasketed type, rated for location installed.
D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.7 SURVICE POLES
A. Surface Metal Raceways: UL5 two-piece, painted, totally enclosed galvanized steel or aluminum with Snap-On covers. Manufacturer’s custom enamel finish in Wilson Art frosty white 15-73-60 color or as selected by Exchange. Poles to be Hubbell #HBLPP15-Frosty White or equal. Pole can be black in color in electronic sale area. Verify with Exchange.
07/15/21 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260533 - 3 1. A full complement of fittings shall be provided as required for a complete raceway system, including but not limited to, flat, internal and external elbows, tees, entrance fittings, cover clips, wire clips, support clips and end caps. The fittings shall match the base and cover. All fittings shall be supplied with a base where applicable. Transition fittings shall be available to adapt to an existing flush wall box. 2. Device fittings with faceplate and ID labels shall be available to mount stand and devices and device faceplates in single gang configurations.
2.8 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum or galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
I. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.9 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.
1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray or Green. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open or closed bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, ["ELECTRIC.”], ["TELEPHONE."], [‘FIBER’] or as applicable for each service.
07/15/21 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260533 - 4 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.
B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.
2.10 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated ‘wall pipe’, equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.
2.11 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable products by one of the following manufacturers:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Cal Pico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seals and Insulator, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC or RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC as allowed by local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, EMT or as allowed by local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 or 80-PVC, direct buried. 07/15/21 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260533 - 5 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or 4. 6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:
a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating. b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. Includes raceways in the following locations or as otherwise indicated:
a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit, IMC or EMT, with weathertight fittings. 6. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: Plenum-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway in EMT. 7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser- type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway in EMT 8. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: General-use, optical fiber/communications cable raceway, plenum-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway in EMT 9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Sizes Electrical Power/Lighting: 1/2-inc trade size. Communications: 1 inch (27mm) trade size. Fire/Mass Notification Systems: ¾ inch (19mm) trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
07/15/21 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260533 - 6 B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which only two bends are allowed.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Raceways Embedded under Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from Type EPC-40-PVC to rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. Bond rigid steel conduits on IMC. 4. All raceway shall be 12” to 18” minimum below slab, seal around barrier. 5. All feeders shall be 30 inches depth. Do not route under building footings and stem wall footings lengthwise.
I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
K. Install pull cords in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Identify each end to indicate destination.
L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Unless otherwise noted, install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1. 1-Inch Trade Size: Install raceways in maximum lengths of feet. 2. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.
07/15/21 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260533 - 7 M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
N. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.
1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.
2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change. 3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.
O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
P. Recessed Boxes on Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.
Q. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
R. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floors and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
07/15/21 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260533 - 8 C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). 2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm)
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
H. Size pipe sleeves to provide ¼ inch (6.4 mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section ‘Joint Sealants’ for materials and installation.
K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.
L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25 mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron ‘wall pipes’ for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25 mm) annular clear space between rceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.
07/15/21 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260533 - 9 3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
07/15/21 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260533 - 10 SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 9. Device plate identification
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. All material and equipment supplied under this contract shall be identified with an Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) label.
F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
G. Comply with State adopted electrical codes.
07/15/21 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (1932) 260553 - 1 1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on a white field 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type
C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm) high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.
D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.
2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
07/15/21 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (1932) 260553 - 2 B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1. Black letters on a white field, or per NEC. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type
C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm- ) high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.
D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
07/15/21 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (1932) 260553 - 3 E. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2.6 IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND LABELS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment Identification Tags: Two-ply phenolic plastic, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, beveled edges, double stick tape. Black field with ½” high white letters.
2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.
C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 3. Flash protection markings as required by NEC.
2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
07/15/21 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (1932) 260553 - 4 2.9 DEVICE PLATE LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Engraved plate with ¼ inch (6.4mm) high lettering filled with enamel paint. Black for normal systems, red for emergency systems.
B. Accessible Junction and Pull Boxes Within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system, system voltage and circuit number within. Boxes located in accessible ceilings shall have permanent marker pen on outside cover plate, approximately ½ inch (12.5m) high letters, black for normal systems, red for emergency.
2.10 CABLE TIES
A. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.
F. Provide identification as required by NEC and State adopted codes to indicate series ratings, flash protection, disconnecting means, or other information required by Code.
07/15/21 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (1932) 260553 - 5 G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.
H. Wraparound Marker Labels: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
J. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line detectable warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
K. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.
L. Provide identification plates for all disconnect switches which identify the circuit source (panelboard and circuit number) that supplies the disconnect, per NEC and all adopted State code requirements.
M. Equipment Identification, Life Safety or Emergency Systems: All boxes and enclosures, for Article 700 NEC systems larger than six inches by six inches, including transfer switches, generators, and power panels for emergency systems and circuits must be permanently identified with an identification plate that is substantially orange in color. All other device and junction boxes for emergency systems and circuits must be substantially orange in color, both inside and outside.
N. Provide warning signs for rooms, which contain wiring over 600 volts per NEC requirements. Screw signs to the outside of the room door.
O. Where a building or structure is supplied by more than one service, identify the location of all services with permanent plaques per NEC Article 230.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase and pre-printed labels identifying circuit numbers and panel designations.
1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black. 07/15/21 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (1932) 260553 - 6 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White
c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral: Tray
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, more than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive- backed phase and voltage tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.
C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than [30] A, and [120] V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.
D. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl or Snap-around labels. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.
E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags or marker tape to conductors and list source.
F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
07/15/21 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (1932) 260553 - 7 I. Warning Labels for Indoor or Outdoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Phenolic engraved signs with ½” high letters.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system and voltage phase and where fed from. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of all electrical equipment.
J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
K. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used.
L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved phenolic plastic tags self-adhesive. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1- 1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved phenolic plastic tags self-adhesive and mechanically attached with No. 4 chrome round head screws. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. e. Mount tags top and centered on outside of covers and doors.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Motor-control centers. i. Enclosed switches. 200A and above j. Enclosed circuit breakers, 200A and above k. Power transfer switches l. UPS equipment
07/15/21 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (1932) 260553 - 8 M. Equipment Function Labels: On each electrical component associated with the control or disconnecting means of a pieced of equipment, install unique designation labels consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules and operation and maintenance of the equipment serviced. Match other equipment labels.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label b. Outdoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay
2. Equipment to be labeled: a. Enclosed circuit breakers, 100A or less b. Safety switches, 100A or less c. Enclosed controllers. d. Variable-speed controllers. e. Push-button stations. f. Contactors. g. Remote-controlled switches, manual starters, timer switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. h. Battery-inverter units. i. Battery racks. j. Monitoring and control equipment.
N. Provide engraved plates or phenolic plastic nameplates at all switches installed for control of fans, pumps, remotely located lighting, illuminated signs, switched receptacles, contactors or other applications noted on the drawings.
END OF SECTION 260553
07/15/21 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL Ft. Irwin Express (1932) 260553 - 9
SECTION 260923 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS & LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 019113 – General Commissioning Requirements 2. Section 260010 – General Provisions for Electrical Systems 3. Section 260100 – Electrical Requirements: Product substitution procedures 4. Section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification requirements 5. Section 271500 – Telecommunications
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide a Code Compliant Automatic Networked Lighting Control System for interior lighting as indicated on plans and outlined in this section. Control devices under this section are related to distributed networkable and stand-alone systems that are separate from the building’s centralized lighting control panel network system (See section 260943).
1. Control Devices under this section are shown diagrammatically on the drawings and additional Class 1 and/or Class 2 wiring may be required for a complete system. Class 2 wiring may be required in addition to the system network cable (i.e. 0-10V dimming circuits from control modules to lighting fixtures). It shall be the responsibility of the contractor and system vendor to determine the quantity and type of cable/wiring required for the complete and proper operation of the system. System design is based upon intelligent controls and/or lighting fixtures interconnected with network control cables (exception: Small spaces, such as private offices, where occupancy based control can be accomplished with one wall switch type occupancy sensor, to be provided by the same manufacturer). 2. It is the electrical contractor’s responsibility to include all material, labor and programming to provide a complete and properly working system that complies with listed sequences of operation and control zones indicated on the drawings. 3. Proper product adjustment, testing, training and commissioning coordination shall take place in compliance with this document as well as applicable energy codes and listed sequences of operation.
B. Exact configuration, wiring methods, and system topology may vary by manufacturer. The contractor proposing the substitution shall be responsible for all wiring and system components necessary to provide a complete system that functions as designed to meet the specified sequence of operation. The contractor shall be responsible for cost associated with any necessary re-design to the construction documents required for rough-in and installation. All substitutions are contingent on shop drawings, to be provided prior to system pre-installation meeting. Shop drawings shall include detailed information regarding manufacturer’s recommendations for wiring methods, sensor placement, topology, and other system requirements.
07/15/21 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260923 - 1 1.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION AND OPERATION
A. The lighting control system specified in this section shall provide a combination of time-based, sensor-based (both occupancy and daylight), and/or manual lighting control.
B. The system shall be capable of turning lighting loads on/off as well as dimming lights (if lighting load is capable of being dimmed). Dimmable lighting that is not in a daylight zone shall be manually dimmed from the associated control station(s) in the room. Dimmable lighting in daylight zones shall be automatically dimmed, with manual over ride control as described in this specification section and the sequence of operation for the applicable room requirements.
C. All system devices shall be individually addressable and shall be networked together via network control cable to enable digital communication. Contractor to verify cable type and wiring topology required by manufacturer.
D. Individual lighting zones shall be capable of being segmented into sufficient channels of occupancy, photocell, and switch functionality to comply with advanced configurations and sequences of operation. Daylight zones and switched zones may differ in some spaces. System shall be capable of automatically controlling dimmed daylight zones independently of switched zones.
E. The system architecture shall be capable of enabling stand-alone groups (rooms) of devices to function or global functionality as necessary to meet all sequences of operation.
F. System shall be capable of operating a lighting control zone according to several sequences of operation. System shall be able to change a spaces sequence of operation according to a time schedule so as to enable customized time-of-day, day-of-week utilization of a space. Note operating modes should be utilized only in manners consistent with local energy codes.
G. Time of day capabilities must meet local code requirements or at a minimum a 10 hour backup, astronomic time function and Holiday function.
H. Devices located in different lighting zones shall be able to communicate occupancy, photocell, and switch information via the CAT6 network as required to alter time delays, disable/enable functions, remotely monitor activity, etc.
I. The system architecture shall facilitate remote operation via a computer connection.
J. Networked interior distributed lighting controls shall consist of lighting control modules, relays, and associated input devices that operate in default capacity even if network connectivity to the greater system is lost. (Note: control modules may be integrated into light fixture as an “intelligent” light fixture.)
K. Occupancy based controls shall consist of Passive Infrared or dual-technology occupancy sensors connected via network control cable in larger, multi-zone spaces such as classrooms. In small offices, occupancy based controls shall include dual technology, single or multi-zone wall switch type occupancy sensors.
1. Dual technology sensors shall consist of Passive Infrared as a primary technology and Microphonic or Ultrasonic as a secondary technology. 2. Occupancy-based controls for interior lighting shall provide automatic shut-off control as indicated for manual-on or automatic-on lighting as designated by code or sequence of operation. 07/15/21 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260923 - 2 3. Sensors covering 1 lighting zone with 1 lighting level shall be manual on, auto off. Where multiple lighting levels are indicated (bi-level control), sensors shall be auto on to 50%, manual on to 100%, auto off. 4. Occupancy sensors shall provide complete and proper volumetric coverage of each room within the coverage limits of the devices provided, in accordance with the manufacturer’s published coverage limits. Unless otherwise indicated, the coverage pattern shall provide detection of desk activity (hand motion) for over 90% of the room area minimum, as required to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within each room. 5. Where sensors are located in gymnasiums or are indicated to be protected by wire guards, provide wire guards that fit over the devices to be protected. Wire guards for wall-mounted sensors shall secure to the wall, and shall not be attached to the sensor itself. 6. Wall switch occupancy sensors, shall include means for manual adjustment. Sensors shall have adjustable sensitivity and time-delay settings, which shall be adjusted in each room to suit the actual room conditions. The occupancy sensors shall be adjusted such that the presence of one occupant within sight of the sensor is sufficient to keep the controls from automatically shutting off the lighting, with sufficient time-delay to allow an occupant to conduct any normal functions that may be out of sight from the sensor. Sensors covering 1 lighting zone with 1 lighting level shall be manual on, auto off. Where multiple lighting levels are indicated (bi-level control), sensors shall be auto on to 50%, manual on to 100%, auto off. Normal air movement while the room is unoccupied shall not in itself cause the occupancy sensors to remain activated. Sensor/Switches shall be provided with a button for each designated zone of control (or light level with rooms requiring bi-level switching). 7. Occupancy-based controls shall include auxiliary contacts for interface with the energy management or building automation system for HVAC system control, in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 0923. Refer to mechanical plans for required auxiliary contact requirements. Auxiliary contacts may be housed in a network control device, and not the occupancy sensor itself.
L. Daylight harvesting of lighting shall include networked control devices capable of controlling multiple zones, daylight sensors capable of controlling multiple zones integrated with occupancy sensor controls, and system switching/dimming devices capable of override as allowed by code.
1. Day lighting zones shall be established for all general lighting in the indicated rooms as defined by the local energy code. The primary daylight zone shall extend horizontally from the vertical exterior glazing of the space a distance equal to the total head height of the glazing, and for the width of each window plus an additional 0.6 m (2 ft.) on both sides of the window. The secondary daylight zone shall start at the border of the primary daylight zone, and extend two times the head height of the vertical glazing. Each daylight zone, primary and secondary, shall have separate, independent sensors allowing for automatic control and override capability as indicated in the sequence of operation. 2. Separate day lighting zones with separate controls shall be established for all lighting that is under skylights and lighting that is within a horizontal distance from the edge of the skylight of 70 percent of the room’s ceiling-to- floor height. Refer to local energy code for additional information on the definition of daylight zones for horizontal glazing and skylights. 3. Daylight sensors shall consider total amount of available lighting at any given time, from both natural and artificial sources and react to referenced sequences of operation. 4. Daylight sensors shall provide separate adjustable set points and daylight harvesting shall be accomplished by either continuous dimming of fixtures in the daylit zone to less than 20 percent of the rated power at maximum light output OR stepped dimming with two control channels per zone; one step between 50 and 70 percent of design lighting power
07/15/21 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260923 - 3 and another no greater than 35 percent. Stepped dimming systems shall also be capable of automatically turning the daylit zone off and shall incorporate time delays or dead-bands to prevent cycling of light levels of less than three minutes. 5. Multi-level daylight-harvesting controls shall be compatible with occupancy sensors, which shall function as described above to shut off all lights in the room, including those in the day lighting zone, when the room is unoccupied. Occupancy sensors shall shut off the lights in the room regardless of whether the daylight harvesting controls are in the automatic or manual mode and regardless of the ambient illumination. 6. Daylight harvesting controls shall be located according to manufacturer’s instructions. 7. In each room that is equipped with multi-level daylight-harvesting controls, a manual override switch shall be provided. When the manual override wall switch is activated, the controls shall hold the lighting at the user-designated level until the controls are returned to automatic control. Manual over ride shall switch back to automatic control after a 2 hour over ride period or after a cycle of occupancy.
M. Wall Control Stations (other than wall type, stand-alone occupancy sensor switches) shall be Class 2 devices networked with control cable and shall include on/off/dim or scene functions to initiate the proper sequence of operation for the space.
N. A networked UL 924 compliant emergency control device shall be used that monitors a switched circuit providing normal lighting to an area, and an un-switched normal circuit. The unit provides normal ON/OFF/Dim control of emergency lighting along with the normal lighting (ON/OFF control is monitored by the switched monitor circuit). Upon normal power failure (loss of power to un-switched circuit), the emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON and FULL if dimmed until normal power is restored. Upon restoration of normal power, lighting shall function as specified in default mode, which includes dimming and daylight harvesting.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of automatic lighting control device and equipment provided on the Project, up-dated to record changes.
1. Provide one paper copy to Engineer by mail and electronic file.
B. Shop Drawings: Layouts of photocells, occupancy sensors, and network devices necessary for a complete working system. Provide wiring diagrams showing the connection of all system parts, and showing all necessary electrical provisions to accommodate the intent of the design. Layouts of devices and wiring topology to be shown on project lighting plans, and supplemented with one-line wiring diagrams describing complete network configuration and topology.
C. Installation and Start-up Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation and start-up instructions. Submit to the Commissioning Authority with a copy to the Architect.
D. Commissioning Notification: Written notification of the proposed date for performing commission activities. Submit to the Commissioning Authority with a copy to the Architect.
E. Test Reports: Record of all field test data. Submit to the Commissioning Authority with a copy to the Architect.
F. Training Documentation: Sign-off form and attendee sign-in sheet for the training session. Submit to the Commissioning Authority with a copy to the Architect.
07/15/21 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260923 - 4 G. Meeting Minutes: For pre-installation meeting.
H. Contractor shall initiate and schedule a pre-installation meeting with manufacturer’s and owner’s representative.
1.5 INFORMATION FOR OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Submittals: Information submitted for review, up-dated to record any changes.
B. Operating Instructions: Supply a detailed narrative description of the operation of the lighting controls. Indicate application conditions, limitations of use, coverage patterns and adjustments. Include manufacturer’s installation instructions.
C. Maintenance Instructions: List replacement parts, including source. Indicate recommended maintenance and testing procedures and intervals. List all individual system components that require periodic maintenance. Include a service directory with names and telephone numbers to obtain service.
D. Warrantee: Manufacturer’s warranty certificate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. wattstopper, 2. n-light, 3. Hubble and Douglas
B. Materials for complete system shall be provided per manufacturer to meet the performance criteria in this specification, and the sequence of operation for each space. Refer to the lighting control devices schedule for additional information on specific products and intended sequence of operation.
C. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Decora style wiring device shall include “off” and “auto” controls, a dual technology, passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensor and an indicator light that illuminates when the sensor detects occupancy. The sensor shall have a high-density 180° coverage pattern that detects walking motion within 7.5 m (24 ft.) in front of the device and 3.0m (10 ft.) to either side when mounted 1.2 m (4 ft.) above the floor. The device shall be arranged for manual control to switch lights on, and automatic control to switch lights off. Sensors shall have adjustable sensitivity (minimum to maximum) and time delay (30 seconds to 30 minutes) settings. Sensors shall initially be set at maximum sensitivity and 15 minutes delay. The device shall be rated for control of up to 800 Watts of load at 120 VAC or 1200 Watts of load at 277 VAC. The device shall allow no leakage to load when in the “off” mode, and shall have no minimum load requirement. Wall switch occupancy sensors shall be equivalent to the following based on type of control specified: Type DW: Manual ON, Automatic OFF Wall switch type dual technology, passive Infrared and ultrasonic occupancy sensor with built-in override control (off- auto). Furnish the Company’s model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square footage coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; To be furnished by manufacturer of complete distributed lighting control system.
07/15/21 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260923 - 5 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE
A. General: Wire size shall be minimum #12 AWG, except low-voltage control cable. Power and grounding conductors shall be minimum #12 AWG. Cable shall be rated CL2 where installed in conduit. Cable run open air shall be CL2P, plenum rated.
B. Network cable: to be provided per manufacturer’s requirements. Network cable shall be white or green. All network cable to be installed in accordance with requirements in section 271500.
C. Low-Voltage Control Cable: #16 AWG, multi-conductor cable with jacket to match color of network cable, except as otherwise indicated. Quantity of conductors as required for connected devices. Dimming control cabling (0-10V) shall be installed in raceway (1/2” EMT). All cable shall be plenum rated.
2.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed above, and as follows.
1. All network Devices: Sensor Switch nLight, Watt Stopper DLM, Douglas Controls Dialog Room Controller, Creston & Hubbell and Unison Echo. 2. Cable: WattStopper, nLight, Belden, Canare, West Penn, or as specified by the manufacturer.
B. Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 260100.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to beginning rough-in for the automatic lighting controls, The Electrical Contractor shall arrange a pre-installation meeting on the site between all parties involved in the automatic lighting control system installation, including the Electrical Systems Installer, the manufacturer’s Factory Authorized Representative and the Owner’s Representative. All parties shall review the automatic lighting control shop drawings, the manufacturer’s installation instructions, applicable regulations and any site conditions pertinent to installation of the automatic lighting controls. Verify placement of sensors and installation criteria. This meeting should be in conjunction with pre-installation meeting required for Section 260943.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall prepare minutes of the pre-installation meeting and distribute them to all parties in attendance at the meeting, as well as the Owner’s Representative and the Architect.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions in the locations indicated on the Drawings. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. All Category cable shall be installed in accordance with Section 271500.
B. Coordinate the control requirements of all devices and sensors to insure proper operation. Provide all necessary accessories.
07/15/21 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260923 - 6 C. Locate interior photocells where they are protected from direct sunlight and where they can be aimed toward the zone they are controlling. Photocells to be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations, and should be closed-loop, requiring multiple sensors for rooms with multiple daylight zones and zoning per day-lighting requirements. Photocells controlling non dimmed zones shall consider natural and artificial light, but not be in direct sunlight, or directly under a lamp source.
D. Locate and aim occupancy sensors as required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage of controlled areas per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Rooms shall have 90% minimum coverage to completely cover the controlled area. Coverage shall accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room. The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the minimum quantity and placement of sensors that are to be provided. Provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room. Locations shall be carefully selected to insure that coverage patterns are unobstructed.
E. Contractor is to provide a sufficient quantity and layout of occupancy sensors to properly meet coverage and intended sequence of operation. Locations shall be carefully selected to insure that coverage patterns are unobstructed.
F. Mount occupancy sensors and photocells in finished spaces according to manufacturer instructions. In unfinished spaces or where ceiling-type sensors are installed where there is exposed structure, mount the sensors in surface mounted outlet boxes.
G. Wiring shall be arranged as shown on the shop drawings. Wiring and cable shall be installed in raceways or cable trays, except low-voltage cables run above accessible ceilings consisting of removable tiles. Raceways shall be grounded to the power system ground.
1. Network control cables shall connect control devices in uninterrupted continuous runs without intermediate splices. Cables shall be free from shorts or ground and shall be tested. 2. Cables shall be routed so as to maintain a separation of at least 610 mm (24 in) from all heat sources and from transformers, dimmers and other sources of electromagnetic interference. Avoid exposed cables in occupied areas or in areas where they might be damaged as a result of normal use of the area. Where two (2) or more cables run in parallel, they shall be bundled with cable ties. 3. Cables run exposed in ceiling cavities shall be supported by means of suitable cable support devices from the building structure. They shall not lie upon the ceiling, nor shall they be supported from the ceiling frame, ceiling suspension wires, conduits, pipes, ductwork or lights. Supports shall be spaced no further apart than 5 ft. on center. 4. Care shall be exercised during cable installation not to damage cable insulation. Damaged cables shall be removed and replaced. Type and spacing of supports shall ensure that cable will not kink or sag. 5. In each cable that terminates at a ceiling device, provide 305 mm (12 in) of slack cable, neatly coiled, to facilitate future modifications. Terminations shall be made in a neat and workmanlike manner, and in accordance with Section 271500. 6. Terminate the manufacturer’s recommended cable type to the appropriate termination point (RJ45 jack, etc.). 7. Cabling for 0-10V dimming control shall be installed in raceway (1/2” EMT). Cabling for 0-10v dimming control shall be Class 2 and separate from any line voltage wiring. Raceway shall be installed orthogonal to room surfaces, and be concealed by structure wherever possible.
07/15/21 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260923 - 7 8. Networked control cable shall be run orthogonal to room surfaces, be routed along edges of rooms and concealed by structure wherever possible. Electrical Contractor to record and provide identification of control devices (Device ID #’s) in each space per manufacturer instructions.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT, TESTING, DEMONSTRATION & COMMISSIONING
A. Notify the Owner’s Representative and the Commissioning Authority at least two (2) weeks in advance of the date of each test, to allow witnessing of the tests.
B. The automatic lighting control devices are subject to commissioning. The Electrical Contractor shall assist the Commissioning Authority with scheduling and coordinating commissioning activities, developing commissioning test procedures, conducting commissioning tests, preparing commissioning documentation, and developing a training plan in accordance with specific responsibilities as assigned in Section 01 9113. Prior to the start of functional performance testing for commissioning purposes, complete all start-up and checkout procedures and verify that the equipment is completely ready to be tested. A knowledgeable electrician in the employ of the Electrical Installer shall be present during functional performance testing for commissioning purposes.
C. The Contractor is to supply tools, instruments, gauges, testing equipment, protective devices and safety equipment for adjustment, testing and demonstration as needed.
D. Prior to system testing, the Electrical Contractor shall prepare a list of the devices to be tested, together with the associated location of each device and device identification (bar code number, ID, etc.). Include space to indicate test response for each device
E. During adjustment and testing, the Electrical Contractor shall carefully record all settings and all test results, including expected test results, actual test results, and corrective actions taken. Records shall be submitted to the Architect's Consultant and included in the Operating & Maintenance Manuals. A device settings report from applicable software is also acceptable documentation.
F. Initial Set-up: Verify that wiring is correctly connected to each device. Adjust controls to function as specified under the sequence of operation. Settings shall comply with direction received from the Architect’s Consultant and/or sequence of operation. Default to IES light levels if information is not available at time of initial set up.
G. For each room with day lighting controls calibration shall be performed on a day with sufficient daylight. The Electrical Contractor shall schedule additional visits as necessary if conditions are not correct for calibration. Follow manufacturer recommendations.
H. Program sequences of operation that include time functions to operate at times selected by the Owner’s Representative. Information must be available before technician is scheduled for start- up.
I. Field Testing: Test all system features for proper function. Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Verify the sequence of operation for each device. 2. Verify the setting and accuracy of each timing function in each device. 3. Verify that each manual override control functions properly.
07/15/21 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260923 - 8 4. Verify that occupancy sensors do not remain actuated due to normal conditions (e.g., air movement). 5. Verify that occupancy sensors are actuated by hand motion within the entire area of coverage. 6. Verify that occupancy sensors actuate when a person enters the area of coverage. 7. Measure the illumination level in daylight zones equipped with daylight harvesting controls. 8. Correct any deficiencies discovered as a result of the above testing, and completely retest the work affected by such corrections as part of the required installation and testing.
3.4 ON-SITE TRAINING
A. After the system has been completed, tested and is operating properly, the manufacturer’s representative shall demonstrate by actual usage, the proper operation of each system device and function in the presence of the Owner’s Representative. Demonstration shall include repetition of selected field tests, as well as additional adjustment or testing required to demonstrate that the system performs in accordance with the operational description as specified herein and the Owner’s operational requirements.
B. On-site training shall be coordinated with the Commissioning Authority in accordance with Sections 01 9113. At least two (2) months prior to the anticipated training session, submit a draft of the training plan and the proposed participants to the Commissioning Authority for review and comment. Two (2) weeks prior to the scheduled training, submit to the Commissioning Authority a revised written training plan incorporating the Commissioning Authority’s comments.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate end user training to be conducted after the Operating and Maintenance Manuals for the project are completed and available for use during the training session.
D. An authorized factory representative shall conduct six (6) hours minimum of training for the Owner’s maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the lighting controls and applicable software. Training time shall be extended as necessary to satisfy the Owner’s Representative that all pertinent topics have been adequately covered.
E. The Electrical Contractor shall maintain a training sign-in sheet, upon which participants in the training session, including the instructors, shall record their names. The training sign-in sheet shall be dated.
F. On-site training shall follow a written training plan, prepared in advance. The training plan shall outline the topics to be covered, the publications to be used, and the training schedule.
G. The training shall be conducted by technicians who are thoroughly familiar with the equipment and its features, and also with the Project. The training shall include instruction, field demonstration, and over-the-shoulder hands-on exercises. As a minimum, the training shall cover, but not be limited to, the following topics:
1. General overview of lighting controls, including purpose and principle of operation. 2. Location of lighting control components. 3. Interpretation of equipment output devices, such as indicators and status contacts. 4. Control adjustments and settings. 5. Operation of system controls, including over-ride switches. 6. Recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
07/15/21 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260923 - 9 H. At the conclusion of the training session, the Electrical Contractor shall obtain written sign-off from the Commissioning Authority and the Owner’s Representative. Insert a copy of the sign-off form and the training sign-in sheet into the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Submit another copy of the training sign-in sheet to the Architect.
END OF SECTION 260923
07/15/21 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 260923 - 10 SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electric Contractors Association).
B. NEMA AB1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
C. NEMA ICS 2 – Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.
D. NEMA KS1 – Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum)
E. NEMA PB 1 – Panelboards.
F. NEMA PB 1.1 – Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or less.
G. NETA ATS – Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment (published by the International Electrical Testing Association).
H. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1. The term ‘withstand’ means ‘the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 1 1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. Provide electronic file and one paper copy.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Include plan and elevation drawings to ½” scale indicating the equipment layout for the intended installation location. The shop drawings shall include all panelboards, transformers, transfer switches, and all other equipment which is also located in the intended space. 8. The design documents shall indicate a detailed equipment layout. The design layout shall take into account the equipment dimensional differences between all of the manufacturers. 9. It shall be the contractor’s, supplier’s and manufacturer’s responsibility to ensure that the equipment purchased for installation will fit in the space available and to insure compliance with all applicable code required working clearances. 10. Should it be determined that the space available is not sufficient for the manufacturer’s equipment, the contractor shall develop a plan which is acceptable to Exchange and the Government for placing the equipment in a satisfactory layout which meets all required working clearances. 11. No equipment shall be purchased without verification that the space available is adequate for the intended manufacturer’s equipment.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
E. Contractor’s Review: Prior to submitting the required material for review the contractor shall review all documentation received from the manufacturer and make notations to correct non- compliant items. Prior to forwarding the reviewed documentation for review; the contractor shall stamp the documents as ‘Accepted’ or ‘Accepted as Noted’. Submittals which have not been pre-reviewed by the contractor or marked as previously stated shall be rejected.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 2 F. Field Quality-Control Reports:
1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.
G. Panelboard Directories: Installed on the inside of the doorframe under the plastic cover and slot provided. The directory shall be typewritten with spares and spaces written in pencil. The Contractor shall identify the type of load and area served by each circuit using the permanent (end use) room numbers as determined by the Owner. Include all field changes and change order additions and deletions to the schedule. Attached copies of the panel schedules are not acceptable substitution. Provide new updated directories for all existing panelboards with load revisions.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 3 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor- bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. When warranties are required, verify with Owner's counsel that special warranties stated in this article are not less than remedies available to Owner under prevailing local laws.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Verify available warranties and warranty periods with manufacturers listed in Part 2 articles. 2. Warranty Period: five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Siemens 2. Square D 3. Cutler Hammer
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section ‘Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems’.
B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. Provide flush enclosures in all finished walls and vendor stores and janitor rooms. Surface enclosures shall only be allowed in mechanical/electrical areas and MPA area. Do not install panels in retail sales areas.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Kitchen Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Provide stainless steel panel covers on all recessed panels in kitchen and other food prep areas and food service concessions stores. b. Flush Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Surface Back Box in Utility Spaces, Electrical, Mechanical, Storage Rooms: Galvanized Steel. d. Surface Backboxes in Non-Utility Spaces: Finish to match panel and cover. e. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components.
7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 5 C. Incoming Mains Location: Top or Bottom as determined by the contractor.
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Bus structure shall have minimum full current ratings as indicated for the through bus. Section bus shall be equal to or greater than the sum of the maximum ampacity ratings of all devices, including provisions for future devices, in that section. 3. Provisions for future devices shall be such that no additional connectors or bus will be required to add devices. 4. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 7. Neutral Lugs: 100 percent rated. 8. Coordinate and provide lugs sized for the conductors specified.
F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals per UL 67 testing.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, with main circuit breaker.
B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.
C. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards. Provide higher ratings where required by higher fault currents. Series rating not allowed.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, or refrigeration equipment branch circuits. Provide circuit breakers UL listed SWD for NO-OFF control of lighting or other loads.
E. Provide handle locks on all breakers, providing power to motors or cooking equipment.
F. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for dry locations, Type 3R for exterior locations.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 6 G. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with hinge and latch, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, finish in manufacturer’s standard gray enamel.
H. Where multiple section panel cabinets are specified, all cabinets shall be of same dimensions.
I. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
J. Mains: Circuit breaker.
K. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers. All breakers for Exchange provided equipment and walk-in refrigeration freezer, coolers and vender food court equipment plus Division 25 equipment shall be returnable to supplier and new breakers shipped at no extra cost.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Siemens 2. Square D 3. Cutler Hammer
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker
D. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.
E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards. Provide higher ratings where indicated. Series rating not allowed.
F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, or refrigeration equipment branch circuits. Provide circuit breakers UL listed SWD for NO-OFF control of lighting or other loads.
G. Provide handle locks on all breakers providing power to motors or cooking equipment.
H. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for dry locations, Type 3R for exterior locations.
I. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with hinge and latch, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, finish in manufacturer’s standard gray enamel.
J. Where multiple section panel cabinets are specified, all cabinets shall be of same dimensions.
K. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. All breakers for Exchange provided equipment and walk-in refrigeration freezer, cooler and vender food court equipment plus Division 25 equipment shall be returnable to supplier or manufacturer and new breakers shipped at no extra cost.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 7 L. Contactors can be incorporated to switch the entire panelboard or only a portion of the circuits. Coordinate with Drawings and schedules to indicate contactor connections, type, quantity of circuits controlled, current ratings, external control circuits, and number of poles. Consult manufacturers for their respective limitations on and availability of short-circuit ratings and electrically held contactors, which may not be available from all manufacturers.
M. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.
1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. 2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit. 3. Two-wire control with coil-clearing contacts.
N. Doors: Door in door with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
O. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
P. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.
1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. 2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit. 3. Two-wire control with coil-clearing contacts.
2.5 LOAD CENTERS
A. Not Allowed.
2.6 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip b. Long- and short-time pickup levels c. Long- and short-time time adjustments d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay and I2t response
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 8 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240- V, single-pole configuration. 8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application, Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Communication Capability: Circuit breaker mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section Electrical Power Monitoring and Control. f. Shunt Trip: 120V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage. g. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field- adjustable 0.1- to 0.6- second time delay. h. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with ‘a’ and ‘b’ contacts, ‘a contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and ‘b’ contacts operate in reverse of circuit- breaker contacts. i. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit breaker trips. j. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. k. Zone-Selective Interlockin: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices. l. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. m. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position. n. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
2.7 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, bolt-on, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, 3rd edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:
1. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 2. Redundant suppression circuits. 3. Redundant replaceable modules. 4. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 9 5. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. The indicator lights shall indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable. The status of each TVSs module shall be monitored on the front cover of the enclosure as well as on the module. A push- to-test button shall be provided to test each phase indicator. Push-to-test button shall activate a state change of dry contacts for testing purposes. 6. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 7. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 8. TVSS shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than 155% of nominal RMS voltage. 9. TVSS shall be constructed of one self-contained suppression module per phase. 10. The TVSS shall be equipped the following optional items:
a. A transient voltage surge counter shall be located on the diagnostic panel on the front cover of the enclosure. The counter shall be equipped with a manual reset and battery backup to retain memory upon loss of AC power.
11. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 125 kA per mode/250 kA per phase for service entrance panelboards, 80 kA per mode/160 per phase for distribution panelboards and 60 kA per mode/120 per phase for branch panelboards. 12. Minimum single-impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform described in IEEE C62.41.2.
a. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A. b. Line to Ground: 70,000 A. c. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
13. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. 14. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120] b. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120 c. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120
15. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, three-wire circuits shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 400 V. b. Line to Ground: 400 V. c. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
16. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits with high leg shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg. b. Line to Ground: 400 V. c. Neutral to Ground: 400 V. d. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V, 800 V for 240 V, or 2500 V for 600 V.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 10 2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.
2.9 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject Panelboards that are damaged or rested or have been subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
E. The panelboards must fit in the allotted space shown on the drawings and meet all NEC required working clearances.
F. Acceptance of the manufacturers listed above is conditional upon compliance with the electrical and spatial requirements of the project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Ensure that, whatever height is selected for top of trim in first paragraph below, the operating handle of top-most switch or circuit breaker, in on position, is not higher than 79 inches (2000 mm) above finished floor or grade.
D. Mount panelboard with uppermost handle no higher than +72” above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 11 H. Stub six 1-inch empty conduits from each flush mounted panelboard section into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space for future. Stub one 1-1/2” inch empty conduit into accessible ceiling space for each panel.
I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.
J. Comply with NECA 1.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards (SUSE) with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
F. NEC, State and local code required flash protection labels.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Perform tests, inspections and make adjustments per the manufacturer’s instructions and as specified. 2. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative for technical support and to assist in testing.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 12 a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2) The Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to test the ground fault protection system to verify compliance with NEC 230.95c requirements.
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."
C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 262416
07/15/21 PANELBOARDS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262416 - 13
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Wall switches. 4. Isolated-ground receptacles. 5. Solid-state fan speed controls. 6. Pendant cord-connector devices. 7. Cord and plug sets. 8. Floor service outlets, service poles, and multi-outlet assemblies.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
07/15/21 WIRING DEVICES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262726 - 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Exchange-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. Adjust voltage and amperage rating for Exchange-furnished equipment.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in subparagraphs below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Service/Power Poles: 2 extra.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, hand use, heavy duty, grounding type, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Bodies shall be ivory as per NEMA WD1, face and body shall b thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap. Dimensional requirements shall be per NEMA WD6.
B. Provide screw-type, side wired wiring terminals. Connect grounding pole to mounting strap. The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe power contacts and double- or triple-wipe ground contacts.
C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. UL 498, hard use, heavy duty, isolated grounding per NEMA WD1. Face and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap. Dimensional requirements shall meet NEMA WD6. Provide screw-type side wired wiring terminals. The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe power contacts and double- or triple-wipe ground contacts.
07/15/21 WIRING DEVICES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262726 - 2 2.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, extra heavy duty, tamper-resistant, duplex type for mounting in a standard outlet box, feed or non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A. Device shall be capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamps or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFT devices. Provide screw type, side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired pigtail leads. Provide with ‘push- to-test’ button and visible indication of tripped condition. All outdoor GFCI receptacles shall be marked weather-resistant. All receptacles shall have 10 KA short circuit current rating.
2.3 DUPLEX TVSS RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD1, NEMA WD6, UL 498 and UL 1449, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.
1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of 400 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45. 2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is ‘active’ or ‘no longer in service’.
2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A and 250 V, 60A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, L22-30R, and UL 498.
1. High-impact nylon face, with one-piece all brass contact with long spring arm and oxide cutting nibs. 2. Provide twist-locking receptacles to match Exchange furnished equipment voltage, phase and amperage.
2.5 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES
A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade or as required to match Exchange furnished equipment. Coordinate voltage, phase and amperage with Exchange.
1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip. 2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.
2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. 2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 07/15/21 WIRING DEVICES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262726 - 3 2.7 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B. Switches shall be rated quiet-type AC only, 120/277 V, 20 A with number of poles required. Totally enclosed single pole, three way, and four way switches with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Handles shall be ivory. Thermoplastic wiring terminals shall be screw type, side-wired. Contacts shall be silver- cadmium and contact arm shall be one-piece copper alloy.
C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A, Wired Handle.:
1. Provide pilot light adapter for 277 volt operation. 2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."
D. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.
E. Breakers used as switches are not allowed.
F. Special Purpose Switches: Switches used for disconnection purposes (small water heaters, duct heaters, circ pumps, exhaust fans, etc.) shall be same as wall switches. Switches must have a horsepower rating adequate for the motor being switched.
2.8 WIRING DEVICES
A. Wiring devices shall be from one of the manufacturer’s and of the types listed below: PASS & ITEM HUBBELL SEYMOUR LEVITON COOPER
20A GFCI (weather resis) 2095TRWRI ------20A Single-Plex Recpt (I.G.) IG5361 IG8301 -- -- 20A Duplex Recpt (5-20R) 5362 5362A 5362 5362 20A Single Recpt (5-20R) 5361 5361 5361 5361 Isolated Ground IG-5262 IG-6200 5262IG IG5262 20A Dplx Tamper Resis. HBL8300SGA SG63-H -- TR8300 Surge Suppression HBL5260SA 6262-SP 5280 5250S 20A GFCI Recept GFR5352L 2094 8898 XGF20 20A Recept w/ TV Jack/ J Box FLJ62W/RJ600 ------Single Pole Switch CS1221 20AC1 1221-2 1221 Two Pole Switch CS1222 20AC2 1222-2 1222 Three-Way Switch CS1223 2-AC3 1223-2 1223 Four-Way Switch CS1224 20AC4 1224-2 1224 Key Lock SPST Switch* HBL1221RKL 20AC1KL 1221-2KL AH1191N Key Lock 3-Way Switch* HBL1223RKL 20AC3KL 1223-2KL AH1193N Key Lock 4-Way Switch* HBL1224RKL 20AC4KL 1224-2KL AH1194N Recept (NEMA-14-30R) HBL9430A ------50A Recept (NEMA-14-50R) HBL9450A ------
07/15/21 WIRING DEVICES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262726 - 4 2.9 FAN SPEED CONTROLS
A. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. Comply with UL 1917.
1. Continuously adjustable slider, toggle switch or rotary knob, 5 A or 1.5 A. 2. Three-speed adjustable slider or rotary knob, 1.5 A.
2.10 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS
A. Data Outlet:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Siemon CT-CT-05-02 blue in color for primary and yellow in color for secondary.
2. Description: Single 5E jacks for terminating 100 Ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA 568-B.1; eight pin, non-keyed; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.
B. Telephone Outlet:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Siemon Ct-CT-05-02 white in color
2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100 Ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA 568 B.1; eight pin, non-keyed; complying with Category 5e.
2.11 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact nylon or lexan 0.03-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished stainless steel, 0.04-inch- (1-mm-). Plates to be same color as device. Verify plate material with Exchange. 3. Sectional type device plates will not be permitted. 4. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel or smooth, high-impact nylon or lexan. 5. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with in-use cover, and listed and labeled for use in ‘damp or wet locations’. 6. Restrooms: Smooth specification grade satin stainless steel.
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof ‘In-Use’ UL Listed, Gasketed Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum cover.
2.12 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, flap-type or above-floor, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
07/15/21 WIRING DEVICES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262726 - 5 B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C. Service Plate: Rectangular or round, solid brass with satin finish.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: One, two, or three modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 Category 5e jacks for UTP cable.
2.13 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. The surface metal raceway shall consist of a base and cover with convenience power outlets, duplex receptacles with pre-wired branch wiring, for use in dry interiors
B. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
C. Raceway Material: Metal, with Wilsonart frosty white #15-73-60 custom finish.
D. Wire: No. 12 AWG.
2.14 SERVICE POLES
A. Description: Factory-assembled and field-wired units to extend power and voice and data communication from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor or in Exchange provided casework and displays.
1. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch- (65-mm-) square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor to at least 6 inches (150 mm) above ceiling or to structure, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice and data communication cabling. Coordinate with Exchange final casework layout for poles with power only and poles with power and data and security wiring. 2. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to supports or structure supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment where pole extends to finished floor. 3. Casework Mounting: Custom length power poles into checkout, jewelry and electronic casework require two power circuits (one clean power, one dirty power) from these power poles. Make connections to receptacles and J-boxes in casework. The checkout, jewelry and electronics casework also require a data channel for data cabling and security duress alarm wiring. Power only service poles into Exchange provided freestanding casework require custom length pole in field to the 6 ft above floor connection point with two 20 amp duplex receptacles within 12” of top of casework. 4. Finishes: Custom painted finish to match Exchange requirements. Wilsonart frosty white #15-73-60 or current standard. 5. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 5e voice and data communication cables. 6. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, heavy-duty, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R units. 7. Voice and Data Communication Outlets: Two RJ-45 Category 5e jacks or as required per final Exchange store layout. Coordinate with Exchange store layout and Contracting Officer.
07/15/21 WIRING DEVICES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262726 - 6 2.15 FINISHES
A. Color:
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory or as selected by Exchange, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange or with orange triangle on face. Orange devices required for clean power to all checkout counters.
2.16 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and install the extra materials described in subparagraphs below that match products provided. This material shall be installed as directed during construction. The contractor shall consider normal installation conditions with the extra material being installed prior to cover. It shall be assumed that this work will occur below 12’-0” AFF.
B. Extra materials that are not installed during construction shall be turned over to the owner at the end of construction (closeout). Products that are not installed shall be packaged in their original containers with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
C. The contractor shall include the following in their bid:
1. 10 additional straight blade TR duplex receptacles per these specifications. 2. 5 additional TR/WR, GFCI duplex receptacles per these specifications 3. 15 rough-ins including (1) 4” square, deep box with single gang ring and 150’ of 2#12, 1#12G. (THHN) in 3/4" EMT conduit with (6) sweeps. Note: cut-in boxes and flex will be used if extra devices are to be located after wall finish. 4. Labor for installing all extra materials.
D. Submit a fair cost value for the 26 2726 materials and labor specified above, with the Division 26 post bid submittals, on the form following this specification section. This fair cost estimate shall include all rough-in as specified above, contractor direct job expenses such as equipment rental, small tool expense, layout and supervision, etc. for a complete installation as if the material were shown on the drawings and taken off for bid. Breakout material and labor costs for each extra material indicated. Unused labor will be Architect or Engineer’s option. This fair cost value may be applied to other work not included in the bid documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.
1. Mounting Heights:
Switches: +48” to top of J-box Receptacles: +18” to top of J-box.
07/15/21 WIRING DEVICES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262726 - 7 B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls on the wall so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall or half in and half out of a tiled surface. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.
07/15/21 WIRING DEVICES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262726 - 8 F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. Plate edges shall be parallel to wall junctions, door, windows, etc., and flush against the wall surface. All switches and receptacles shall be installed vertical unless in toe space or indicated otherwise.
G. Dimmers:
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers’ device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of Exchange furnished partitions and furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use machine printing with black lettering on white field. Use durable wire markers inside outlet boxes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 262726
07/15/21 WIRING DEVICES Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 262726 - 9
EXTRA RECEPTACLE LOG (26 2726)
FAIR COST ESTIMATE PER DEVICE: TOTAL VALUE:
NO. DATE LOCATION DESCRIPTION QTY. USED
NOTES: 1. PROVIDE A FAIR COST ESTIMATE FOR PER DEVICE ASSEMBLY WHICH CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) WIRING DEVICE (STANDARD AND GFCI), (1) 4" SQUARE BOX, (1) SINGLE GANG PLASTER RING, (1) PLATE, (150') OF 2#12,1#12G IN 1/2" CONDUIT, ALL ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, LABOR TO INSTALL MATERIAL, DIRECT JOB EXPENSES, LAYOUT, SUPERVISION, EQUIPMENT RENTAL, ETC. FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. INSTALLATION OF THIS EXTRA MATERIAL SHALL BE CONSIDERED TO BE MADE UNDER NORMAL CONDITIONS PRIOR TO COVER.
2. AT THE OWNER'S OPTION THE FAIR COST VALUE OF THESE DEVICES MAY BE APPLIED TO OTHER WORK APPLICABLE TO THIS CONTRACT OR REBATED IN THE FORM OF A CREDIT.
SECTION 265110 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specifications, apply to work specified in this section.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 260100 –Electrical Requirements: Product substitution procedures 2. Section 260526 – Grounding & Bonding: Requirements for bonding 3. Section 260529 – Hangers and Supports: Luminaire support requirements 4. Section 260531 – Outlet Boxes: Outlet boxes for use with certain luminaires
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide luminaires, including emergency lighting and exit signs, at all interior indicated on the Drawings.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Luminaires shall be complete with trim, mounting hardware, drivers and LED’s, and shall be suitable for the location in which they are installed.
B. Provide all materials required to entirely complete each luminaire ready for use, in accordance with the conditions and requirements of the building construction.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. In addition to the warranty specified in the General Conditions, each manufacturer of electronic lighting components shall warranty the LED drivers to be free from defects in materials and workmanship. This additional warranty shall extend for a period of at least five (5) years from the date of manufacture or purchase. For items covered by such warranty, the effective date shall in no case be more than two (2) years prior to the final date of Substantial Completion for the Project. The warranty shall cover the full cost of repairing all the components or furnishing replacements in kind. The warranty shall not be pro-rated and there shall be no deductible amount. Include warranty certificate in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Specific product data shall be provided for each type of luminaire, light pole, driver, LED module, provided for interior and exterior lighting on the Project. Include physical description, materials and finishes, dimensions, weights, accessories, photometry data and efficiency data, as applicable. Product data shall also include documentation indicating that all LED systems are provided and tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and LM-80.
B. Shop Drawings: Outline drawings and fabrication details for each custom-fabricated luminaire type provided on the Project, indicating dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
07/15/21 INTERIOR LIGHTING Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 265110 - 1 C. Test Reports: Record of all field test data.
1.6 INFORMATION FOR OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Submittals: Information submitted for review, up-dated to record any changes.
B. Maintenance Instructions: List replacement parts, including source. Indicate recommended and required maintenance and testing procedures and intervals. List all individual lighting components that require periodic maintenance. Identify features, accessory attachments, safety precautions, and procedures for cleaning, lamp replacement and adjustment. Include manufacturer’s installation instructions. Detail trouble-shooting procedures, including step-by- step instructions for typical trouble symptoms. Detail waste disposal procedures, including recycling options, for compliance with government regulations covering the disposal of lamps containing mercury.
C. Warranty: LED module and driver manufacturers’ warranty certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRES
A. See schedule on Drawings for listing of required luminaires. Luminaires shall be complete with trim and mounting hardware. Provide hardware for each luminaire based on the ceiling condition for which it is to be installed.
B. All luminaires shall bear the UL label associated with the type, location, ambient temperature and usage of the individual luminaire.
C. Ballasts shall be completely enclosed in wiring channels arranged to permit easy access. Ballast replacement shall not require removing the luminaire from its mounting. Integral LED drivers shall be installed by the manufacturer, and supplied as a total system with the fixture housing and LED modules/boards.
D. Custom colors shall be applied to luminaires as indicated on the luminaire schedule. Custom colors shall match color samples supplied by the Architect.
E. Luminaires equipped with doors shall be free of light leakage around the doors under normal operating conditions. Doors shall be designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally. Doors shall utilize spring-loaded latches on troffers and on other luminaires that are available with such an option.
F. All plastic lenses shall be UV-stabilized virgin acrylic unless otherwise indicated. Flat plastic lenses shall be KSH-12 or equal and a minimum of 0.125 in thick. Prisms shall be square cut at 45°; round cut is not acceptable.
G. All Alzak finished louvers and reflectors shall be low iridescent type.
H. All louvered luminaires shall be shipped with dust covers. Covers shall be removed after final building vacuuming has been completed.
I. Exit signs shall be internally-illuminated. Illumination of lettering on each sign shall be diffuse, with a minimum luminance of 8.6 candela/m² (2.5 foot-lambert).
07/15/21 INTERIOR LIGHTING Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 265110 - 2 J. Wire Guards: Where luminaires are indicated to be protected by wire guards, provide removable wire guards that are standard products of the luminaire manufacturer and that fit the luminaires to be protected. Wire guards for exit signs and other wall-mounted luminaires shall secure to the wall, and shall not be attached to the luminaire itself.
K. LED luminaires are to be coordinated with the lighting control system, and supplied with all necessary components to produce a fully functional system. Components may vary based on the lighting control approach of the relevant manufacturers. (i.e. The lighting control manufacturer can supply all control equipment and devices to be external of the lighting fixtures. However, some systems that are approved for bid accommodate fixtures with integral components that can be connected to the digital distributed lighting control system).
2.2 DRIVERS
A. Each luminaire shall be provided with a driver of one of the types specified herein, suitable for operation of the indicated LED type. Driver voltage rating shall be selected to match circuit voltage.
B. The wiring to each driver shall be equipped with push-in disconnect plugs. Line-side terminals of disconnect plugs shall be guarded. Disconnect plugs shall be located within the driver compartment.
C. LED Drivers: LED drivers to be between 300mA and 1000mA as indicated by specification information in the luminaire schedule or as required by the manufacturer of each specified product. Each driver to be tested with LED module for which it is installed per IESNA LM-79 and LM-80 certification standards, and the entire fixture/driver/light engine assembly shall be UL listed (all documentation regarding fixture assembly UL listing is required to be included with the fixture submittal package). LED drivers to be supplied by luminaire manufacturer, and supplied with the fixture as a tested and certified system.
1. LED drivers shall be available for voltages listed on drawings. 2. LED drivers shall be provided with 0-10V dimming capabilities in all areas with dimming/daylighting harvesting controls. 3. LED luminaires indicated as emergency lights on drawings shall be compatible with emergency battery packs that support LED, to be provided by the fixture manufacturer.
2.3 LED’s
A. All luminaires shall be complete with LED’s
B. Light-Emitting Diode (LED):
1. White LED Lamps: Projected rated life shall be 60,000 hours, at 85% lumen output (minimum). 2. Colored LED Lamps: Rated 50,000 hour life minimum. 3. LED to be driven at nominal drive current for the specified output (300mA-1000mA range) and tested with LED driver as a complete system for which it is installed per IESNA LM-79 and LM-80 certification standards, as well as tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (UL Listed) for the fixture assembly and electronic for which the LED light engine is being installed). 4. LEDs used in general lighting applications to utilize phosphor technology.
07/15/21 INTERIOR LIGHTING Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 265110 - 3 2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers of luminaires and poles shall be as indicated on the luminaire schedule.
B. Manufacturers of drivers and LED’s shall be as follows:
1. LED Drivers – Phillips Advance, OSRAM, EldoLED, or as provided/recommended by luminaire manufacturer. All driver information for alternate manufacturers to be provided in lighting submittal package.
C. Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 260100.
2.5 SPARE MATERIALS
A. Furnish spare materials in the following quantities:
1. Lenses: two each type. 2. LED drivers: one each type. 3. LED boards: one each type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install luminaires in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and installation details.
B. Provide backboxes matched to luminaires. Where luminaires are suspended from ceiling grids, provide special interface outlet boxes designed to mount on grid members and facilitate power cable interface at the suspension point canopy, such that the power cable neither lies exposed above the ceiling nor runs in raceway. In other locations, where luminaire manufacturer’s installation instructions indicate use of standard outlet boxes, boxes shall be in accordance with Section 260531. Back boxes shall be plumb and perfectly aligned.
C. Installation of custom luminaires shall be coordinated between architect, engineer, contractor, and manufacturer before installation or rough-in or luminaire assemblies or series of luminaire assemblies. Where isometric drawings of fixture assemblies where included in documents, shop drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer and reviewed by architect and engineer prior to installation. Contractor to schedule pre-installation meeting with all parties before installation of custom detailed fixtures are installed.
D. Mount interior luminaires at locations indicated on the drawings. Support luminaires in accordance with Section 260529, in the following manner:
1. Mount suspended stem supported luminaires on swivel hangers where required which are a standard catalog item of the same manufacture as the luminaire. Support from fixture stud, or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. For linear luminaires, provide one more hanger than the number of luminaires in the row. Coordinate degree of swivel with the ceiling slope. Other suspension methods may be considered in mechanical type rooms where approved by Architect’s Consultant.
07/15/21 INTERIOR LIGHTING Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 265110 - 4 2. Mount suspended aircraft cable supported luminaires on canopies which are a standard catalog item of the same manufacture as the luminaire. Support from ceiling grid where applicable, or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. For linear luminaires, provide one more hanger than the number of luminaires in the row. 3. Mount suspended chain supported luminaires on hangers which are a catalog item of the same manufacture as the luminaire. Support from building structure as recommended by the manufacturer. For linear luminaires, provide one more hanger than the number of luminaires in the row. 4. Mount surface and wall luminaires square with the room. Support from fixture stud or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Attach surface luminaires at two (2) support points, minimum. Provide 38mm (1½ in) metal spacers for luminaires which occur on combustible ceilings. Submit spacer for approval. 5. Install recessed luminaries in suspended acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with the provisions of ASTM C636. Verify all ceiling types and ceiling thicknesses to ensure that recessed luminaires can be properly installed. Provide plaster frame mounting kits where recessed luminaires are to be installed in hard ceilings.
E. Verify all measurements. Luminaires must fit in place in a regular, trim and workmanlike manner, to the satisfaction of the Architect’s Consultant. Verify the type of ceiling system in every room or space to ensure that the luminaires are compatible before releasing orders for luminaires. Incorrectly ordered luminaires shall be replaced, with no additional compensation.
F. Verify luminaire locations with the Architectural reflected ceiling plans and interior wall elevations, when such plans and elevations are included in the Contract Documents.
G. Cove lighting luminaires shall be oriented so that the asymmetrical light distribution pattern is directed away from the cove in the direction of the ceiling. Where two rows of luminaires occur in the same cove, the back row shall be mounted sufficiently higher than the front row so that the light distribution is unobstructed.
H. All recessed luminaires installed in accessible ceilings shall be connected by means of a flexible raceway or fixture whip which is attached to a 100 mm (4 in) square junction box. Box may serve more than one luminaire.
I. Provide bonding connections in accordance with Section 260526 and manufacturer’s installation instructions.
J. After installation, all visible labels shall be removed from luminaires.
K. Immediately prior to occupancy, clean reflectors, aperture plates, lenses, louvers, luminaire housings and decorative elements. To prevent static buildup on lenses and reflectors, clean with a manufacturer's recommended water-diluted solution of glass cleaner and allow to air-dry after installation.
L. Broken or defective parts shall be replaced, with no additional compensation.
3.2 ADJUSTMENT & TESTING
A. Notify the Owner’s Representative at least four (4) weeks in advance of the date of each test, to allow witnessing of the tests.
B. Supply tools, instruments, gauges, testing equipment, protective devices and safety equipment for adjustment and testing, and demonstration. 07/15/21 INTERIOR LIGHTING Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 265110 - 5 C. During adjustment and testing, carefully record all settings and all test results, including expected test results, actual test results, and corrective actions taken. Records shall be submitted to the Architect's Consultant and included in the Operating & Maintenance Manuals.
D. Upon completion of the installation, aim all adjustable luminaires as directed by the Architect’s Consultant. After adjustments are complete, measure the illumination levels at selected points to demonstrate proper distribution and coverage. Verify with the Architect’s Consultant the points where illumination levels are to be measured.
E. Operate all LED luminaries at full light output for 100 hours to verify operation and replace any damaged or malfunctioning units and lamps.
F. Correct any deficiencies discovered as a result of the above testing, and completely retest the work affected by such corrections, with no additional compensation.
END OF SECTION 265110
07/15/21 INTERIOR LIGHTING Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 265110 - 6 SECTION 281603 - INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM (ICIDS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This section is a Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-16 section.
B. Drawings and General Provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division-1 Specification sections and all Division-16 sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Intrusion detection devices.
B. Alarm control panel.
C. Signal transmission to Provost Marshall or Security Police.
D. Signaling devices.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08710, Door Hardware.
B. Section 16110, Conduit.
C. Section 16113, Underfloor Ducts.
D. Section 16120, Building Wire and Cable.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
B. NFPA 72, Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems.
C. NFPA 72, Guide for Test Procedures for Protective Signaling Systems.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. A complete operable system providing point-specific surveillance of building perimeter vault, safe, and certain valuable merchandize areas, and duress alarms for cash handling area and other areas.
B. Security: Physical security requirements shall be coordinated through Fort Irwin Physical Security.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
07/15/21 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 281603 - 1 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system wiring diagram showing each device with conduit routing and wiring connection required. Submit to Ft. Irwin Physical Security prior to submitting to Architect/Engineer.
C. Product Data: provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D. Samples: provide 12” long sample of each cable type showing all printed jacket information.
E. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections.
F. Schedules: Provide schedule of specific alarm message corresponding to each sensor (example: DOOR CONTACT – NORTH MANDOOR).
G. Manufacturer’s Installation instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage handling, protection examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
H. Schedule of installers and similar projects for each installer.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Record actual locations of initiating devices and cable and conduit routing.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Operation Data: Operating instructions.
C. Maintenance Data: Maintenance and repair procedures.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installers: Workers specializing in installation of products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Submit names of installers and five similar projects for each installer.
1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 72.
B. Furnish products listed and classified as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
C. Conform to requirements of Provost Marshal or Security Police.
07/15/21 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 281603 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTEGRATED COMMERCIAL INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM (ICIDS)
A. Security system control panels shall be an Integrated Commercial Intrusion Detection System (ICIDS-IV-SMS IV) manufactured by DAQ Electronics LLC, Piscataway Corporate Center, 262 B Old New Brunswick Rd, Piscataway Township, NJ 08854, in flush mounted cabinets. The panel shall have backup battery capable of operating the system for 24 hours without normal AC power. The StarWatch panel shall be capable of interfacing both active and passive sensing devices through remotely located Sensor Interface Modules (SIM). The panel shall receive digital information from SIMs and shall display point specific alphanumeric information to liquid crystal output display corresponding to the digital address of each SIM. The system shall have intrusion detection, access control and database management technology and have zone maps, event logs and keep an audit trail. Provide separate security control panels for main retail store/mall and panel in Class Six and Pharmacy, all with key pads and multi-mode fiber optic cable from each panel to base supplied fiber converter located in existing communications room 433. Pharmacy and Class Six are independent stand-alone systems with their own access codes.
B. The Intrusion Detection System shall use operating system, with Intel 80386EX processor, firmware, encrypted, and carried over the installation LAN. System shall be fully compatible with the existing ICIDS IV security system at Fort Irwin. Battery backup shall be provided for a minimum of six hours for all ICIDS components, to include subcomponents that support the operation and reporting of alarm events. Provide RIOX Input/Output modules, local controllers, RADC modules to support all zones and input point shown on plans.
C. Work includes updating input points and graphics at the central monitoring station to provide a turnkey system. Contractor shall coordinate with the Government Construction Representative for access to the central monitoring station. Provide PIVII cards from access control and create report zones for base monitoring.
D. To reduce system compatibility problems, the Intrusion Detection System shall be installed by MDI-certified ICIDS IV integrator with a minimum of five years of experience installing, integrating, and programming on systems comparable in size to Fort Irwin ICIDS, and with the following clearances and certifications:
1. Company TOP SECRET 2. SECRET for system administrators, programmers, and supervisors 3. CONFIDENTIAL for all others performing work on ICIDS
E. Proof of clearances and certifications shall be provided to the Directorate of Emergency Services.
F. Provide remote keypads for control of sensing devices on all security cabinets. Keypads located outside shall mount in flush backboxes. Provide weatherproof keypad and back boxes outside. Keypads shall be programmable so that certain devices can be turned off/on from remote locations. Keypads shall have the same LCD alphanumeric display as main control panel.
2.2 REMOTE SIGNALING
A. Provide alarm and trouble signals to provost Marshal or Security Police.
07/15/21 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 281603 - 3 2.3 DOOR INTERLOCK
A. Provide relay in ICIDS to de-energize entry mandoor only, electromagnetic or electric strike door locks whenever ICIDS is placed in ACCESS mode (i.e., motion sensors and certain other sensors are placed in a deactivated mode during periods when the building is occupied). Relay shall be rated 120VAC, 20A, SPDT and load contact shall change state automatically whenever system is placed in ACCESS or SECURE mode.
2.4 SENSING DEVICES
A. Furnish and install sensing devices as follows, to meet current security standards:
1. Magnetic Door Switches: Shall meet current base security standards. Switches shall consist of switch and magnet assemblies in separate nonferrous housings. Units shall be rated for 500,000 operations. Door switches shall recess in door frame. Roof hatch and sliding door switches shall be surface mounted, provide with a shunt key switch. Provide mounting hardware. All door switches shall be tamper proof. 2. Duress alarms, double pushbutton type. Pushbutton shall have SPDT contacts. 3. Ceiling mounting 360 degree type passive infrared type motion detectors.
B. Provide Sensor Interface Modules (SIM) at each remote sensing device.
2.5 WIRE AND CABLE
A. All wiring shall be installed in raceways. Refer to Section Conduits. Raceways shall contain cables from no other systems.
B. Unless equipment manufacturer recommends another cable type, provide one two-conductor No. 16 AWG cable for DC power and one two-conductor No. 19 AWG cable for data communications. Cable shall be shown on shop drawings. Provide wire color that is different from other systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Interrupt power to any electromagnetic door locks or electric strike doors through relay in panel.
C. Locate motion detectors at least 5 ft horizontally from heating supply registers.
D. Locate door contacts in head of door frame no more than 6 inches from strike side of door.
E. Provide dedicated 120V branch circuit for each security panel with lock-on device on breaker.
F. Provide multi-mode fiber cable from each ICIDS to base provided fiber converter.
07/15/21 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 281603 - 4 3.2 TESTING
A. Final Testing and Acceptance: Upon completion of work and the contractor’s 100 percent system test, the Contractor shall schedule a 100 percent Performance Verification Test (PVT) with the Directorate of Emergency Services, SAC-D, and Physical Security Office. The Contractor shall provide all PVT documentation. Upon acceptance, the Contractor shall receive results of the PVT.
3.3 TRAINING
A. Provide services of factory representative for four hour training seminar for Exchange Provost Marshal and Security Police personnel. Videotape training. Provide four tapes of training session.
END OF SECTION 281603
07/15/21 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 281603 - 5
Fire Protection Specifications
for
ARMY & AIR FORCE EXCHANGE SERVICE
Ft. Irwin Express PN: 4742-20-000002 Bldg # 973 Facility # 4742 0000 000
FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER:
COFFMAN ENGINEERS 10 N. Post Street, Ste. 500 Spokane, WA 99201 Ph (509) 328-2994; Fx (509) 328-2999
07/15/2021
FIRE PROTECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 21 – SPECIFICATIONS
21 13 13 - Fire Sprinkler System
DIVISION 28 – SPECIFICATIONS
28 31 00 - Fire Alarm System 28 39 00 - Fire Alarm and Mass Notification System, Addressable
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
07/15/21 FIRE PROTECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 000100 - 1
SECTION 211313 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 01 of these specifications, which govern work under DIVISION 21. Refer to other sections of these specifications for additional related requirements.
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS AND GUIDES
1. NFPA 1 – 2018, Fire Code 2. NFPA 13 – 2019, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems 3. NFPA 24 – 2019, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances 4. NFPA 72 – 2019, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code 5. NFPA 101 – 2018, Life Safety Code 6. NFPA 291 – 2016, Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants 7. NFPA 1963 – 2019, Standard for Fire Hose Connections 8. UFC 3-600-01 – 2020 with Change 5, Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities 9. Fort Irwin Design Guideline Manual 10. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 11. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE) 12. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 13. ASTM International (ASTM) 14. FM Global (FM) 15. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 16. Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 17. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) 18. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories as required to provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other construction. Install sprinkler system over and under ducts, piping and platforms when such equipment can negatively effect or disrupt the sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage. Provide a wet-pipe sprinkler system throughout the facility and a dry-pipe system for the exterior loading dock and front entrance overhang. Except as modified herein, the system shall be designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 72. The dry system must utilize nitrogen in lieu of air. Pipe sizes which are not indicated on drawings shall be determined by hydraulic calculation. Design any portions of the sprinkler system that are not indicated on the drawings including locating sprinklers, piping and equipment, and size piping and equipment when this information is not indicated on the drawings or is not specified herein. The design of the sprinkler system shall be based on hydraulic calculations, and the other provisions specified herein.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 1 B. Hydraulic Design
1. Hydraulically design the system to discharge a minimum density of 0.20 GPM/SF over 3,000 SF for wet pipe systems and 0.20 GPM/SF over 3,500 SF for dry pipe systems, in ordinary hazard group areas (retail space, mechanical room, storage room) with a minimum K- factor of 8.0. In all areas with a slope greater than 2” over 12” shall have an increase design area of 30% in accordance with UFC 3-600-01. Hydraulic calculations shall be in accordance with the Area/Density Method of NFPA 13. 2. Hose Stream Demand shall 250 GPM. 3. Basis for Calculations
a. The automatic fire sprinkler system will be supplied by the site potable water system. b. The design of the system shall be based upon the site potable water supply, flow tested with a static pressure of 53 psi, and a flow of 1350 GPM at a residual pressure of 42 psi. Water supply shall be presumed available at the point of connection to existing. Hydraulic calculations shall be based upon the Hazen-Williams formula with a "C" value of 120 for steel piping, 140 for new cement-lined ductile-iron piping, 140 for existing underground piping, and 120 for nitrogen filled dry pipe.
4. Hydraulic Calculations
a. Hydraulic calculations, include a drawing showing hydraulic reference points and pipe segments and as outlined in NFPA 13, except that calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended specifically for fire protection system design using the design data shown on the drawings and within this specification. Software that uses k-factors for typical branch lines is not acceptable. Calculations shall be based on the water supply data shown on the drawings to substantiate that the design area used in the calculations is the most demanding hydraulically. Water supply curves and system requirements shall be plotted on semi-logarithmic graph paper so as to present a summary of the complete hydraulic calculation. Provide a summary sheet listing sprinkler in the design area and their respective hydraulic reference points, elevations, actual discharge pressures and actual flows. Elevations of hydraulic reference points (nodes) shall be indicated. Documentation shall identify each pipe individually and the nodes connected thereto. Indicate the diameter, length, flow, velocity, friction loss, number and type fittings, total friction loss in the pipe, equivalent pipe length and Hazen-Williams coefficient for each pipe. For gridded systems, calculations shall show peaking of demand area friction loss to verify that the hydraulically most demanding area is being used. Also for gridded systems, a flow diagram indicating the quantity and direction of flows shall be included. A drawing showing hydraulic reference points (nodes) and pipe designations used in the calculations shall be included and shall be independent of shop drawings.
5. Sprinkler Coverage
a. Sprinklers shall be uniformly spaced on branch lines. In buildings protected by automatic sprinklers, sprinklers shall provide coverage throughout 100 percent of the building. This includes, but is not limited to electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear rooms, transformer rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces. Coverage per sprinkler shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 but shall not exceed 130 square feet for ordinary hazard occupancies, and 225 square feet for light hazard occupancies. Exceptions are as follows:
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 2 1) Sprinklers may be omitted from small rooms which are exempted for specific occupancies in accordance with NFPA 101.
1.4 SYSTEM VOLUME LIMITITATIONS
A. Where the volume of any individual system piping volume exceeds 500 gallons, provide the dry pipe valve with a quick-opening device. The maximum system capacity controlled by one dry pipe valve shall not exceed 750 gallons. Indicate the calculated volume of each system on the Sprinkler System Shop Drawings.
1.5 Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE)
A. An individual who is a licensed professional engineer (P.E.) who has passed the fire protection engineering written examination administered by the National Council of Examiners for Engineering and Surveying (NCEES) and has relevant fire protection engineering experience. Services of the QFPE must include:
1. Reviewing SD-02, SD-03, and SD-05 submittal packages for completeness and compliance with the provisions of this specification. Working (shop) drawings and calculations must be prepared by, or prepared under the immediate supervision of, the QFPE. The QFPE must affix their professional engineering stamp with signature to the shop drawings, calculations, and material data sheets, indicating approval prior to submitting the shop drawings to the DFPE. 2. Provide a letter documenting that the SD-02, SD-03, and SD-05 submittal package has been reviewed and noting all outstanding comments. 3. Performing in-progress construction surveillance prior to installation of ceilings (rough-in inspection). 4. Witnessing pre-Government and final Government functional performance testing and performing a final installation review. 5. Signing applicable certificates under SD-07.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only.
When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Partial submittals and submittals not fully complying with NFPA 13, and this specification section must be returned disapproved without review. SD-02, SD-03 and SD-05 must be submitted simultaneously.
Shop drawings (SD-02), product data (SD-03) and calculations (SD-05) must be prepared by the designer and combined and submitted as one complete package. The QFPE must review the SD- 02/SD-03/SD-05 submittal package for completeness and compliance with the Contract provisions prior to submission to the Government. The QFPE must provide a Letter of Confirmation that they have reviewed the submittal package for compliance with the contract provisions. This letter must include their professional engineer stamp and signature. Partial submittals and submittals not reviewed by the QFPE must be returned disapproved without review.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 3 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
1. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
a. Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE); G b. Sprinkler System Designer; G c. Sprinkler System Installer; G d. Nitrogen Generation System Commissioning Technician; G
2. SD-02 Shop Drawings
a. Shop Drawings; G
3. SD-03 Product Data
a. Pipe; G b. Fittings; G c. Valves, including gate, check, butterfly, and globe; G d. Relief Valves; G e. Sprinklers; G f. Pipe Hangers and Supports; G g. Sprinkler Alarm Switch; G h. Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch; G i. Fire Department Connection; G j. Backflow Prevention Assembly; G k. Air Vent; G l. Hose Valve; G m. Seismic Bracing; G n. Nameplates; G o. Dry Valve; G p. Nitrogen Generator System; G q. Air Compressor; G r. Spare Sprinkler Head Box
4. SD-05 Design Data
a. Seismic Bracing; G b. Load calculations for sizing of seismic bracing c. Hydraulic Calculations; G[
5. SD-06 Test Reports
a. Test Procedures; G
6. SD-07 Certificates
a. Verification of Compliant Installation; G b. Request for Government Final Test; G
7. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
a. Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G b. Spare Parts Data; G 07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 4 8. SD-11 Closeout Submittals
a. As-built drawings
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Within 36 days of contract award but no less than 14 days prior to commencing work on site, the prime Contractor must submit the following for review and approval. SD-02, SD-03 and SD-05 submittals received prior to the review and approval of the qualifications will be returned Disapproved Without Review.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Shop Drawings shall conform to the requirements established for working plans as prescribed in NFPA 13. Three (3) copies of the shop drawings, no later than 28 days prior to the start of system installation. Drawings shall include plan and elevation views demonstrating that the equipment will fit the allotted spaces with clearance for installation and maintenance. Each set of drawings shall include the following:
a. Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings listed in sequence by drawing number. A legend identifying device symbols, nomenclature, and conventions used. b. Floor plans drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" which clearly show locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers, seismic separation assemblies, sway bracing, inspector's test connections, drains, and other applicable details necessary to clearly describe the proposed arrangement. Each type of fitting used and the locations of bushings, reducing couplings, and welded joints shall be indicated. c. Actual `center-to-center dimensions between sprinklers on branch lines and between branch lines; from end sprinklers to adjacent walls; from walls to branch lines; from sprinkler feed mains, cross-mains and branch lines to finished floor and roof or ceiling. A detail must show the dimension from the sprinkler and sprinkler deflector to the ceiling in finished areas. d. Longitudinal or transverse building sections showing typical branch line and cross- main pipe routing as well as elevation of each typical sprinkler above finished floor and elevation of "cloud" or false ceilings in relation to the building ceilings. e. Plan and elevation views which establish that the equipment will fit the allotted spaces with clearance for installation and maintenance. f. Riser layout drawings drawn to a scale of not less than 1/2-inch equals 1-foot to show details of each system component, clearances between each other and from other equipment and construction in the room. g. Details of each type of riser assembly; pipe hanger; sway bracing for earthquake protection, and restraint of underground water main at point-of-entry into the building, and electrical devices and interconnecting wiring. Submit load calculations for sizing of sway bracing, for systems that are required to be protected against damage from earthquakes. h. Details of each type of pipe hanger, seismic bracing/restraint and related components. i. The calculated volume of each system.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 5 C. Product Data
1. Three (3) copies of annotated catalog data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item. Catalog cuts must also indicate the NRTL listing. The data must be highlighted to show model, size, options, and other pertinent information, that are intended for consideration. Data must be adequate to demonstrate compliance with all contract requirements. Product data for all equipment must be combined into a single submittal.
D. Hydraulic Calculations
1. Calculations must be as outlined in NFPA 13 except that calculations must be performed by computer using software intended specifically for fire protection system design using the design data shown on the drawings.
E. Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions
1. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA as supplemented and modified by this specification section. Provide six manuals and one pdf version on electronic media. The manuals must include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine maintenance, troubleshooting guide, and recommended service organization (including address and telephone number) for each item of equipment. 2. Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. The data must include a complete list of parts and supplies, and a list of parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of service. Include a list of special tools and test equipment required for maintenance and testing of the products supplied.
F. Qualifications
1. Sprinkler System Designer
a. The sprinkler system designer must be certified as a Level III or IV Technician by National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in the Water-Based Systems Layout subfield of Fire Protection Engineering Technology in accordance with NICET 1014-7.
2. Sprinkler System Installer
a. The sprinkler system installer must be regularly engaged in the installation of the type and complexity of system specified in the contract documents, and must have served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.
3. Nitrogen Generation System Commissioning Technician
a. Commissioning technician of nitrogen generation system(s) must have one of the following qualifications. Qualifications must be provided prior to preliminary inspection and tests. 1) Commissioning of nitrogen generation system must be carried out by technician employed by and certified by the nitrogen generation system manufacturer.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 6 2) In lieu of manufacturer's commissioning technician, the fire sprinkler contractor must provide proof their commissioning technician has manufacturer's certified training for the equipment being installed and proof of at least five previous installations of manufacturer's equipment where the contractor's commissioning technician has successfully conducted commissioning under the direct supervision of the manufacturer's commissioning representative. Contractor must provide proof the five supervised commissioning occurred AFTER contractor's commissioning agent has obtained the certified training. Commissioning carried out prior to factory training, or without supervision of manufacturer's technician or commissioning of other manufacturer's equipment does not qualify as applicable experience. Conduct preliminary inspections and testing does not qualify as applicable experience.
4. Regulatory Requirements
a. Equipment and material must be listed or approved. Listed or approved, as used in this Section, means listed, labeled or approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. The omission of these terms under the description of an item or equipment described must not be construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approvals by testing laboratories must be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard. The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature or documentation are mandatory requirements
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes shall either be capped or plugged until installed.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare sprinklers and wrench(es) must be provided as spare parts in accordance with NFPA 13.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
A. Provide materials, equipment, and devices listed for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 13 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer, where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for a classification of material. Material and equipment must be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 2 years prior to bid.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Major components of equipment must have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract number provided on a new name plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment. Nameplates must be etched metal or plastic, permanently attached by screws to control units, panels or adjacent walls.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 7 2.3 IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING
A. Pipe and fitting markings must include name or identifying symbol of manufacturer and nominal size. Pipe must be marked with ASTM designation. Valves and equipment markings must have name or identifying symbol of manufacturer, specific model number, nominal size, name of device, arrow indicating direction of flow, and position of installation (horizontal or vertical), except if valve can be installed in either position. Markings must be included on the body casting or on an etched or stamped metal nameplate permanently on the valve or cover plate.
2.4 PRESSURE RATINGS
A. Valves, fittings, couplings, alarm switches, and similar devices must be rated for the maximum working pressures that can be experienced in the system, but in no case less than 175 psi.
2.5 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
A. Aboveground piping shall be steel.
B. Steel Piping Components
1. Steel Pipe
a. Except as modified herein, steel pipe must be black as permitted by NFPA 13 and conform to the applicable provisions of ASTM A53/A53M, ASTM A135/A135M or ASTM A153/A153M. Utilize black steel pipe with furnace butt-welds ASTM A53/A53M Type F Electric-resistance-welded steel pipe is not permitted. b. Steel pipe must be minimum Schedule 40 for sizes 2 inches and less; and minimum Schedule 10 for sizes larger than 2 inches. Steel piping with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 must not be threaded. Grooved pipe must be roll-grooved.
2. Fittings
a. Fittings must be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type. Threaded fittings must be cast-iron conforming to ASME B16.4, malleable-iron conforming to ASME B16.3 or ductile-iron conforming to ASTM A536. Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings, fittings that use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe, steel press fittings and field welded fittings are not permitted. Fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets must be supplied by the same manufacturer. Threaded fittings must use Teflon tape or manufacturer's approved joint compound. Reducing couplings are not permitted except as allowed by NFPA 13. Saddle tees using rubber gaskets are not permitted.
3. Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings
a. Joints and fittings must be designed for not less than 175 psi service and the product of the same manufacturer. Field welded fittings must not be used. Fitting and coupling housing must be malleable-iron conforming to ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510; ductile-iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings are permitted in pipe sizes 2 inches and larger. Gasket must be the flush type that fills the entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and bolts must be heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A183 and must be cadmium-plated or zinc-electroplated.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 8 4. Flanges
a. Flanges shall conform to NFPA 13 and ASME B16.1. Gaskets shall be non-asbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch thick, and full face or self-centering flat ring type.
5. Bolts, Nut, and Washers
a. Bolts shall be conform to ASTM A449, Type 1 and shall extend no less than three full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required torque. Nuts shall be hexagon type conforming to ASME B18.2.2. Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F436. Flat circular washers shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts.
C. Flexible Sprinkler Hose
1. The use of flexible hose is permitted only with AHJ approval. Flexible sprinkler hose must comply with UL 2443 and FM 1637.
D. Pipe Hangers and Supports
1. Provide galvanized pipe hangers, supports and seismic bracing and supports in accordance with NFPA 13. Design and install seismic protection in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 section titled "Protection of Piping Against Damage Where Subject to Earthquakes for Seismic Design Category “D”
E. Valves
Provide valves of types approved for fire service. Valves must open by counterclockwise rotation.
1. Control Valve and Gate Valve
a. Manually operated sprinkler control valve and gate valve shall be outside stem and yoke (OS&Y) type or indicating butterfly type with integral tamper switch and shall be listed.
2. Check Valve
a. Check valve 2 inches and larger shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or FM APP GUIDE. Check valves 4 inches and larger shall be of the swing type with cast iron body and flanged inspection plate, shall have a clear waterway and shall meet the requirements of MSS SP-71, for Type 3 or 4. Inspection plate must be provided on valves larger than 6 inches.
3. Hose Valve
a. Valve shall comply with UL 668 and shall have a minimum rating of 300 psi. Valve shall be non-rising stem, all bronze, 90 degree angle type, with 2-1/2 inch American National Standard Fire Hose Screw Thread (NH) male outlet in accordance with NFPA 1963. Hose valves shall be equipped with lugged cap with drip drain, cap gasket and chain. Valve finish shall be polished brass.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 9 2.6 RISER CHECK VALVES
1. Provide riser check valve, pressure gauges and main drain.
2.7 DRY PIPE VALVE ASSEMBLY
A. The dry pipe valve shall be a latching differential type listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE and shall be complete with trim piping, valves, fittings, pressure gauges, priming water fill cup, velocity drip check, drip cup, and other ancillary components as required for proper operation. Assembly must be complete with the valve manufacturer's standard. The assembly shall include a quick-opening device by the same manufacturer as the dry pipe valve for systems over 500 gallons in capacity.
2.8 SUPERVISORY AIR SYSTEM
A. Provide an air supply system in accordance with NFPA 13. The connection pipe from the air compressor shall not be less than 1/2 inch in diameter and shall enter the system above the priming water level of the dry pipe valve. Install a check valve in the system supply air piping from the compressor. A shutoff valve of the renewable disc type shall be installed upstream of this check valve. The nitrogen supply system must be sized to pressurize the sprinkler system to 40 psi within 20 minutes.
B. Nitrogen Generator System
1. The nitrogen generation system (NGS) must be installed with a compressor sized appropriately for the application and capable of achieving system pressure within 30 minutes in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. 2. The nitrogen generation system must be designed to achieve a nitrogen concentration of 98% or greater and maintain that concentration within the fire sprinkler system continuously. The output nitrogen quality must be confirmed by using a gas stream analyzer. Nitrogen generation system requires a dedicated, hardwired 120V AC power supply.
C. Design of Nitrogen Generation System
1. Design the system so all equipment is installed within the confines of the riser room with the exception of a connection for a manual or automatic gas analyzer. Provide a system that is capable of delivering a minimum of 98 percent nitrogen composition throughout all of the system piping within 14 days from the commencement of the inerting process. Provide membrane type nitrogen generators that provide "instant on-instant off" nitrogen gas production without the need for nitrogen storage tanks. The complete nitrogen generator system must be self-contained and skid mounted with "drop-in" operability with a simple one step direct connection of the nitrogen gas supply line to each zone/riser. Provide an automatic "fill and purge" breathing process. This must be done while the sprinkler system is fully functional and must not alter the design performance of the sprinkler system. A process that involves continuous venting of the piping network is not permitted. Air maintenance devices used in conjunction with the nitrogen generation system must be listed for use on sprinkler systems. At the riser and at the end of each zone, provide a connection for a manual gas analyzer.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 10 2. Nitrogen Air Compressor
a. Air compressors to be used in conjunction with the nitrogen generator must be capable of the following: 1) Capable of producing a continuous stream of compressed air at 100+ psig. 2) Capable of automatic cut in and cut out. 3) Equipped with an on-board after-cooler. 4) Equipped with an on-board automatic water blow down system. 5) Equipped with vibration dampening system. 6) Equipped with an air storage tank to provide continuous delivery of compressed air to the nitrogen generator. 7) Rated for continuous duty service. 8) Compressors less than 3.0 hp must be an oil-less design. 9) Oil-less compressors must be such that the manufacturer has designed the oil- less compressor to provide 5000 hours of continuous duty service before requiring a gasket and seal rebuild.
3. Nitrogen Venting Device
a. The functional component of the nitrogen venting device for use in the "fill and purge" breathing process must: 1) Be NRTL listed for use on sprinkler systems. 2) Not require plumbing to drain. 3) Close automatically at the completion of the nitrogen inerting process without manual intervention. 4) Be installed on each zone in the riser room.
4. Supervision of Nitrogen Generator
a. Nitrogen generator must be able to provide the following monitoring options: 1) Power supply "on" for nitrogen generators. 2) Power supply "on" for compressor. 3) Amp draw for compressor. 4) Line pressure (psig). 5) Nitrogen purity at discharge (sample port for use with manual gas analyzer).
5. Nitrogen Pressure Maintenance Device 6. Device must be a pressure regulator that automatically reduces supply air pressure to the minimum pressure required to be maintained in the piping system. The device must have a cast bronze body and valve housing complete with diaphragm assembly, spring, filter, ball check to prevent backflow, 1/16-inch restriction to prevent rapid pressurization of the system, and adjustment screw. The device must be capable of reducing maximum inlet pressure of 100 psi to a fixed outlet pressure adjustable to 10 psi.
2.9 WATERFLOW ALARM
A. Electrically operated, exterior-mounted, waterflow alarm bell shall be provided and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. Waterflow alarm bell shall be rated 24 VDC and shall be connected to the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) in accordance with Section 28 31 64 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 11 2.10 ALARM INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES
A. Sprinkler Alarm Switch
1. Vane type flow switch(es). Connection of switch must be by the fire alarm installer. [Vane type alarm actuating devices must have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and must instantly recycle.
B. Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch
1. Switch shall be suitable for mounting to the type of control valve to be supervised open. The switch shall be tamper resistant and contain one set of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to transfer signal closure of the valve of more than two rotations of the valve stem.
C. High/Low-Nitrogen Pressure Supervisory Switch
1. Each automatic water control valve must be provided with a nitrogen pressure switch connected to the control unit. The pressure switch must supervise the nitrogen pressure in the system and must be set to activate at 10 psi above the automatic water control valve trip point pressure (low) and 10 psi above normal nitrogen pressure (high). The switch must have an adjustable range between 5 and 80 psi. The switch must have screw terminal connection and must be capable of being wired for normally open or normally closed circuit.
D. BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY
E. Double-check valve assembly backflow preventer complying with ASSE 1015 and AWWA M14. Each check valve must have a drain. Backflow prevention assemblies must have current "Certificate of Approval from the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research, FCCCHR List" and be listed for fire protection use. Listing of the specific make, model, design, and size in the FCCCHR List is acceptable as the required documentation.
F. Backflow Preventer Test Connection
1. Test connection must consist of a series of listed hose valves with 2 1/2-inch National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain.
2.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Fire department connection must be projecting type with cast-brass body, matching wall escutcheon lettered "Auto Spkr" with a polished-brass finish. The connection must have individual self-closing clappers, caps with drip drains and chains. The connection shall have two inlets with individual self-closing clappers, caps with drip drains and chains. Female inlets shall have 2-1/2 inch diameter American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Threads (NH) per NFPA 1963. Comply with UL 405.
2.12 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers must comply with UL 199 and NFPA 13. Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be used. Sprinklers shall be used in accordance with their listed coverage limitations. Temperature classification shall be as indicated. Sprinklers in high heat areas including attic spaces or in close proximity to unit heaters shall have temperature classification in accordance with NFPA 13. Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used. 07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 12 B. Pendent Sprinkler
1. Pendent sprinkler shall be flat concealed or recessed quick-response type with nominal k- factor of 5.6 for light hazard areas and 8.0 for ordinary hazard areas. Pendent sprinklers shall have a white polyester finish. Assembly must include an integral white escutcheon.
C. Upright Sprinkler
1. Upright sprinkler shall be brass quick-response type and shall have a nominal K-factor of 5.6 for light hazard areas and 8.0 for ordinary hazard areas.
D. Sidewall Sprinkler
1. Sidewall sprinkler shall be the quick-response recessed type. Sidewall sprinkler must have a nominal K-factor of 8.0. Sidewall sprinkler shall have a brass or white polyester finish.
E. Dry Sprinkler Assembly
1. Dry sprinkler assembly shall be of the flat plate concealed or recessed pendent type. Assembly shall include an integral escutcheon. Maximum length shall not exceed maximum indicated in UL Fire Prot Dir. Sprinklers shall have a white enamel finish.
2.13 ACCESSORIES
A. Sprinkler Cabinet
1. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall be packed in a suitable metal or plastic cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating of the sprinklers installed as required by NFPA 13. At least one wrench of each type required shall be provided.
B. Pendent Sprinkler Escutcheon
1. Escutcheon shall be one-piece metallic type with a depth of less than 3/4 inch and suitable for installation on pendent sprinklers. The escutcheon shall have a factory finish that matches the pendent sprinkler heads.
C. Pipe Escutcheon
1. Provide split hinge metal plates for piping entering walls, floors, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide polished stainless steel plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.
D. Sprinkler Guard
1. Guard shall be a steel wire cage designed to encase the sprinkler and protect it from mechanical damage. Guards must be provided on sprinklers located within 7 feet of the floor.
E. Relief Valve
1. Relief valves must be listed and installed at there riser in accordance with NFPA 13.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 13 F. Air Vent
1. Air vents must be of the automatic type and piped to drain to the building exterior.
G. Identification Sign
1. Valve identification sign must be minimum 6 inches wide by 2 inches high with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gage steel or 0.024-inch aluminum with red letters on a white background or white letters on red background. Wording of sign must include, but not be limited to "main drain", "auxiliary drain", "inspector's test", "alarm test", "alarm line", and similar wording as required to identify operational components. Where there is more than one sprinkler system, signage must include specific details as to the respective system.
2.14 SYSTEM WALL MAP
A. Install a map for all the fire suppression systems in the fire equipment room. Map to include all general system information, control valve locations and instructions and locations of all system drain locations. Minimum size to be 11 inches by 17 inches and minimum scale of floor plan to be 1/8 inch to 1 foot.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Before commencing work, examine all adjoining work on which the contractor's work that is dependent for perfect workmanship according to the intent of this specification section, and report to the Contracting Officer's Representative a condition that prevents performance of first class work. No "waiver of responsibility" for incomplete, inadequate or defective adjoining work will be considered unless notice has been filed before submittal of a proposal.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The installation must be in accordance with the applicable provisions of NFPA 13, NFPA 24 and publications referenced therein. Locate sprinklers in a consistent pattern with ceiling grid, lights, and air supply diffusers. Install sprinkler system over and under ducts, piping and platforms when such equipment can negatively affect or disrupt the sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage.
1. Piping offsets, fittings, and other accessories required must be furnished to provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other construction. 2. Wherever the contractor's work interconnects with work of other trades the Contractor must coordinate with other Contractors to insure all Contractors have the information necessary so that they may properly install all necessary connections and equipment. Identify all work items needing access (dampers and similar equipment) that are concealed above hung ceilings by permanent color coded pins/tabs in the ceiling directly below the item. 3. Provide required supports and hangers for piping, conduit, and equipment so that loading will not exceed allowable loadings of structure. Submittal of a bid must be a deemed representation that the contractor submitting such bid has ascertained allowable loadings and has included in his estimates the costs associated in furnishing required supports.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 14 B. Waste Removal
1. At the conclusion of each day's work, clean up and stockpile on site all waste, debris, and trash which may have accumulated during the day as a result of work by the contractor and of his presence on the job. Sidewalks and streets adjoining the property must be kept broom clean and free of waste, debris, trash and obstructions caused by work of the contractor, which will affect the condition and safety of streets, walks, utilities, and property.
3.2 ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
The methods of fabrication and installation of the aboveground piping must fully comply with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13 and this specification section.
A. Protection of Piping Against Earthquake Damage
1. Seismically protect the system piping against damage from earthquakes. This requirement is not subject to determination under NFPA 13. Install the seismic protection of the system piping in accordance with UFC 3-310-04, NFPA 13 and Annex A. Include the required features identified therein that are applicable to the specific piping system.
B. Piping in Exposed Areas
1. Install exposed piping without diminishing exit access widths, corridors or equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain piping, shall be installed to provide maximum headroom.
C. Piping in Finished Areas
1. In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed where possible.
D. Pendent Sprinklers
1. Drop nipples to pendent sprinklers shall consist of minimum 1 inch pipe with a reducing coupling into which the sprinkler shall be threaded. 2. Hangers shall be provided on arm-overs to drop nipples supplying pendent sprinklers when the arm-over exceeds 24 inches for steel pipe. 3. Where sprinklers are installed below suspended or dropped ceilings, drop nipples shall be cut such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are of a uniform depth throughout the finished space. The outlet of the reducing coupling must not extend below the underside of the ceiling. 4. On pendent sprinklers installed below suspended or dropped ceilings, the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the underside of the ceiling shall not exceed 4 inches. 5. Recessed pendent sprinklers shall be installed such that the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the underside of the ceiling shall not exceed the manufacturer's listed range and shall be of uniform depth throughout the finished area. 6. Pendent sprinklers in suspended ceilings must be located in the center of the tile (+/- 2 inches). 7. Dry pendent sprinkler assemblies must be such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are of the uniform depth throughout the finished space.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 15 8. Dry pendent sprinklers must be of the required length to permit the sprinkler to be threaded directly into a branch line tee. 9. Where the maximum static or flowing pressure, whichever is greater at the sprinkler, applied other than through the fire department connection, exceeds 100 psi and a branch line above the ceiling supplies sprinklers in a pendent position below the ceiling, the cumulative horizontal length of an unsupported armover to a sprinkler or sprinkler drop must not exceed 12 inches for steel pipe.
E. Upright Sprinklers
1. Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings between the branch line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler.
F. Pipe Joints
1. Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Not more than four threads shall show after joint is made up. Welded joints will be permitted, only if welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13 at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project construction site. Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe material, wall thickness and size. Grooved couplings, fittings and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no- go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances.
G. Reducers
1. Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing fittings. The use of grooved-end or rubber-gasketed reducing couplings will not be permitted. When standard fittings of the required size are not manufactured, single bushings of the face type will be permitted. Where used, face bushings shall be installed with the outer face flush with the face of the fitting opening being reduced. Bushings shall not be used in elbow fittings, in more than one outlet of a tee, in more than two outlets of a cross, or where the reduction in size is less than 1/2 inch.
H. Pipe Penetrations
1. Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger fastenings will not be permitted. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors shall be core-drilled and provided with pipe sleeves. Each sleeve must be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile-iron or cast-iron pipe and extend through its respective wall or floor and be cut flush with each wall surface. Sleeves must provide required clearance between the pipe and the sleeve per NFPA 13. The space between the sleeve and the pipe must be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation. 2. Where pipes penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors, pipes shall be fire stopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. 3. In penetrations that are not fire-rated or not a floor penetration, the space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at both ends with plastic waterproof cement that will dry to a firm but pliable mass or with a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomer seal.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 16 4. Thrust rod all pipe penetrations through the grade floor slab, unless flanged or welded joints are used throughout the below slab piping. All pipe penetrations through grade floor slab must be sleeved and sealed. Sleeves must have a 2-inch separation from fire sprinkler piping on all sides. Provide a minimum clearance of 3 feet access to and in front of all equipment and 6-inches behind equipment (e.g., control valves, backflow preventer, check valves, waterflow switches, etc.)
I. Escutcheons
1. Escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls. Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through which piping passes.
J. Inspector's Test Connection
1. Unless otherwise indicated, the test connection must consist of 1-inch pipe connected at the riser as a combination test and drain valve; a test valve located approximately 7 feet above the floor; a smooth bore brass outlet equivalent to the smallest orifice sprinkler used in the system; and a painted metal identification sign affixed to the valve with the words "Inspector's Test". All test connection piping must be inside of the building and penetrate the exterior wall at the location of the discharge orifice only. The discharge orifice must be located outside the building wall no more than 2 feet above finished grade, directed so as not to cause damage to adjacent construction or landscaping during full flow discharge, or to the sanitary sewer. Discharge to the exterior must not interfere with exiting from the facility. Water discharge or runoff must not cross the path of egress from the building. Do not discharge to the roof. Discharge to floor drains, janitor sinks or similar fixtures is not permitted. 2. Provide concrete splash blocks at all drain and inspector's test connection discharge locations if not discharging to a concrete surface. Splash blocks must be large enough to mitigate erosion and not become dislodged during a full flow of the drain. Ensure all discharged water drains away from the facility and does not cause property damage.
K. Backflow Preventer
1. Locate within the building or in a heated enclosure in locations subject to freezing. For heated enclosures, provide a low temperature supervisory alarm connected to the facility fire alarm system. Heat trace is not permitted to be used. 2. Install backflow preventers so that the bottom of the assembly is a minimum of 6 inches above the finished floor/grade. Install horizontal backflow preventers so that the bottom of the assembly is no greater than 24 inches above the finished floor/grade. Install vertical backflow preventers so that the upper operating handwheel is no more than 6 feet above the finished floor/grade. Clearance around control valve handles must be minimum 6inches above grade/finished floor and away from walls.
L. Test Connection
1. Provide downstream of the backflow prevention assembly UL 668 hose valves with 2.5- inch National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain. Provide one valve for each 250 gpm of system demand or fraction thereof. Provide a permanent sign in accordance with paragraph entitled "Identification Signs" which reads, "Test Valve". Indicate location of test header. If an exterior connection, provide a control valve inside a heated mechanical room to prevent freezing.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 17 M. Drains
1. Main drain piping must be provided to discharge at a safe point outside the building, no more than 2 feet above finished grade. Provide a concrete splash block at drain outlet. Discharge to the exterior must not interfere with exiting from the facility. Water discharge or runoff must not cross the path of egress from the building. 2. Auxiliary drains must be provided as required by NFPA 13. Auxiliary drains are permitted to discharge to a floor drain if the drain is sized to accommodate full flow (min 40 gpm). Discharge to service sinks or similar plumbing fixtures is not permitted.
N. Installation of Fire Department Connection
1. Connection shall be mounted on the exterior wall approximately 3 feet above finished grade. The piping between the connection and the check valve shall be provided with an automatic drip in accordance with NFPA 13 and arranged to drain to the outside.
O. Identification Signs
1. Signs must be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as required by NFPA 13. Main drain test results must be etched into main drain identification sign. Hydraulic design data must be etched into the nameplates and permanently affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13. Provide labeling on the surfaces of all feed and cross mains to show the pipe function (e.g., "Sprinkler System", "Fire Department Connection", "Standpipe") and normal valve position (e.g. "Normally Open", "Normally Closed"). For pipe sizes 4-inch and larger provide white painted stenciled letters and arrows, a minimum of 2 inches in height and visible from at least two sides when viewed from the floor. For pipe sizes less than 4-inch, provide white painted stenciled letters and arrows, a minimum of 0.75-inch in height and visible from the floor.
3.3 ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Except as modified herein, electric equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Alarm signal wiring connected to the building fire alarm control system must be by the fire alarm installer.
3.4 PAINTING
A. Color code mark piping as required by UFC 3-600-01.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Procedures
1. Submit detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by the NICET Level III or IV Fire Sprinkler Technician, and the representative of the installing company,14 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures must list all components of the installed system. Test procedures must include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms must be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data; similar to the forms in NFPA 13.) The test procedures and accompanying test data forms must be used for the pre-Government testing and the Government final testing.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 18 2. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.
B. Pre-Government Testing
1. Verification of Compliant Installation
a. Conduct inspections and tests to ensure that equipment is functioning properly. Tests must meet the requirements of paragraph entitled "Minimum System Tests" and "System Acceptance" as noted in NFPA 13. The Contractor and QFPE must be in attendance at the pre-Government testing to make necessary adjustments. After inspection and testing is complete, provide a signed Verification of Compliant Installation letter by the QFPE that the installation is complete, compliant with the specification and fully operable. The letter must include the names and titles of the witnesses to the pre-Government tests. Provide all completion documentation as required by NFPA 13 and the test reports noted below. 1) NFPA 13 Aboveground Material and Test Certificate
2. Request for Government Final Test
a. When the verification of compliant installation has been completed, submit a formal request for Government final test to the Designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE) or Contracting Officers Designated Representative Government final testing will not be scheduled until the DFPE has received copies of the request for Government final testing and Verification of Compliant Installation letter with all required reports. Government final testing will not be performed until after the connections to the building fire alarm system have been completed and tested to confirm communications are fully functional. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the requested test date.
C. Correction of Deficiencies
a. If equipment was found to be defective or non-compliant with contract requirements, perform corrective actions and repeat the tests. Tests must be conducted and repeated if necessary until the system has been demonstrated to comply with all contract requirements.
D. Government Final Tests
1. The tests must be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the DFPE. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. The following must be provided at the job site for Government Final Testing:
a. The manufacturer's technical representative. b. The contractor's Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE). c. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed.
2. Government Final Tests will be witnessed by the Designated Fire Protection Engineer, Contracting Officer, Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE)]. At this time, all required tests noted in the paragraph "Minimum System Tests" must be repeated at their discretion.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 19 3.6 MINIMUM SYSTEM TESTS
A. The system, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground piping and system components, must be tested to ensure that equipment and components function as intended. The underground and aboveground interior piping systems and attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure must be tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24.
B. Underground Piping
1. Flushing
a. Underground piping must be flushed at a minimum of 10 fps in accordance with NFPA 24.
2. Hydrostatic Test
a. New underground piping must be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 24.
C. Aboveground Piping
1. Hydrostatic Test
a. Aboveground piping must be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 13. There must be no drop in gauge pressure or visible leakage when the system is subjected to the hydrostatic test. The test pressure must be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the system or portion being tested.
2. Air Pressure Test
a. As specified in NFPA 13, an air pressure leakage test at 50 psi must be conducted for 24 hours. There must be no drop in gauge pressure in excess of 1.5 psi for the 24 hours. This air pressure test is in addition to the required hydrostatic test.
3. Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test
a. Each backflow prevention assembly must be tested at system flow demand, including all applicable hose streams, as specified in NFPA 13. The Contractor must provide all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete forward flow test, including 2.5-inch diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles or flow diffusers, calibrated pressure gauges, and pitot tube gauge. The Contractor must provide all necessary supports to safely secure hoses and nozzles during the test. At the system demand flow, the pressure readings and pressure drop (friction loss) across the assembly must be recorded. A metal placard must be provided on the backflow prevention assembly that lists the pressure readings both upstream and downstream of the assembly, total pressure drop, and the system test flow rate determined during the preliminary testing. The pressure drop must be compared to the manufacturer's data and the readings observed during the final inspections and tests.
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 20 D. Main Drain Flow Test
1. Following flushing of the underground piping, a main drain test must be made to verify the adequacy of the water supply. Static and residual pressures must be recorded on the certificate specified in paragraph SUBMITTALS.
E. Supervisory Nitrogen System Test
1. System supervisory nitrogen pressure must be reduced from the normal system pressure to the point at which a low-pressure alarm is sounded. Nitrogen pressure must be restored to verify trouble signal restoration. Automatic start/stop features of nitrogen generator must be tested.
3.7 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M manuals must be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance. Submit six sets of detailed as-built drawings. The drawings must show the system as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings must be submitted within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system. At least one set of as-built (marked-up) drawings must be provided at the time of, or prior to the final acceptance test.
1. Provide one set of full size paper as-built drawings and schematics. The drawings must be prepared electronically and sized no less than the contract drawings. 2. Furnish one set of CDs or DVDs containing software back-up and CAD based drawings in latest version of AutoCAD, DXF and portable document formats of as-built drawings and schematics. 3. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of devices and equipment 4. Provide operating and maintenance (O&M) instructions.
3.8 ONSITE TRAINING
A. Conduct a training course for the responding fire department and operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting Officer. Training must be performed on two separate days (to accommodate different shifts of Fire Department personnel) for a period of 4 hours of normal working time and must start after the system is functionally complete and after the final acceptance test. The on-site training must cover all of the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
3.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Repair Service/Replacement Parts
1. Repair services and replacement parts for the system must be available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting Officer. During the warranty period, the service technician must be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs must be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site. 2. During the warranty period, the installing fire alarm contractor is responsible for conducting all required testing and maintenance in accordance with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 72 and the system manufacturers. Installing fire alarm contractor is NOT responsible for damage resulting from abuse, misuse, or neglect of equipment by the end user. 07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 21 B. Spare Parts
1. Spare parts furnished must be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed systems. Spare parts must be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts must be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the final acceptance testing and must be accompanied by an inventory list.
C. Document Storage Cabinet
1. Upon completion of the project, but prior to project close-out, place in the document storage cabinet copies of the following record documentation:
a. As-built shop drawings b. Product data sheets c. Design calculations d. Site-specific software data package e. All documentation required by SD-06
END OF SECTION 211313
07/15/21 Fire Sprinkler System Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 211313 - 22 SECTION 283100 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 01 of these specifications, which govern work under DIVISION 28. Refer to other sections of these specifications for additional related requirements.
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS AND GUIDES (Edition currently adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction)
1. American Disabilities Act (ADA) 2. FM Global (FM) 3. Fort Irwin Design Guideline Manual 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 5. Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 7. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) 8. UFC 3-600-01 – 2020 Change 5 9. UFC 4-010-01 – 2018 Change 2 10. UFC 4-021-01 – 2018 Change 2 11. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This section is a Division 28 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section and is part of each Division 28 section making reference to fire alarm systems.
B. In addition, refer to the following sections for related work and coordination:
1. Section 283900 COMBINATION MASS NOTIFICATION/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 2. Section 211313 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1.4 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. This work includes designing and providing a new, complete, addressable fire alarm system as described herein and on the contract drawings. Include system wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, initiating devices, notification appliances, supervising station fire alarm transmitters, and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operational system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. Provide system complete and ready for operation. 2. Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing in strict accordance with NFPA 72, except as modified herein. The system layout on the drawings show the intent of coverage and suggested locations. Final quantity, system layout, and coordination are the responsibility of the Contractor.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 1 3. The fire alarm system must be independent of the building security, building management, and energy/utility monitoring systems other than for control functions.
B. Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE)
1. Services of the QFPE must include:
a. Reviewing SD-02, SD-03, and SD-05 submittal packages for completeness and compliance with the provisions of this specification. Construction (shop) drawings and calculations must be prepared by, or prepared under the immediate supervision of, the QFPE. The QFPE must affix their professional engineering stamp with signature to the shop drawings, calculations, and material data sheets, indicating approval prior to submitting the shop drawings to the DFPE. b. Providing a letter documenting that the SD-02, SD-03, and SD-05 submittal package has been reviewed and noting any outstanding comments. c. Performing in-progress construction surveillance prior to installation of ceilings (rough-in inspection). d. Witnessing pre-Government and final Government functional performance testing and performing a final installation review. e. Signing applicable certificates under SD-07.
C. DEFINITIONS
Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment, devices, and functions must be defined as follows: 1. Interface Device - An addressable device that interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog/addressable system. 2. Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACU) - A master control unit having the features of a fire alarm control unit (FACU). 3. Remote Fire Alarm Control Unit - A control unit, physically remote from the fire alarm control unit, that receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices; may supply power to detection devices and interface devices; may provide transfer of power to the notification appliances; may provide transfer of condition to relays or devices connected to the control unit; and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm and mass notification control unit. 4. Terminal Cabinet - A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door where terminal strips are securely mounted inside the cabinet. 5. Control Module and Relay Module - Terms utilized to describe emergency control function interface devices as defined by NFPA 72. 6. Designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE) - The DoD fire protection engineer that oversees that Area of Responsibility for that project. This is sometimes referred to as the "cognizant" fire protection engineer. Interpret reference to "authority having jurisdiction" and/or AHJ in referenced standards to mean the Designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE). The DFPE may be responsible for review of the contractor submittals having a "G" designation, and for witnessing final inspection and testing. 7. Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE) - A QFPE is an individual who is a licensed professional engineer (P.E.), who has passed the fire protection engineering written examination administered by the National Council of Examiners for Engineering and Surveying (NCEES) and has relevant fire protection engineering experience.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 2 1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING.
B. Shop drawings (SD-02), product data (SD-03) and calculations (SD-05) must be prepared by the fire alarm designer and combined and submitted as one complete package. The QFPE must review the SD-02/SD-03/SD-05 submittal package for completeness and compliance with the Contract provisions prior to submission to the Government. The QFPE must provide a Letter of Confirmation that they have reviewed the submittal package for compliance with the contract provisions. This letter must include their registered professional engineer stamp and signature. Partial submittals and submittals not reviewed by the QFPE will be returned by the Government disapproved without review.
C. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
1. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
a. Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE); G b. Fire alarm system designer; G c. Supervisor; G d. Technician; G e. Installer; G f. Test Technician; G g. Fire Alarm System Site-Specific Software Acknowledgement; G
2. SD-02 Shop Drawings
a. Nameplates; G b. Instructions; G c. Wiring Diagrams; G d. System Layout; G e. Notification Appliances; G f. Initiating devices; G g. Battery Power; G h. Voltage Drop Calculations; G
3. SD-03 Product Data
a. Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACU); G b. Manual Stations; G c. Smoke Detectors; G d. Addressable Interface Devices; G e. Notification Appliances; G f. Batteries; G g. Battery Chargers; G h. Surge Protective Devices; G i. Alarm Wiring; G j. [ Back Boxes and Conduit; G
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 3 k. [ Ceiling Bridges for Ceiling-Mounted Appliances; G l. Terminal Cabinets; G m. Automatic Fire Alarm Transmitters (including housing); G n. Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels; G o. Environmental Enclosures or Guards; G p. Document Storage Cabinet; G
4. SD-06 Test Reports
a. Test Procedures; G
5. SD-07 Certificates
a. Verification of Compliant Installation; G b. Request for Government Final Test; G
6. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
a. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G b. Instruction of Government Employees; G
7. SD-11 Closeout Submittals
a. As-Built Drawings b. Spare Parts
1.6 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Fire alarm system components requiring power, except for the FACU(s) power supply, must operate on 24 volts DC unless noted otherwise in this section.
B. The interior fire alarm system must be a complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm system conforming to NFPA 72, and UL 864. Systems meeting UL 2017 only are not acceptable. The system must be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of an alarm initiating device. The system must remain in the alarm mode until the initiating device is reset and the control unit is reset and restored to normal.
C. Alarm Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances (Visual, Audible)
1. Connect alarm initiating devices to initiating device circuits (IDC) Class "B", or to signaling line circuits (SLC) Class "B" and installed in accordance with NFPA 72. 2. Connect notification appliances to notification appliance circuits (NAC) Class "B".
D. Functions and Operating Features
1. The system must provide the following functions and operating features:
a. Power, annunciation, supervision, and control for the system. Addressable systems must be microcomputer (microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified. b. Visual alarm notification appliances must be synchronized as required by NFPA 72. c. Electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control unit.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 4 d. An audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition, or ground fault (or short circuit for Class "X"). The trouble signal must also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory control unit modules. After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal must again sound until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke detector in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke must not initiate a trouble condition. e. A trouble signal silence feature that must silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. f. Program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACU to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, fire reporting system features. Operation of this programmed action must indicate on the FACU display as a supervisory or trouble condition. g. Alarm functions must override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions must override trouble functions. h. The system must be capable of being programmed from the control unit keyboard. Programmed information must be stored in non-volatile memory. i. The system must be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring non- addressable alarm and supervisory devices. j. There must be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable devices that may be in alarm simultaneously. k. An alarm signal must automatically initiate the following functions: 1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FACU. 2) Transmission of an alarm signal to a remote supervising station. 3) Actuation of alarm notification appliances. 4) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the FACU.
l. A supervisory signal must automatically initiate the following functions: 1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FACU. 2) Transmission of an alarm signal to a remote supervising station. 3) Operation of a duct smoke detector must shut down the appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other requirements of this paragraph and as allowed by NFPA 72. 4) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the FACU.
m. A trouble condition must automatically initiate the following functions: 1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FACU. 2) Transmission of an alarm signal to a remote supervising station. 3) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the FACU. 4)
n. System control equipment must be programmed to provide a 60-minute to 180- minute delay in transmission of trouble signals resulting from primary power failure.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 5 1.7 TECHNICAL DATA AND SITE-SPECIFIC SOFTWARE
A. Technical data and site-specific software (meaning technical data that relates to computer software) that are specifically identified in this project, and may be required in other specifications, must be delivered, strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. The fire alarm system manufacturer must submit written confirmation of this contract provision as "Fire Alarm System Site-Specific Software Acknowledgement". Identify data delivered by reference to the specification paragraph against which it is furnished. Data to be submitted must include complete system, equipment, and software descriptions. Descriptions must show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract. The site-specific software data package must also include the following:
1. Items identified in NFPA 72, titled "Site-Specific Software". 2. Identification of programmable portions of the system equipment and capabilities. 3. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods of implementation detailing both equipment and software requirements. 4. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable portions for fire alarm. 5. Description of Fire Alarm Control Unit equipment operation. 6. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations. 7. Library of application software. 8. Operation and maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Submittal Documents
1. Preconstruction Submittals
a. Within 36 days of contract award but not less than 14 days prior to commencing any work on site, the Contractor must submit the following for review and approval. SD-02, SD-03 and SD-05 submittals received prior to the review and approval of the qualifications of the fire alarm subcontractor and QFPE must be returned disapproved without review. All resultant delays must be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Shop Drawings
a. Shop drawings must not be smaller than the Contract Drawings. Drawings must comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 and NFPA 170. Minimum scale for floor plans must be 1/8"=1'.
3. Nameplates
a. Nameplate illustrations and data to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer before installation.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 6 4. Wiring Diagrams
a. Three (3) copies of point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system, including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams must show connections from field devices to the FACU and remote FACU, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals, including pathway diagrams between the control unit and shared communications equipment within the protected premises. Point-to-point wiring diagrams must be job specific and must not indicate connections or circuits not being utilized. Provide complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of all devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a color-code schedule for the wiring.
5. System Layout
a. Three (3) copies of plan view drawing showing device locations, terminal cabinet locations, junction boxes, other related equipment, conduit routing, conduit sizes, wire counts, conduit fill calculations, wire color-coding, circuit identification in each conduit, and circuit layouts for all floors. Indicate candela rating of each visual notification appliance. Clearly identify the locations of isolation modules. Indicate the addresses of all devices, modules, relays, and similar. Indicate if the environment for the FACU is within its environmental listing (e.g. temperature/humidity). Provide a complete description of the system operation in matrix format similar to the "Typical Input/Output Matrix" included in the Annex of NFPA 72.
6. Notification Appliances
a. Calculations and supporting data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for notification appliances. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.
7. Initiating Devices
a. Calculations and supporting data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.
8. Battery Power
a. Calculations and supporting data as required in paragraph Battery Power Calculations for alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Calculations including ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each control unit component, and the battery recharging period, must be included on the drawings.
9. Voltage Drop Calculations
a. Voltage drop calculations for each notification circuit indicating that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all components, at a minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries. Include the calculations on the system layout drawings.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 7 10. Product Data
a. Three (3) copies of annotated descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item. Catalog cuts must also indicate the NRTL listing. The data must be highlighted to show model, size, and options that are intended for consideration. Data must be adequate to demonstrate compliance with all contract requirements. Product data for all equipment must be combined into a single submittal. b. Provide an equipment list identifying the type, quantity, make, and model number of each piece of equipment to be provided under this submittal. The equipment list must include the type, quantity, make and model of spare equipment. Types and quantities of equipment submitted must coincide with the types and quantities of equipment used in the battery calculations and those shown on the shop drawings.
11. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions
a. Six copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions. The O&M Instructions must be prepared in a single volume or in multiple volumes, with each volume indexed, and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package. Manuals must be approved prior to training. The Interior Fire Alarm System Operation and Maintenance Instructions must include the following: 1) "Manufacturer Data Package five” as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 2) Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual must include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and preliminary equipment list complete with description of equipment and their basic operating features. 3) Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The manuals must include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the system as installed. 4) Complete procedures for system revision and expansion, detailing both equipment and software requirements. 5) Software submitted for this project on CD/DVD media utilized. 6) Printouts of configuration settings for all devices. 7) Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist must be arranged in a columnar format. The first column must list all installed devices, the second column must state the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required, the third column must state the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column provided for additional comments or reference. All data (devices, testing frequencies, and similar) must comply with UFC 3-601-02. 8) A final Equipment List must be submitted with the Operating and Maintenance (O&M) manual.
12. As-Built Drawings
a. The drawings must show the system as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings must be submitted within two weeks after the final Government test of the system. At least one set of the as-built (marked-up) drawings must be provided at the time of, or prior to the final Government test.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 8 B. Qualifications
1. Fire Alarm System Designer
a. The fire alarm system designer must be certified as a Level III or IV Technician by National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in the Fire Alarm Systems subfield of Fire Protection Engineering Technology or meet the qualifications for a QFPE.
2. Supervisor
a. A NICET Level III or IV fire alarm technician must supervise the installation of the fire alarm system. A fire alarm technician with a minimum of eight years of experience must supervise the installation of the fire alarm system. The fire alarm technicians supervising the installation of equipment must be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
3. Technician
a. Fire alarm technicians with a minimum of four years of experience must be utilized to install and terminate fire alarm devices, cabinets and control units. The fire alarm technicians installing the equipment must be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
4. Installer
a. NICET Level II technician to assist in the installation of fire alarm devices, cabinets and control units. A licensed electrician must be allowed to install wire, cable, conduit and backboxes for the fire alarm system. The fire alarm installer must be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
5. Test Technician
a. Fire alarm technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience and NICET Level III or IV utilized in testing and certification of the installation of the fire alarm devices, cabinets and control units. The fire alarm technicians testing the equipment must be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment installed as part of this project.
6. Manufacturer
a. Components must be of current design and must be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as specified herein.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 9 C. Regulatory Requirements
1. Equipment and material must be listed or approved. Listed or approved, as used in this Section, means listed, labeled or approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. The omission of these terms under the description of any item of equipment described must not be construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approvals by testing laboratories must be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard. The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature or documentation must be considered as mandatory requirements.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts
1. Furnish the following spare parts in the manufacturers original unopened containers:
a. Five complete sets of system keys. b. Two of each type of fuse required by the system. c. One manual stations. d. Two of each type of detector installed. e. Two of each type of detector base and head installed. f. Two of each type of audible and visual alarm device installed. g. Two low voltage, and one 120 VAC surge protective device.
B. Special Tools
1. Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment must be furnished to the Contracting Officer, prior to the instruction of Government employees.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT
A. All fire alarm equipment must be listed for use under the applicable reference standards.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Standard Products
1. Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and listed for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer, where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular classification of materials. Material and equipment must be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 2 years prior to bid opening.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 10 B. Nameplates
1. Major components of equipment must have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract number provided on a new name plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. FACU 1) Nameplates must be etched metal or plastic, permanently attached by screws to control units or adjacent walls.
C. Keys
1. Keys and locks for equipment, control units and devices must be identical. Key requirements met for all panels and devices to match fire alarm master.
D. Instructions
1. Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the FACU. The card must show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions and their mounting location must be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted.
2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. Provide a complete fire alarm control unit (FACU) fully enclosed in a lockable steel cabinet as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care, maintenance, and use of the system must be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control unit, the unit cabinets must match exactly. The system must be capable of defining any module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, fire pump monitoring, independent smoke detection systems, relays for output function actuation.
1. Each control unit must provide power, supervision, control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit must be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each control unit with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation. 2. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the FACU must be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 11 B. Cabinet
1. Install control unit components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of control units as well as field wiring. The cabinet must be a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions. The enclosure must be identified by an engraved phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate must say "Fire Alarm control unit" and must not be less than 1-inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches.
C. Silencing Switches
1. Alarm Silencing Switch
a. Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FACU that must silence the audible and visual notification appliances. Subsequent activation of initiating devices must cause the notification appliances to re-activate.
2. Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch
a. Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch(es) that must silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal(s), but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch must be overridden upon activation of a subsequent supervisory or trouble condition. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated if the supervisory or trouble condition still exists.
D. Non-Interfering
1. Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Initiating devices must be manually reset by switch from the FACU after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.
E. Memory
1. Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices must not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
F. Field Programmability
1. Provide control units and control units that are fully field programmable for both input and output of control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions. The system program configuration must be menu driven. System changes must be password protected. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system must be provided as part of this contract.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 12 G. Input/Output Modifications
1. The FACU must contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs. These control features must consist of a control unit mounted keypad. Any bypass or modification to the system must indicate a trouble condition on the FACU.
H. Resetting
1. Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists.
I. Walk Test
1. The FACU must have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices must result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated in the history log, but no other outputs occur.
J. History Logging
1. The control unit must have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events must be stored in a battery-protected memory and must remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control unit must not clear the memory.
K. Manual Access
1. An operator at the control unit, having a proper access level, must have the capability to manually access the following information for each initiating device.
a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Detector range (normal, dirty).
2.4 MANUAL STATIONS
A. Provide metal or plastic, surface mounted, double-action, addressable manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations must be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted. Stations must be finished in red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a key must be required to reset the station.
2.5 SMOKE DETECTORS
1. Spot Type Detectors
a. Provide addressable photoelectric smoke detectors as follows:
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 13 1) Provide analog/addressable [photoelectric smoke detectors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 268. Smoke detectors must be listed for use with the FACU. 2) Provide self-restoring type detectors that do not require any readjustment after actuation at the FACU to restore them to normal operation. The detector must have a visual indicator to show actuation. 3) Vibration must have no effect on the detector's operation. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen must not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber. 4) Provide twist lock bases with screw terminals for each conductor. The detectors must maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs. 5) The detector address must identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Detectors must be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.
2.6 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES
A. The initiating device being monitored must be configured as a Class "B" initiating device circuits. The module must be listed as compatible with the control unit. The module must provide address setting means compatible with the control unit's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module must contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Pull stations with a monitor module in a common backbox are not required to have an LED. Modules must be listed for the environmental conditions in which they will be installed.
2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
1. Audible Notification Appliances
a. Audible appliances must conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464. Appliances must be connected into notification appliance circuits. Surface mounted audible appliances must be painted red or white. Recessed audible appliances must be installed with a grill that is painted red or white
2. Horns
a. Horns must be semi-flush mounted or surface-mounted, with the matching mounting backbox surface mounted vibrating type suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Horns must produce a sound rating of at least 85 dBA at 10 feet. Horns used in exterior locations must be specifically listed or approved for outdoor use and be provided with metal housing and protective grilles. Horns must be weatherproof.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 14 3. Visual Notification Appliances
a. Visual notification appliances must conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1638, UL 1971 and conform to the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA). Visual Notification Appliances must have clear high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, or light emitting diode (LED) and be marked "Alert" in letters of contrasting color. The light pattern must be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate must be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 15 candela based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe must be surface or semi-flush mounted.
2.8 ELECTRIC POWER
A. Primary Power
1. Power must be 120 VAC 60 Hz service for the FACU from the AC service to the building in accordance with NFPA 72.
B. SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY
1. Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure. Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power must be automatic and must not cause transmission of a false alarm. 2. Batteries
a. Provide sealed, maintenance-free, gel cell batteries as the source for emergency power to the FACU. Batteries must contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system must be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power. b. Capacity 1) Battery size must be the following capacity. This capacity applies to every control unit associated with this system, including fire alarm transmitters. a) Sufficient capacity to operate the fire alarm system under supervisory and trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal devices for 48 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 15 minutes.
c. Battery Power Calculations 1) Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements for the criteria noted in the paragraph "Capacity" above. a) Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm and supervisory power requirements. Include ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each control unit component, and compliance with UL 864. b) Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm and supervisory power requirements. Submit ampere-hour requirements for each system component with the calculations. c) Provide voltage drop calculations to indicate that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all components. Calculations must be performed using the minimum rated voltage of each component.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 15 2) For battery calculations assume a starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified alarm time. Using 20.4 VDC as starting voltage, perform a voltage drop calculation for circuits containing device and/or appliances remote from the power sources.
3. Battery Chargers
a. Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery charger. The charger must be capable of providing 120 percent of the connected system load and must maintain the batteries at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged (20.4 Volts dc), the charger must recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours after a single discharge cycle as described in paragraph CAPACITY above. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided.
2.9 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Surge protective devices must be provided to suppress all voltage transients which might damage fire alarm control unit components. Systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment must be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links, must have surge protection circuits installed at each end. The surge protective device must wire in series to the power supply of the protected equipment with screw terminations. Line voltage surge arrestor must be installed directly adjacent to the power panel where the FACU breaker is located.
1. Surge protective devices for nominal 120 VAC must be UL 1449 listed with a maximum 500 volt suppression level and have a maximum response time of 5 nanoseconds. The surge protective device must also meet IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2 category B tests for surge capacity. The surge protective device must feature multi-stage construction and be provided with a long-life indicator lamp (either light emitting diode or neon) which extinguishes upon failure of protected components. Any unit fusing must be externally accessible. 2. Surge protective devices for nominal 24 VAC, fire alarm telephone dialer, or ethernet connection must be UL 497B listed, meet IEEE C62.41.1 and have a maximum response time of 1-nanosecond. The surge protective device must feature multi-stage construction and be self-resetting. The surge protective device must be a base and plug style. The base assembly must have screw terminals for fire alarm wiring. The base assembly must accept "plug-in" surge protective module.
B. All surge protective devices (SPD) must be the standard product of a single manufacturer and be equal or better than the following:
1. For 120 VAC nominal line voltage: UL 1449 and UL 1283 listed, series connected 120 VAC, 20A rated, surge protective device in a NEMA 4x enclosure. Minimum 50,000 amp surge current rating with EMI/RFI filtering and a dry contact circuit for remote monitoring of surge protection status. 2. For 24-volt nominal line voltage: UL 497B listed, series connected low voltage, 24-volt, 5A rated, loop circuit protector, base and replaceable module.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 16 3. For alarm telephone dialers: UL 497A listed, series connected, 130-volt, 150 mA rated with self-resetting fuse, dialer circuit protector with modular plug and play. 4. For IP-DACTS: UL 497B listed, series connected, 6.4-volt, 1.5A rated with 20 kA/pair surge current, data network protector with modular plug and play.
2.10 WIRING
A. Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 with the additions and modifications specified herein.
B. Alarm Wiring
1. IDC and SLC wiring must be solid copper cable in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring must be No. 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Visual notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible alarm appliances, must be copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Wire size must be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC must not operate at less than the listed voltages for the detectors and/or appliances. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, must be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation. Acceptable power-limited cables are FPL, FPLR or FPLP as appropriate with red colored covering. Nonpower- limited cables must comply with NFPA 70.
2.11 AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM TRANSMITTERS
A. Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels
1. Transmitters must be compatible with proprietary supervising station receiving equipment. Each radio alarm transmitter must be the manufacturer's recognized commercial product, completely assembled, wired, factory tested, and delivered ready for installation and operation. Transmitters must be provided in accordance with applicable portions of NFPA 72, Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 90 and Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 15. Transmitter electronics module must be contained within the physical housing as an integral, removable assembly. The proprietary supervising station receiving equipment and the transmitter must be fully compatible with this equipment. At the contractors option, and if listed, the transmitter may be housed in the same control unit as the FAC. The transmitter must be narrowband radio, with FCC certification for narrowband operation and meets the requirements of the NTIA (National Telecommunications and Information Administration) Manual of Regulations and Procedures for Federal Frequency Management. 2. There shall not be relays between the fire alarm panel and Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels. Fire alarm panel shall have Point to Point capability through the System 3. Operation
a. Operate each transmitter from 120-volt ac power. In the event of 120-volt ac power loss, the transmitter must automatically switch to battery operation. Switchover must be accomplished with no interruption of protective service, and must automatically transmit a trouble message. Upon restoration of ac power, transfer back to normal ac power supply must also be automatic.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 17 4. Battery Power
a. Transmitter standby battery capacity must provide sufficient power to operate the transmitter in a normal standby status for a minimum of 72 hours and be capable of transmitting alarms during that period.
5. Transmitter Housing
a. Use NEMA Type 1 for housing. The housing must contain a lock that is keyed identical to the fire alarm system for the building. Radio alarm transmitter housing must be factory painted with a suitable priming coat and not less than two coats of a hard, durable weatherproof enamel.
6. Antenna
a. Antenna must be omnidirectional, coaxial, halfwave dipole antennas for radio alarm transmitters with a driving point impedance to match transmitter output. The antenna and antenna mounts must be corrosion resistant and designed to withstand wind velocities of 100 mph. Do not mount antennas to any portion of the building roofing system. Protect the antenna from physical damage
B. Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station
1. The following signals must be sent to the base receiving station:
a. Manual pull stations b. Smoke detectors
2.12 SYSTEM MONITORING
A. See specification 283900
2.13 ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS
A. Environmental enclosures must be provided to permit fire alarm components to be used in areas that exceed the environmental limits of the listing. The enclosure must be listed for the device or appliance as either a manufactured part number or as a listed compatible accessory for the component is currently listed. Guards required to deter mechanical damage must be either a listed manufactured part or a listed accessory for the category of the initiating device or notification appliance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACU)
1. Locate the FACU where indicated on the drawings. Surface mount the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or center the cabinet at 5 feet, whichever is lower. Conductor terminations must be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection must be permanently mounted in the FACU. Locate the document storage cabinet adjacent to the FACU unless the Contracting Officer directs otherwise.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 18 B. Battery Cabinets
1. When batteries will not fit in the FACU, locate battery cabinets below or adjacent to the FACU. Battery cabinets must be installed at an accessible location when standing at floor level. Battery cabinets must not be installed lower than 12 inches above finished floor, measured to the bottom of the cabinet, nor higher than 36 inches above the floor, measured to the top of the cabinet. Installing batteries above drop ceilings or in inaccessible locations is prohibited. Battery cabinets must be large enough to accommodate batteries and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of control units as well as field wiring. The cabinet must be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions. The cabinet must be identified by an engraved phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate must indicate the control unit(s) the batteries power and must not be less than 1-inch high.
C. Manual Stations
1. Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated on the drawings. Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally. Manual stations must be mounted at 42 inches measured to the operating handle.
D. Notification Appliances
1. Locate notification appliance devices [as required by NFPA 72 and where indicated on the drawings. Where more than two visual notification appliances are located in the same room or corridor or field of view, provide synchronized operation. Devices must use screw terminals for all field wiring. Audible and visual notification appliances mounted in acoustical ceiling tiles must be centered in the tiles plus or minus 2 inches. 2. Audible and visual notification appliances mounted on the exterior of the building, within unconditioned spaces, or in the vicinity of showers must be listed weatherproof appliances installed on weatherproof backboxes. 3. Speakers must not be located in close proximity to the FACU or LOC so as to cause feedback when the microphone is in use.
E. Smoke Detectors
1. Locate detectors as required by NFPA 72 and their listing and as indicated on the drawings] on a 4-inch mounting box. Smoke detectors are permitted to be on the wall no lower than 12 inches from the ceiling with no minimum distance from the ceiling. Install smoke detectors no closer than 3 feet from air handling supply diffusers. Detectors installed in acoustical ceiling tiles must be centered in the tiles plus or minus 2 inches.
F. Ceiling Bridges
1. Provide ceiling bridges for ceiling-mounted appliances. Ceiling bridges must be as recommended/required by the manufacturer of the ceiling-mounted notification appliance.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 19 3.2 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING
A. Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes
1. Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box must be connected to screw-type terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. The use of wire nuts, crimp connections, or similar devices is prohibited. Wiring to conform with NFPA 70. 2. Indicate the following in the wiring diagrams:
a. Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system, including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams must show connections from field devices to the FACU and remote fire alarm control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals. b. Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a color code schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing the locations of devices and equipment.
B. Terminal Cabinets
1. Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser, on each floor at each riser, and where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size must be appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. Conductor terminations must be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection must be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet. Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches. Only screw-type terminals are permitted. Provide an identification label, that displays "FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET" with 2-inch lettering, on the front of the terminal cabinet.
C. Alarm Wiring
1. Voltages must not be mixed in any junction box, housing or device, except those containing power supplies and control relays. 2. Utilize shielded wiring where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, ground the shield at only one point, in or adjacent to the FACU. 3. Pigtail or T-tap connections to signal line circuits, initiating device circuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notification appliance circuits are prohibited. 4. Color coding is required for circuits and must be maintained throughout the circuit. Conductors used for the same functions must be similarly color coded. Conform wiring to NFPA 70. 5. Pull all conductors splice free. The use of wire nuts, crimped connectors, or twisting of conductors is prohibited. Where splices are unavoidable, the location of the junction box or pull box where they occur must be identified on the as-built drawings. The number and location of splices must be subject to approval by the Designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE).
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 20 D. Back Boxes and Conduit
1. In addition to the requirements of Section 26 20 00, provide all wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit unless specifically indicated otherwise. Minimum conduit size must be 3/4-inch in diameter. Do not use electrical non-metallic tubing (ENT) or flexible non-metallic tubing and associated fittings.
a. Galvanized rigid steel (GRS) conduit must be utilized where exposed to weather, where subject to physical damage, and where exposed on exterior of buildings. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) may be used in lieu of GRS as allowed by NFPA 70. b. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) is permitted above suspended ceilings or exposed where not subject to physical damage. Do not use EMT underground, encased in concrete, mortar, or grout, in hazardous locations, where exposed to physical damage, outdoors or in fire pump rooms. Use die-cast compression connectors. c. For rigid metallic conduit (RMC), only threaded type fitting are permitted for wet or damp locations. d. Flexible metal conduit is permitted for initiating device circuits 6 feet in length or less. Flexible metal conduit is prohibited for notification appliance circuits and signaling line circuits. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit in damp and wet locations. e. Schedule 40 (minimum) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) is permitted where conduit is routed underground or underground below floor slabs. Convert non-metallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80, to plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before turning up through floor slab. f. Exterior wall penetrations must be weathertight. Conduit must be sealed to prevent the infiltration of moisture.
E. Conductor Terminations
1. Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, and FACU must be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable must have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FACU, and remote FACU must contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing must be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, control unit, or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment.
3.3 CONNECTION OF NEW SYSTEM
A. The following new system connections must be made during the last phase of construction, at the beginning of the pre-Government tests. New system connections must include:
1. Connection of new system transmitter to existing installation fire reporting system
B. Once this connections is made, system must be left energized. Report immediately to the Contracting Officer, coordination and field problems resulting from the connection of the above components.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 21 3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs, fire-rated walls, partitions with fire-rated doors, corridor walls, and vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.5 PAINTING
A. In unfinished areas (including areas above drop ceilings), paint all exposed electrical conduit (serving fire alarm equipment), fire alarm conduit, surface metal raceway, junction boxes and covers red. In lieu of painting conduit, the contractor may utilize red conduit with a factory applied finish.
B. In finished areas, paint exposed electrical conduit (serving fire alarm equipment), fire alarm conduit, surface metal raceways, junction boxes, and electrical boxes to match adjacent finishes. The inside cover of the junction box must be identified as "Fire Alarm" and the conduit must have painted red bands 3/4-inch wide at 10-foot centers and at each side of a floor, wall, or ceiling penetration. All wires shall be clearly identified for bell circuit and/or speaker/audio for MNS.
C. Painting must comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
D. The last device installed must have an engraved sign stating the value and location of the end of line resistor.
E. On all false ceiling grids the cross "T"s will be marked with a RED dot indicating the location of fire 'J' boxes.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Procedures
1. Submit detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by the NICET Level 2. III or IV Fire Alarm Technician, and the representative of the installing company, 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures must list all components of the installed system such as initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface equipment, and surge protective devices. Test procedures must include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms must be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data; similar to the forma in NFPA 72 and NFPA 4.) The test procedures and accompanying test data forms must be used for the pre-Government testing and the Government testing. The test data forms must record the test results and must:
a. Identify the NFPA Class of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC), and Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). b. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be performed on each component, and describe how these tests must be performed. c. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test location, and alphanumeric identity.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 22 d. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test (including equipment necessary for smoke detector testing. The use of magnets is not permitted. e. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.
B. Pre-Government Testing
1. Verification of Compliant Installation
a. Conduct inspections and tests to ensure that devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests must meet the requirements of paragraph entitled "Minimum System Tests" as required by NFPA 72. The contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment must be in attendance at the pre-Government testing to make necessary adjustments. After inspection and testing is complete, provide a signed Verification of Compliant Installation letter by the QFPE that the installation is complete, compliant with the specification and fully operable. The letter must include the names and titles of the witnesses to the pre-Government tests. Provide all completion documentation as required by NFPA 72 including all referenced annex sections and the test reports noted below. 1) NFPA 72 Record of Completion. 2) NFPA 72 Record of Inspection and Testing. 3) Fire Alarm and Emergency Communication System Inspection and Testing Form. 4) Audibility test results with marked-up test floor plans. 5) Documentation that all tests identified in the paragraph "Minimum System Tests" are complete.
2. Request for Government Final Test
a. When the verification of compliant installation has been completed, submit a formal request for Government final test to the Designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE) Government final testing will not be scheduled until the DFPE has received copies of the request for Government final testing and Verification of Compliant Installation letter with all required reports. Government final testing will not be performed until after the connections to the installation-wide fire reporting system has been completed and tested to confirm communications are fully functional. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the requested test date.
C. Correction of Deficiencies
1. If equipment was found to be defective or non-compliant with contract requirements, perform corrective actions and repeat the tests. Tests must be conducted and repeated if necessary until the system has been demonstrated to comply with all contract requirements.
D. Government Final Tests
1. The tests must be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the DFPE. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. The following must be provided at the job site for Government Final Testing:
a. The manufacturer's technical representative.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 23 b. The contractor's Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE). c. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed. d. Loop resistance test results. e. Complete program printout including input/output addresses. f. Copy of pre-Government Test Certificate, test procedures and completed test data forms. g. Audibility test results with marked-up floor plans.
2. Government Final Tests will be witnessed by the Designated Fire Protection Engineer and Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE). At this time, any and all required tests noted in the paragraph "Minimum System Tests" must be repeated at their discretion.
3.7 MINIMUM SYSTEM TESTS
A. System Tests
1. Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72. The required tests are as follows:
a. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests must be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final Government test. b. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests must be accomplished at the pre-Government test with results available at the final system test. c. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's O&M manual. d. Test each initiating device and notification appliance and circuit for proper operation and response at the control unit. Smoke detectors must be tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. If there is a failure at these devices, then supervision must be tested at each device. e. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's O&M manual. f. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified. g. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified. h. Visually inspect wiring. i. Test the battery charger and batteries. j. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FACU. Hard copy records of the software must be provided to the Contracting Officer. k. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate. l. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits. m. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive. n. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke detectors during tests to minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of smoke detectors must be conducted using real smoke or the use of canned smoke which is permitted. o. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire length) on each notification appliance circuit.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 24 p. Verify the documentation cabinet is installed and contains all as-built shop drawings, product data sheets, design calculations, site-specific software data package, and all documentation required by paragraph titled "Test Reports".
B. Audibility Tests
1. Sound pressure levels from audible notification appliances must be a minimum of 15 dBa over ambient with a maximum of 110 dBa in any occupiable area. The provisions for audible notification (audibility) must be met with doors, fire shutters, movable partitions, and similar devices closed.
3.8 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
1. Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M manuals must be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance. The drawings must show the system as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings must be submitted within two weeks after the final Government test of the system. At least one set of as-built (marked-up) drawings must be provided at the time of, or prior to the Final Government Test.
a. Furnish one set of CDs or DVDs containing software back-up and CAD based drawings in latest version of AutoCAD, DXF and portable document formats of as- built drawings and schematics. b. Include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment, both factory and field wired. c. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of devices and equipment. d. Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions.
3.9 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES
A. Instructor
1. Provide the services of an instructor, who has received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the operation, inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor must train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire alarm system. The instructor must be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor must be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work. Submit the instructors information and qualifications including the training history.
B. Required Instruction Time
1. Provide 8 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction must be given during regular working hours on such dates and times selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer. The training must allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and/or fire department responses. 2. Technical Training
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 25 a. Equipment manufacturer or a factory representative must provide 1 days of on site and 5 days of technical training to the Government at the manufacturing facility. Training must allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. Factory training must occur within 6 months of system acceptance.
C. Technical Training Manual
1. Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions, maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The operations training must familiarize designated government personnel with proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course must provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to the system.
3.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Repair Service/Replacement Parts
1. Repair services and replacement parts for the system must be available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting Officer. During the warranty period, the service technician must be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs must be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site. 2. During the warranty period, the installing fire alarm contractor is responsible for conducting all required testing and maintenance in accordance with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 72 and the system manufacturer. Installing fire alarm contractor is NOT responsible for any damage resulting from abuse, misuse, or neglect of equipment by the end user.
B. Spare Parts
1. Spare parts furnished must be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts must be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts must be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the Government testing and must be accompanied by an inventory list.
C. Document Storage Cabinet
1. Upon completion of the project, but prior to project close-out, place in the document storage cabinet copies of the following record documentation:
a. As-built shop drawings b. Product data sheets c. Design calculations d. Site-specific software data package e. All documentation required by SD-06.
END OF SECTION 283100
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283100 - 26 SECTION 283900 – FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 01 of these specifications, which govern work under DIVISION 28. Refer to other sections of these specifications for additional related requirements.
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS AND GUIDES (Edition currently adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction)
1. American Disabilities Act (ADA) 2. Acoustical Society of America (ASA) 3. ASTM International (ASTM) 4. FM Global (FM) 5. Fort Irwin Design Guideline Manual 6. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 7. Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 9. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) 10. UFC 3-600-01 – 2020 Change 5 11. UFC 4-010-01 – 2018 Change 2 12. UFC 4-021-01 – 2018 Change 2 13. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Refer to the following sections for related work and coordination:
1. Section 283100 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 2. Section 211313 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1.4 SUMMARY
A. This work includes designing and providing a new, complete, fire alarm and mass notification (MNS) system as described herein and on the contract drawings. Include system wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, initiating devices, notification appliances, supervising station fire alarm transmitters/mass notification transceiver, and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operational system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. Provide system complete and ready for operation. Design and installation must comply with UFC 4-010-06.
B. Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing in strict accordance with NFPA 72, except as modified herein. The system layout on the drawings show the intent of coverage and suggested locations. Final quantity, system layout, and coordination are the responsibility of the Contractor.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 1 C. Each remote fire alarm control unit must be powered from a wiring riser specifically for that use or from a local emergency power panel located on the same floor as the remote fire alarm control unit. Where remote fire control units are provided, equipment for notification appliances may be located in the remote fire alarm control units.
D. The fire alarm and mass notification system must be independent of the building security, building management, and energy/utility monitoring systems other than for control functions.
1.5 Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE)
A. Services of the QFPE must include:
1. Reviewing SD-02, SD-03, and SD-05 submittal packages for completeness and compliance with the provisions of this specification. Construction (shop) drawings and calculations must be prepared by, or prepared under the immediate supervision of, the QFPE. The QFPE must affix their professional engineering stamp with signature to the shop drawings, calculations, and material data sheets, indicating approval prior to submitting the shop drawings to the DFPE. 2. Providing a letter documenting that the SD-02, SD-03, and SD-05 submittal package has been reviewed and noting any outstanding comments. 3. Performing in-progress construction surveillance prior to installation of ceilings (rough-in inspection). 4. Witnessing pre-Government and final Government functional performance testing and performing a final installation review. 5. Signing applicable certificates under SD-07.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment, devices, and functions must be defined as follows:
1. Interface Device - An addressable device that interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog/addressable system. 2. Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit (FMCU) - A master control unit having the features of a fire alarm control unit (FACU) and an autonomous control unit (ACU) where these units are interconnected to function as a combined fire alarm/mass notification system. The FACU and ACU functions may be contained in a single cabinet or in independent, interconnected, and co-located cabinets. 3. Remote Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit - A control unit, physically remote from the fire alarm and mass notification control unit, that receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices; may supply power to detection devices and interface devices; may provide transfer of power to the notification appliances; may provide transfer of condition to relays or devices connected to the control unit; and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm and mass notification control unit. 4. Local Operating Console (LOC) - A unit designed to allow emergency responders and/or building occupants to operate the MNS including delivery of recorded messages and/or live voice announcements, initiate visual, textual visual, and audible appliance operation and other relayed functions. 5. Terminal Cabinet - A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door where terminal strips are securely mounted inside the cabinet. 6. Control Module and Relay Module - Terms utilized to describe emergency control function interface devices as defined by NFPA 72.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 2 7. Designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE) - The DoD fire protection engineer that oversees that Area of Responsibility for that project. This is sometimes referred to as the "cognizant" fire protection engineer. Interpret reference to "authority having jurisdiction" and/or AHJ in referenced standards to mean the Designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE). The DFPE may be responsible for review of the contractor submittals having a G" designation, and for witnessing final inspection and testing. 8. Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE) - A QFPE is an individual who is a licensed professional engineer (P.E.), who has passed the fire protection engineering written examination administered by the National Council of Examiners for Engineering and Surveying (NCEES) and has relevant fire protection engineering experience.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
B. Shop drawings (SD-02), product data (SD-03) and calculations (SD-05) must be prepared by the fire alarm designer and combined and submitted as one complete package. The QFPE must review the SD-02/SD-03/SD-05 submittal package for completeness and compliance with the Contract provisions prior to submission to the Government. The QFPE must provide a Letter of Confirmation that they have reviewed the submittal package for compliance with the contract provisions. This letter must include their registered professional engineer stamp and signature. Partial submittals and submittals not reviewed by the QFPE will be returned by the Government disapproved without review.
C. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
1. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
a. Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE); G b. Fire alarm system designer; G c. Supervisor; G d. Technician; G e. Installer; G f. Test Technician; G g. Fire Alarm System Site-Specific Software Acknowledgement; G
2. SD-02 Shop Drawings
a. Nameplates; G b. Instructions; G c. Wiring Diagrams; G d. System Layout; G e. Notification Appliances; G f. Initiating devices; G g. Amplifiers; G h. Battery Power; G i. Voltage Drop Calculations; G
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 3 3. SD-03 Product Data
a. Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit (FMCU); G b. Local Operating Console (LOC); G c. Amplifiers; G d. Tone Generators; G e. Digitalized voice generators; G f. LCD Annunciator; G g. Manual Stations; G h. Smoke Detectors; G i. Addressable Interface Devices; G j. Addressable Control Modules; G k. Isolation Modules; G l. Notification Appliances; G m. Textual Display Sign Control Panel; G n. Textual Display Signs; G o. Batteries; G p. Battery Chargers; G q. Supplemental Notification Appliance Circuit Panels; G r. Auxiliary Power Supply Panels; G s. Surge Protective Devices; G t. Alarm Wiring; G u. Back Boxes and Conduit; G v. Ceiling Bridges for Ceiling-Mounted Appliances; G w. Terminal Cabinets; G x. Automatic Fire Alarm Transmitters (including housing); G y. Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels; G z. Mass Notification Transceiver; G aa. Document Storage Cabinet; G
4. SD-05 Design Data
a. Air Sampling Smoke Detection System Calculations; G
5. SD-06 Test Reports
a. Test Procedures; G
6. SD-07 Certificates
a. Verification of Compliant Installation; G b. Request for Government Final Test; G
7. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
a. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G b. Instruction of Government Employees; G
8. SD-11 Closeout Submittals
a. As-Built Drawings b. Spare Parts
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 4 1.8 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Fire alarm system/mass notification system including textual display sign control panel(s), components requiring power, except for the FMCU(s) power supply, must operate on 24 volts DC unless noted otherwise in this section.
B. The Fire alarm and mass notification system must be a complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm and mass notification system conforming to NFPA 72, UL 864, and UL 2572. Systems meeting UL 2017 only are not acceptable. The system must be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of an alarm initiating device. The system must remain in the alarm mode until the initiating device is reset and the control unit is reset and restored to normal. The system may be placed in the alarm mode by local microphones, LOC, FMCU, or remotely from authorized locations/users.
C. Alarm Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances (Visual, Voice, Textual)
1. Connect alarm initiating devices to initiating device circuits (IDC) Class "B", or to signaling line circuits (SLC) Class "B" and installed in accordance with NFPA 72. 2. Connect notification appliances to notification appliance circuits (NAC) Class "B".
D. Functions and Operating Features
1. The system must provide the following functions and operating features:
a. Power, annunciation, supervision, and control for the system. Addressable systems must be microcomputer (microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified. b. Visual alarm notification appliances must be synchronized as required by NFPA 72. c. Electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control unit. d. An audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition, or ground fault (or short circuit for Class "X"). The trouble signal must also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory control unit modules. After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal must again sound until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke detector in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke must not initiate a trouble condition. e. A trouble signal silence feature that must silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. f. Program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FMCU to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, fire reporting system and air handler shutdown features. Operation of this programmed action must indicate on the FMCU display as a supervisory or trouble condition. g. Alarm functions must override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions must override trouble functions. h. The system must be capable of being programmed from the control unit keyboard. Programmed information must be stored in non-volatile memory. i. The system must be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring non- addressable alarm and supervisory devices. j. There must be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable devices that may be in alarm simultaneously.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 5 k. Where the fire alarm/mass notification system is responsible for initiating an action in another emergency control device or system, such as HVAC the addressable fire alarm relay must be located in the vicinity of the emergency control device. l. An alarm signal must automatically initiate the following functions: 1) Transmission of an alarm signal to a remote supervising station. 2) Visual indication of the device operated on the FMCU 3) Actuation of alarm notification appliances. 4) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the FMCU. 5) Operation of an interface that operates vibrating pagers worn by hearing- impaired occupants.
m. A supervisory signal must automatically initiate the following functions: 1) Transmission of a supervisory signal to a remote supervising station. 2) Visual indication of the device operated on the FMCU. 3) Operation of a duct smoke detector must shut down the appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other requirements of this paragraph and as allowed by NFPA 72. 4) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the FMCU.
n. A trouble condition must automatically initiate the following functions: 1) Transmission of a trouble signal to a remote supervising station. 2) Visual indication of the device operated on the FMCU. 3) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the FMCU.
o. System control equipment must be programmed to provide a 60-minute to 180- minute delay in transmission of trouble signals resulting from primary power failure. p. Activation of a LOC pushbutton must activate the audible and visual alarms in the facility. The audible message must be the one associated with the pushbutton activated
1.9 TECHNICAL DATA AND SITE-SPECIFIC SOFTWARE
A. Technical data and site-specific software (meaning technical data that relates to computer software) that are specifically identified in this project, and may be required in other specifications, must be delivered, strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. The fire alarm system manufacturer must submit written confirmation of this contract provision as "Fire Alarm System Site-Specific Software Acknowledgement". Identify data delivered by reference to the specification paragraph against which it is furnished. Data to be submitted must include complete system, equipment, and software descriptions. Descriptions must show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract. The site-specific software data package must also include the following:
1. Items identified in NFPA 72, titled "Site-Specific Software". 2. Identification of programmable portions of the system equipment and capabilities. 3. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods of implementation detailing both equipment and software requirements. 4. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable portions for fire alarm and mass notification. 5. Description of Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit equipment operation. 6. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations. 7. Library of application software. 8. Operation and maintenance manuals
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 6 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Submittal Documents
1. Preconstruction Submittals
a. Within 36 days of contract award but not less than 14 days prior to commencing any work on site, the Contractor must submit the following for review and approval. SD-02, SD-03 and SD-05 submittals received prior to the review and approval of the qualifications of the fire alarm subcontractor and QFPE must be returned disapproved without review. All resultant delays must be the sole responsibility of the Contractor
2. Shop Drawings
a. Shop drawings must not be smaller than the Contract Drawings. Drawings must comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 and NFPA 170. Minimum scale for floor plans must be 1/8"=1'.
3. Nameplates
a. Nameplate illustrations and data to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer before installation.
4. Wiring Diagrams
a. Three (3) copies of point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system, including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams must show connections from field devices to the FMCU, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals, including pathway diagrams between the control unit and shared communications equipment within the protected premises. Point-to-point wiring diagrams must be job specific and must not indicate connections or circuits not being utilized. Provide complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of all devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a color-code schedule for the wiring.
5. System Layout
a. Three (3) copies of plan view drawing showing device locations, terminal cabinet locations, junction boxes, other related equipment, conduit routing, conduit sizes, wire counts, conduit fill calculations, wire color-coding, circuit identification in each conduit, and circuit layouts for all floors. Indicate candela rating of each visual notification appliance. Indicate the wattage of each speaker. Clearly identify the locations of isolation modules. Indicate the addresses of all devices, modules, relays, and similar. Show/identify all acoustically similar spaces. Indicate if the environment for the FMCU is within its environmental listing (e.g. temperature/humidity). b. Provide a complete description of the system operation in matrix format similar to the "Typical Input/Output Matrix" included in the Annex of NFPA 72.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 7 6. Notification Appliances
a. Calculations and supporting data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for notification appliances. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings
7. Initiating Devices
a. Calculations and supporting data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.
8. Amplifiers
a. Calculations and supporting data to indicate that amplifiers have sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all notification speakers at tapped settings plus 25 percent spare capacity. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.
9. Battery Power
a. Calculations and supporting data as required in paragraph Battery Power Calculations for alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Calculations including ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each control unit component, and the battery recharging period, must be included on the drawings.
10. Voltage Drop Calculations
a. Voltage drop calculations for each notification circuit indicating that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all components, at a minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries. Include the calculations on the system layout drawings.
11. Product Data
a. Three (3) copies of annotated descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item. Catalog cuts must also indicate the NRTL listing. The data must be highlighted to show model, size, and options that are intended for consideration. Data must be adequate to demonstrate compliance with all contract requirements. Product data for all equipment must be combined into a single submittal. Provide an equipment list identifying the type, quantity, make, and model number of each piece of equipment to be provided under this submittal. The equipment list must include the type, quantity, make and model of spare equipment. Types and quantities of equipment submitted must coincide with the types and quantities of equipment used in the battery calculations and those shown on the shop drawings.
12. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions
a. Six (6) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions. The O&M Instructions must be prepared in a single volume or in multiple volumes, with each volume indexed, and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package. Manuals must be approved prior to training. The Interior Fire Alarm And Mass Notification System Operation and Maintenance Instructions must include the following:
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 8 1) "Manufacturer Data Package five (5)" as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
b. Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual must include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and preliminary equipment list complete with description of equipment and their basic operating features. c. Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The manuals must include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the system as installed. d. Complete procedures for system revision and expansion, detailing both equipment and software requirements. e. Software submitted for this project on CD/DVD media utilized. f. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices. g. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist must be arranged in a columnar format. The first column must list all installed devices, the second column must state the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required, the third column must state the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column provided for additional comments or reference. All data (devices, testing frequencies, and similar) must comply with UFC 3-601-02. h. A final Equipment List must be submitted with the Operating and Maintenance (O&M) manual.
13. As-Built Drawings
a. The drawings must show the system as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings must be submitted within two weeks after the final Government test of the system. At least one set of the as-built (marked-up) drawings must be provided at the time of, or prior to the final Government test.
B. Qualifications
1. Fire Alarm System Designer
a. The fire alarm system designer must be certified as a Level III or IV Technician by National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in the Fire Alarm Systems subfield of Fire Protection Engineering Technology or meet the qualifications for a QFPE.
2. Supervisor
a. A NICET Level III or IV fire alarm technician must supervise the installation of the fire alarm/mass notification system, including the air sampling smoke detection system. A fire alarm technician with a minimum of eight years of experience must supervise the installation of the fire alarm/mass notification system. The fire alarm technicians supervising the installation of equipment must be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 9 3. Technician
a. Fire alarm technicians with a minimum of four years of experience must be utilized to install and terminate fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and control units. The fire alarm technicians installing the equipment must be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
4. Installer
a. NICET Level II technician to assist in the installation of fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and control units. A licensed electrician must be allowed to install wire, cable, conduit and backboxes for the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The fire alarm installer must be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
5. Test Technician
a. Fire alarm technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience and NICET Level III or IV utilized in testing and certification of the installation of the fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and control units. The fire alarm technicians testing the equipment must be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment installed as part of this project.
6. Manufacturer
a. Components must be of current design and must be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as specified herein.
7. Regulatory Requirements
a. Equipment and material must be listed or approved. Listed or approved, as used in this Section, means listed, labeled or approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. The omission of these terms under the description of any item of equipment described must not be construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approvals by testing laboratories must be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard. The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature or documentation must be considered as mandatory requirements.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.
1.12 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts
1. Furnish the following spare parts in the manufacturers original unopened containers: 2. Five complete sets of system keys. 07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 10 3. Two of each type of fuse required by the system. 4. One manual stations. 5. Two of each type of detector installed. 6. Two of each type of detector base and head installed. 7. Two of each type of audible and visual alarm device installed. 8. One textual visual notification appliance. 9. Two of each type of addressable monitor module installed. 10. Two of each type of addressable control module installed. 11. Two low voltage and one 120 VAC surge protective device.
B. Special Tools
1. Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment must be furnished to the Contracting Officer, prior to the instruction of Government employees.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT
A. All fire alarm and mass notification equipment must be listed for use under the applicable reference standards. Interfacing of UL 864 or similar approved industry listing with Mass Notification equipment listed to UL 2572 must be done in a laboratory listed configuration, if the software programming features cannot provide a listed interface control.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Standard Products
1. Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and listed for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer, where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular classification of materials. Material and equipment must be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 2 years prior to bid opening.
B. Nameplates
1. Major components of equipment must have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract number provided on a new name plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. FMCU 1) Nameplates must be etched metal or plastic, permanently attached by screws to control units or adjacent walls.
b. Keys 1) Keys and locks for equipment, control units and devices must be identical. Master all keys and locks to a single key as required by the Installation Fire Department.
c. Instructions
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 11 1) Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the FMCU. The card must show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions must also include procedures for operating live voice microphones. The instructions and their mounting location must be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted.
C. FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL UNIT
1. Provide a complete fire alarm and mass notification control unit (FMCU) fully enclosed in a lockable steel cabinet as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care, maintenance, and use of the system must be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control unit, the unit cabinets must match exactly. The system must be capable of defining any module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, independent smoke detection systems, relays for output function actuation.
a. Each control unit must provide power, supervision, control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit must be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each control unit with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation. b. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the FMCU must be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters. The mass notification control unit must have the capability of temporarily deactivate the fire alarm audible notification appliances while delivering voice messages. c. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages, strobes and displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide capacity for at least eight prerecorded messages. Provide the ability to automatically repeat prerecorded messages. Provide a secure microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete outputs to temporarily deactivate fire alarm audible notification, initiate/synchronize strobes and initiate textual visual notification appliances. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file.
2. Cabinet
a. Install control unit components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of control units as well as field wiring. The cabinet must be a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions. The enclosure must be identified by an engraved phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate must say "Fire Alarm and Mass Notification control unit" and must not be less than 1-inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches.
3. Silencing Switches 07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 12 a. Alarm Silencing Switch 1) Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FMCU that must silence the audible and visual notification appliances. Subsequent activation of initiating devices must cause the notification appliances to re-activate.
b. Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch 1) Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch(es) that must silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal(s), but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch must be overridden upon activation of a subsequent supervisory or trouble condition. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated if the supervisory or trouble condition still exists.
c. Non-Interfering 1) Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Initiating devices must be manually reset by switch from the FMCU after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.
d. Audible Notification System 1) The Audible Notification System must comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements, except as specified herein. The system must be a one-way, multi-channel voice notification system incorporating user selectability of a minimum eight distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of a voice module for delivery of recorded messages. Audible appliances must produce a three-pulse temporal pattern for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control unit is reset or silenced. Automatic messages must be broadcast through speakers throughout the building/facility. A live voice message must override the automatic audible output through use of a microphone input at the control unit or the LOC. a) When using the microphone, live messages must be broadcast on all call. The system must be capable of operating all speakers at the same time. The Audible Notification System must support Public Address (PA) paging for the facility. This must be accomplished with the provision of a separate microphone with a head unit that interfaces with the FMCU. The public address paging function must not override any fire alarm or mass notification functions. The microphone must be hand-held style. Hand-held microphones must be housed in a separate protective cabinet. The cabinet must be accessible without the use of a key. The location of the microphone(s) must be approved by the Designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE). Activation of the public address microphone must not initiate activation of visual notification appliances or LED text displays. b) The microprocessor must actively interrogate circuitry, field wiring, and digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any other malfunction that could render the digitalized voice module inoperative must automatically cause the three-pulse temporal pattern to take over all functions assigned to the failed unit in the event an alarm is activated. 2) Outputs and Operational Modules 07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 13 a) All outputs and operational modules must be fully supervised with on- board diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Provide form "C" contacts for system alarm and trouble conditions. Provide circuits for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass Notification event, the control unit must not generate nor cause any trouble alarms to be generated with the Fire Alarm system. 3) Mass Notification a) The system must have the capability of utilizing an LOC with redundant controls of the FMCU. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) must be provided for the activation of strobe appliances. Audio output must be selectable for line level. A hand-held microphone must be provided and, upon activation, must take priority over any tone signal, recorded message or PA microphone operation in progress, while maintaining the strobe NAC circuit activation. b) The Mass Notification functions must override the manual or automatic fire alarm notification, and public address (PA) functions. Other fire alarm functions including transmission of a signal(s) to the fire department must remain operational. When a mass notification announcement is disengaged and a fire alarm condition still exists, the audible and visual notification appliances must resume activation for alarm conditions. The fire alarm message must be of lower priority that all other messages (except any "test" messages") and must not override any other messages. c) Messages must be recorded professionally utilizing standard industry methods, in a professional female voice and coordinated with the base. d) Auxiliary Input Module must be designed to be an outboard expansion module to either expand the number of optional LOC's, or allow a telephone interface. 4) Installation-Wide Control a) If an installation-wide control system for mass notification exists on the Base, the autonomous control unit must communicate with the central control unit of the Installation-wide system. The autonomous control unit must receive commands/messages from the central control unit and provide status information. 5) Memory a) Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age- dependent devices must not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS. 6) Field Programmability a) Provide control units and control units that are fully field programmable for both input and output of control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions. The system program configuration must be menu driven. System changes must be password protected. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system must be provided as part of this contract. 7) Input/Output Modifications a) The FMCU must contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs. These control features must consist of a control unit mounted keypad. Any bypass or modification to the system must indicate a trouble condition on the FMCU. 07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 14 8) Resetting a) Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists. 9) Walk Test a) The FMCU must have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices must result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated in the history log, but no other outputs occur. 10) History Logging a) The control unit must have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events must be stored in a battery-protected memory and must remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control unit must not clear the memory. 11) Manual Access a) An operator at the control unit, having a proper access level, must have the capability to manually access the following information for each initiating device. b) Primary status. c) Device type. d) Present average value. e) Present sensitivity selected. f) Detector range (normal, dirty).
2.3 LOCAL OPERATING CONSOLES (LOC)
1. General
a. The LOC must consist of a remote microphone station incorporating a push-to-talk (PTT) hand-held microphone and system status indicators. The LOC must have the capability of being utilized to activate prerecorded messages. The unit must incorporate microphone override of any tone generation or recorded messages. The unit must be fully supervised from the FMCU. The housing for the LOC must not be lockable. The LOC must have public address capability with the provision of a separate microphone. The PA paging function must not override any alarm or notification functions. The PA microphone must be hand-held style. Hand-held microphones must be housed in a separate protective cabinet. The cabinet must be accessible without the use of a key. The location of the microphones must be approved by the designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE). Activation of the PA microphone must not initiate activation of visual notification appliances or LED text displays. The PA paging function must not override any alarm or notification functions.
2. Multiple LOCs
a. When an installation has more than one LOC, the LOCs must be programmed to allow only one LOC to be available for paging or messaging at a time. Once one LOC becomes active, all other LOC's will have an indication that the system is busy (Amber Busy Light) and cannot be used at that time. This is to avoid two messages being given at the same time. It must be possible to override or lockout the LOC's from the FMCU.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 15 2.4 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS
A. Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice generators, and other hardware necessary for a complete, operational, textual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 must be housed in a remote FMCU, terminal cabinet, or in the FMCU. Individual amplifiers must be 100 watts maximum.
B. Operation
1. The system must automatically operate and control all building speakers and must operate only when the microphone is used to deliver live messages.
C. Construction
1. Amplifiers must utilize computer grade solid state components and must be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the system.
D. Inputs
1. Equip each system with separate inputs for the tone generator, digitalized voice driver and control unit mounted microphone Public Address Paging Function Microphone inputs must be of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input must be operational on any amplifier.
2.5 Tone Generator
A. The tone generator must produce a three-pulse temporal pattern and must be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitalized voice message, the microphone input, or the alarm silence mode as specified. The tone generator must be single channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay. The tone generator must be provided with securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to identify the specific tone it produces.
B. Protection Circuits
1. Each amplifier must be constantly supervised for any condition that could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any component must cause illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control unit, appropriate logging of the condition in the history log, and other actions for trouble conditions as specified.
2.6 MANUAL STATIONS
A. Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, double-action, addressable manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations must be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted. Stations must be finished in red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a key must be required to reset the station.
2.7 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Spot Type Detectors 07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 16 1. Provide addressable photoelectric smoke detectors as follows:
a. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detectors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 268. Smoke detectors must be listed for use with the FMCU. b. Provide self-restoring type detectors that do not require any readjustment after actuation at the FMCU to restore them to normal operation. The detector must have a visual indicator to show actuation. c. Vibration must have no effect on the detector's operation. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen must not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber. d. Provide twist lock bases with screw terminals for each conductor. The detectors must maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs. e. The detector address must identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its sensitivity setting]. Detectors must be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.
B. Duct Smoke Detectors
1. Duct-mounted addressable photoelectric smoke detectors must consist of a smoke detector, as specified in paragraph Spot Type Detectors, mounted in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes. Detector circuitry must be mounted in a metallic or plastic enclosure exterior to the duct. It is not permitted to cut the duct insulation to install the duct detector directly on the duct. Detectors must be listed for operation over the complete range of air velocities, temperature and humidity expected at the detector when the air-handling system is operating. Detectors must be powered from the FMCU.
a. Sampling tubes must run the full width of the duct. The duct detector package must conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL 268A, and must be listed for use in air-handling systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass must be controlled from the FMCU. b. Lights to indicate the operation and alarm condition must be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place. Remote indicators must be provided where required by NFPA 72. Remote indicators as well as the affected fan units must be properly identified in etched plastic placards. c. Detectors must provide for control of auxiliary contacts that provide control, interlock, and shutdown functions specified in Section 23 09 23. Auxiliary contacts provide for this function must be located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit or appliance. The auxiliary contacts must be supplied by the fire alarm system manufacturer to ensure complete system compatibility.
2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES
A. The initiating device being monitored must be configured as a Class "B" initiating device circuits. The module must be listed as compatible with the control unit. The module must provide address setting means compatible with the control unit's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module must contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Pull stations with a monitor module in a common backbox are not required to have an LED. Modules must be listed for the environmental conditions in which they will be installed.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 17 2.9 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULES
A. The control module must be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact form C) for interfacing the control unit with other systems, and to control door holders or initiate elevator fire service. The module must be listed as compatible with the control unit. The indicating device or the external load being controlled must be configured as Class B notification appliance circuits. The system must be capable of supervising, audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module must have both an input and output address. The supervision must detect a short on the supervised circuit and must prevent power from being applied to the circuit. The control model must provide address setting means compatible with the control unit's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. The control module must contain an integral LED that flashes each time the control module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Control Modules must be listed for the environmental conditions in which they will be installed.
2.10 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Audible Notification Appliances
1. Audible appliances must conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464. Appliances must be connected into notification appliance circuits. Surface mounted audible appliances must be painted red or white. Recessed audible appliances must be installed with a grill that is painted red or white
B. Speakers
1. Speakers must conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1480. Speakers must have six different sound output levels and operate with audio line input levels of 70.7 VRMs and 25 VRMs, by means of selectable tap settings. Interior speaker tap settings must include taps of 1/4, 1/2, 1, and 2 watt, at a minimum. Exterior speakers must also be multi- tapped with no more than 15 watt maximum setting. Speakers must incorporate a high efficiency speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of 400 Hz to 4,000 Hz, and must have a sealed back construction. Speakers must be capable of installation on standard 4-inch square electrical boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single unit. All inputs must be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring via the FMCU. 2. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of 16 gage or molded high impact plastic and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete installation. Fabrication marks and holes must be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance for each plate. Each plate must be primed and painted. 3. Speakers must utilize screw terminals for termination of all field wiring.
C. Visual Notification Appliances
1. Visual notification appliances must conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1638, UL 1971 and conform to the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA). Visual Notification Appliances must have clear high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, or light emitting diode (LED) and be marked "Alert" in letters of contrasting color. The light pattern must be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate must be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 15 candela based on the UL 1971 test.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 18 D. Textual Display Signs
1. Textual display signs must be LCD flat panel and must not exceed 16 inches long by 6 inches high by 3 inches deep with a height necessary to meet the requirements of NFPA 72).The text display must spell out the word "EVACUATE" or "ANNOUNCEMENT" and the remainder of the emergency instructions ]as appropriate. The design of text display must be such that it cannot be read when not illuminated. 2. LCD scrolling text displays must meet the following requirements at a minimum:
a. Two lines of information for high priority messaging. b. Minimum of 20 characters per line (40 total) displayed. c. Text must be no less than height requirements and color/contrast requirements of NFPA 72. d. 32K character memory. e. Display must be wall or ceiling mounted. f. Mounting brackets for a convenient wall/cubicle mount. g. The system must interface with the textual display sign control panel to activate the proper message.
2.11 ELECTRIC POWER
A. Primary Power
1. Power must be 120 VAC 60 Hz service for the FMCU from the AC service to the building in accordance with NFPA 72.
B. SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY
1. Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure. Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power must be automatic and must not cause transmission of a false alarm. 2. Batteries
a. Provide sealed, maintenance-free, gel cell batteries as the source for emergency power to the FMCU. Batteries must contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system must be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power. b. Capacity 1) Battery size must be the greater of the following two capacities. This capacity applies to every control unit associated with this system, including supplemental notification appliance circuit panels, auxiliary power supply panels, fire alarm transmitters, and Base-wide mass notification transceivers. When determining the required capacity under alarm condition, visual notification appliances must include both textual and non-textual type appliances. 2) Sufficient capacity to operate the fire alarm system under supervisory and trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal devices for 48 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 15 minutes. 3) Sufficient capacity to operate the mass notification for 60 minutes after loss of AC power.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 19 c. Battery Power Calculations 1) Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements for the criteria noted in the paragraph "Capacity" above. a) Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm and supervisory power requirements. Include ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each control unit component, and compliance with UL 864. b) Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm and supervisory power requirements. Submit ampere-hour requirements for each system component with the calculations. c) Provide voltage drop calculations to indicate that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all components. Calculations must be performed using the minimum rated voltage of each component. 2) For battery calculations assume a starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified alarm time. Using 20.4 VDC as starting voltage, perform a voltage drop calculation for circuits containing device and/or appliances remote from the power sources.
3. Battery Chargers
a. Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery charger. The charger must be capable of providing 120 percent of the connected system load and must maintain the batteries at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged (20.4 Volts dc), the charger must recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours after a single discharge cycle as described in paragraph CAPACITY above. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided.
2.12 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Surge protective devices must be provided to suppress all voltage transients which might damage fire alarm control unit components. Systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment must be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links, must have surge protection circuits installed at each end. The surge protective device must wire in series to the power supply of the protected equipment with screw terminations. Line voltage surge arrestor must be installed directly adjacent to the power panel where the FMCU breaker is located.
1. Surge protective devices for nominal 120 VAC must be UL 1449 listed with a maximum 500 volt suppression level and have a maximum response time of 5 nanoseconds. The surge protective device must also meet IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2 category B tests for surge capacity. The surge protective device must feature multi-stage construction and be provided with a long-life indicator lamp (either light emitting diode or neon) which extinguishes upon failure of protected components. Any unit fusing must be externally accessible.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 20 2. Surge protective devices for nominal 24 VAC, fire alarm telephone dialer, or ethernet connection must be UL 497B listed, meet IEEE C62.41.1 and have a maximum response time of 1-nanosecond. The surge protective device must feature multi-stage construction and be self-resetting. The surge protective device must be a base and plug style. The base assembly must have screw terminals for fire alarm wiring. The base assembly must accept "plug-in" surge protective module. 3. All surge protective devices (SPD) must be the standard product of a single manufacturer and be equal or better than the following:
a. For 120 VAC nominal line voltage: UL 1449 and UL 1283 listed, series connected 120 VAC, 20A rated, surge protective device in a NEMA 4x enclosure. Minimum 50,000 amp surge current rating with EMI/RFI filtering and a dry contact circuit for remote monitoring of surge protection status. b. For 24-volt nominal line voltage: UL 497B listed, series connected low voltage, 24- volt, 5A rated, loop circuit protector, base and replaceable module. c. For alarm telephone dialers: UL 497A listed, series connected, 130-volt, 150 mA rated with self-resetting fuse, dialer circuit protector with modular plug and play. d. For IP-DACTS: UL 497B listed, series connected, 6.4-volt, 1.5A rated with 20 kA/pair surge current, data network protector with modular plug and play.
2.13 WIRING
A. Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 with the additions and modifications specified herein.
B. Alarm Wiring
1. IDC and SLC wiring must be solid copper cable in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring must be No. 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Visual notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible alarm appliances, must be copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Speaker circuits must be copper No. 16 AWG size twisted and shielded conductors at a minimum. Wire size must be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC must not operate at less than the listed voltages for the detectors and/or appliances. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, must be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation. Acceptable power- limited cables are FPL, FPLR or FPLP as appropriate with red colored covering. Nonpower-limited cables must comply with NFPA 70.
2.14 INTERFACE TO THE BASE-WIDE MASS NOTIFICATION NETWORK
A. Radio
1. The mass notification transceiver must be bi-direction and meet all the requirements of paragraph, RADIO TRANSMITTER AND INTERFACE PANELS as specified in this Specification Section. The transceiver utilized in the mass notification system must be capable of the following:
a. Communication with the central control/monitoring system to provide supervision of communication link and status changes are reported by automatic and manual poll/reply/acknowledge routines. b. All monitored points/status changes are transmitted immediately and at programmed intervals until acknowledged by the central control/monitoring system.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 21 c. Each transceiver must transmits a unique identity code as part of all messages; the code is set by the user at the transceiver. d. There shall not be relays between the fire alarm panel and the radio system. Fire alarm panel shall have Point to Point capability through the radio System.
2.15 AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM TRANSMITTERS
A. Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels
1. Transmitters must be compatible with proprietary supervising station receiving equipment. Each radio alarm transmitter must be the manufacturer's recognized commercial product, completely assembled, wired, factory tested, and delivered ready for installation and operation. Transmitters must be provided in accordance with applicable portions of NFPA 72, Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 90 and Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 15. Transmitter electronics module must be contained within the physical housing as an integral, removable assembly. The transmitter must be fully compatible with this equipment. At the contractors option, and if listed, the transmitter may be housed in the same control unit as the FMCU. The transmitter must be narrowband radio, with FCC certification for narrowband operation and meets the requirements of the NTIA (National Telecommunications and Information Administration) Manual of Regulations and Procedures for Federal Frequency Management. 2. Operation
a. Operate each transmitter from 120-volt ac power. In the event of 120-volt ac power loss, the transmitter must automatically switch to battery operation. Switchover must be accomplished with no interruption of protective service, and must automatically transmit a trouble message. Upon restoration of ac power, transfer back to normal ac power supply must also be automatic.
3. Battery Power
a. Transmitter standby battery capacity must provide sufficient power to operate the transmitter in a normal standby status for a minimum of 72 hours and be capable of transmitting alarms during that period.
4. Transmitter Housing
a. Use NEMA Type 1 for housing. The housing must contain a lock that is keyed. Radio alarm transmitter housing must be factory painted with a suitable priming coat and not less than two coats of a hard, durable weatherproof enamel.
5. Antenna 6. Antenna must be [omnidirectional, coaxial, halfwave dipole antennas for radio alarm transmitters with a driving point impedance to match transmitter output. The antenna and antenna mounts must be corrosion resistant and designed to withstand wind velocities of 100 mph. Do not mount antennas to any portion of the building roofing system. Protect the antenna from physical damage.
B. Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station
1. The following signals must be sent to the base receiving station:
a. Sprinkler waterflow b. Manual pull stations 07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 22 c. Smoke detectors d. Duct smoke detectors e. Sprinkler valve supervision
2.16 SYSTEM MONITORING
A. Valves
1. Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system, including automatic sprinkler control valves, sprinkler service entrance valve, isolating valves for pressure type waterflow or supervision switches, and valves at backflow preventers, whether supplied under this contract or existing, must be electrically monitored to ensure its proper position. Provide each tamper switch with a separate address.
B. High/Low Nitrogen Supervisory Switches
1. Provide monitoring of high and low supervisory nitrogen for dry pipe system. Each air supervisory switch must have a separate address. Switches must be listed extinguishing system attachments. The device must contain double pole, double throw contacts. Operation of the switch must cause a supervisory signal to be transmitted to the FMCU when nitrogen pressure in the system monitored sprinkler system increases more than 5 psi above the normal system pressure or drops halfway from the normal pressure to the tripping point.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 VERIFYING ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Before commencing work, examine all adjoining work on which the contractor's work is in any way dependent for perfect workmanship according to the intent of this specification section, and report to the Contracting Officer's Representative any condition which prevents performance of first class work. No "waiver of responsibility" for incomplete, inadequate or defective adjoining work will be considered unless notice has been filed before submittal of a proposal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit (FMCU)
1. Locate the FMCU [where indicated on the drawings with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or center the cabinet at 5 feet, whichever is lower. Conductor terminations must be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection must be permanently mounted in the FMCU. Locate the document storage cabinet adjacent to the FMCU unless the Contracting Officer directs otherwise.
B. Battery Cabinets
1. When batteries will not fit in the FMCU, locate battery cabinets below or adjacent to the FMCU. Battery cabinets must be installed at an accessible location when standing at floor level. Battery cabinets must not be installed lower than 12 inches above finished floor, measured to the bottom of the cabinet, nor higher than 36 inches above the floor, measured to the top of the cabinet. Installing batteries above drop ceilings or in inaccessible locations is prohibited. Battery cabinets must be large enough to accommodate batteries and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of control units as well as field wiring. The 07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 23 cabinet must be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions. The cabinet must be identified by an engraved phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate must indicate the control unit(s) the batteries power and must not be less than 1-inch high.
C. Manual Stations
1. Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated on the drawings. Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally. Manual stations must be mounted at 42 inches measured to the operating handle.
D. Notification Appliances
1. Locate notification appliance devices as required by NFPA 72 and where indicated and to meet the intelligibility requirements. Where more than two visual notification appliances are located in the same room or corridor or field of view, provide synchronized operation. Devices must use screw terminals for all field wiring. 2. Audible and visual notification appliances mounted on the exterior of the building, within unconditioned spaces, or in the vicinity of showers must be listed weatherproof appliances installed on weatherproof backboxes. 3. Speakers must not be located in close proximity to the FMCU or LOC so as to cause feedback when the microphone is in use.
E. Smoke Detectors
1. Locate detectors as required by NFPA 72 and their listing and as indicated on the drawings on a 4-inch mounting box. Smoke detectors are permitted to be on the wall no lower than 12 inches from the ceiling with no minimum distance from the ceiling. Intall smoke detectors no closer than 3 feet from air handling supply diffusers. Detectors installed in acoustical ceiling tiles must be centered in the tiles plus or minus 2 inches.
F. LCD REMOTE Annunciator
1. Locate the LCD annunciator as shown on the drawings. Mount the annunciator, with the top 6 feet above the finished floor or center the annunciator at 5 feet, whichever is lower.
G. Local Operating Console (LOC)
1. Locate the LOC(s) as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated. Mount the console so that the top message button and microphone is no higher than 4 feet above the floor and the bottom (lowest) message button and microphone is at least 3 feet above the finished floor.
H. Ceiling Bridges
1. Provide ceiling bridges for ceiling-mounted appliances. Ceiling bridges must be as recommended/required by the manufacturer of the ceiling-mounted notification appliance.
3.3 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING
A. Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 24 1. Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box must be connected to screw-type terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. The use of wire nuts, crimp connections, or similar devices is prohibited. Wiring to conform with NFPA 70. 2. Indicate the following in the wiring diagrams:
a. Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system, including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams must show connections from field devices to the FMCU and remote fire alarm/mass notification control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals. b. Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a color code schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing the locations of devices and equipment.
B. Terminal Cabinets
1. Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser, on each floor at each riser, and where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size must be appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. Conductor terminations must be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection must be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet. Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches. Only screw-type terminals are permitted. Provide an identification label, that displays "FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET" with 2-inch lettering, on the front of the terminal cabinet.
C. Alarm Wiring
1. Voltages must not be mixed in any junction box, housing or device, except those containing power supplies and control relays. 2. Utilize shielded wiring where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, ground the shield at only one point, in or adjacent to the FMCU. 3. Pigtail or T-tap connections to signal line circuits, initiating device circuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notification appliance circuits are prohibited. 4. Color coding is required for circuits and must be maintained throughout the circuit. Conductors used for the same functions must be similarly color coded. Conform wiring to NFPA 70. 5. Pull all conductors splice free. The use of wire nuts, crimped connectors, or twisting of conductors is prohibited. Where splices are unavoidable, the location of the junction box or pull box where they occur must be identified on the as-built drawings. The number and location of splices must be subject to approval by the Designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE).
D. Back Boxes and Conduit
1. In addition to the requirements of Section 26 20 00, provide all wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit unless specifically indicated otherwise. Minimum conduit size must be 3/4-inch in diameter. Do not use electrical non-metallic tubing (ENT) or flexible non-metallic tubing and associated fittings. 2. Galvanized rigid steel (GRS) conduit must be utilized where exposed to weather, where subject to physical damage, and where exposed on exterior of buildings. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) may be used in lieu of GRS as allowed by NFPA 70.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 25 3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) is permitted above suspended ceilings or exposed where not subject to physical damage. Do not use EMT underground, encased in concrete, mortar, or grout, in hazardous locations, where exposed to physical damage, outdoors or in fire pump rooms. Use die-cast compression connectors. 4. For rigid metallic conduit (RMC), only threaded type fitting are permitted for wet or damp locations. 5. Flexible metal conduit is permitted for initiating device circuits 6 feet in length or less. Flexible metal conduit is prohibited for notification appliance circuits and signaling line circuits. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit in damp and wet locations. 6. Schedule 40 (minimum) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) is permitted where conduit is routed underground or underground below floor slabs. Convert non-metallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80, to plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before turning up through floor slab. 7. Exterior wall penetrations must be weathertight. Conduit must be sealed to prevent the infiltration of moisture.
E. Conductor Terminations
1. Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FMCU and the LOC must be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable must have a shrink- wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FMCU, and remote FMCU must contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing must be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, control unit, or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment.
3.4 CONNECTION OF NEW SYSTEM
A. The following new system connections must be made during the last phase of construction, at the beginning of the pre-Government tests. New system connections must include:
1. Connection of new system transmitter to existing installation fire reporting system.
B. Once this connections is made, system must be left energized. Report immediately to the Contracting Officer, coordination and field problems resulting from the connection of the above components.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs, fire-rated walls, partitions with fire-rated doors, corridor walls, and vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
3.6 PAINTING
A. In unfinished areas (including areas above drop ceilings), paint all exposed electrical conduit (serving fire alarm equipment), fire alarm conduit, surface metal raceway, junction boxes and covers red. In lieu of painting conduit, the contractor may utilize red conduit with a factory applied finish.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 26 B. In finished areas, paint exposed electrical conduit (serving fire alarm equipment), fire alarm conduit, surface metal raceways, junction boxes, and electrical boxes to match adjacent finishes. The inside cover of the junction box must be identified as "Fire Alarm" and the conduit must have painted red bands 3/4-inch wide at 10-foot centers and at each side of a floor, wall, or ceiling penetration. All wires shall be clearly identified for bell circuit and/or speaker/audio for MNS.
C. Painting must comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
D. The last device installed must have an engraved sign stating the value and location of the end of line resistor.
E. On all false ceiling grids the cross "T"s will be marked with a RED dot indicating the location of fire 'J' boxes.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Submit detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by the NICET Level III or IV Fire Alarm Technician, and the representative of the installing company, 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures must list all components of the installed system such as initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface equipment, and surge protective devices. Test procedures must include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms must be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data; similar to the forma in NFPA 72 and NFPA 4.) The test procedures and accompanying test data forms must be used for the pre-Government testing and the Government testing. The test data forms must record the test results and must:
1. Identify the NFPA Class of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC), and Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Voice Notification System Circuits (NAC Audio), and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). 2. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be performed on each component, and describe how these tests must be performed. 3. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test location, and alphanumeric identity. 4. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test (including equipment necessary for smoke detector testing. The use of magnets is not permitted. 5. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.
B. Pre-Government Testing
1. Verification of Compliant Installation
a. Conduct inspections and tests to ensure that devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests must meet the requirements of paragraph entitled "Minimum System Tests" as required by NFPA 72. The contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment must be in attendance at the pre-Government testing to make necessary adjustments. After inspection and testing is complete, provide a signed Verification of Compliant Installation letter by the QFPE that the installation is complete, compliant with the specification and fully operable. The
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 27 letter must include the names and titles of the witnesses to the pre-Government tests. Provide all completion documentation as required by NFPA 72 including all referenced annex sections and the test reports noted below. 1) NFPA 72 Record of Completion. 2) NFPA 72 Record of Inspection and Testing. 3) Fire Alarm and Emergency Communication System Inspection and Testing Form. 4) Audibility test results with marked-up test floor plans. 5) Intelligibility test results with marked-up floor plans. 6) Documentation that all tests identified in the paragraph "Minimum System Tests" are complete.
b. Request for Government Final Test 1) When the verification of compliant installation has been completed, submit a formal request for Government final test to the Designated Fire Protection Engineer (DFPE) Government final testing will not be scheduled until the DFPE has received copies of the request for Government final testing and Verification of Compliant Installation letter with all required reports. Government final testing will not be performed until after the connections to the installation-wide fire reporting system and the installation-wide mass notification system have been completed and tested to confirm communications are fully functional. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the requested test date.
C. Correction of Deficiencies
1. If equipment was found to be defective or non-compliant with contract requirements, perform corrective actions and repeat the tests. Tests must be conducted and repeated if necessary until the system has been demonstrated to comply with all contract requirements.
D. Government Final Tests
1. The tests must be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the DFPE. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. The following must be provided at the job site for Government Final Testing:
a. The manufacturer's technical representative. b. The contractor's Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE). c. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed. d. Loop resistance test results. e. Complete program printout including input/output addresses. f. Copy of pre-Government Test Certificate, test procedures and completed test data forms. g. Audibility test results with marked-up floor plans. h. Intelligibility test results with marked-up floor plans.
2. Government Final Tests will be witnessed by the Designated Fire Protection Engineer and 3. Qualified Fire Protection Engineer (QFPE). At this time, any and all required tests noted in the paragraph "Minimum System Tests" must be repeated at their discretion.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 28 3.8 MINIMUM SYSTEM TESTS
A. System Tests
1. Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72. The required tests are as follows:
a. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests must be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final Government test. b. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests must be accomplished at the pre-Government test with results available at the final system test. c. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's O&M manual. d. Test each initiating device and notification appliance and circuit for proper operation and response at the control unit. Smoke detectors must be tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke detectors must comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 except disconnect at least 20 percent of devices. If there is a failure at these devices, then supervision must be tested at each device. e. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's O&M manual. f. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified. g. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified. h. Visually inspect wiring. i. Test the battery charger and batteries. j. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FMCU. Hard copy records of the software must be provided to the Contracting Officer. k. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate. l. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits. m. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive. n. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke detectors during tests to minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of smoke detectors must be conducted using real smoke or the use of canned smoke which is permitted. o. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire length) on each notification appliance circuit. p. Verify the documentation cabinet is installed and contains all as-built shop drawings, product data sheets, design calculations, site-specific software data package, and all documentation required by paragraph titled "Test Reports".
B. Audibility Tests
1. Sound pressure levels from audible notification appliances must be a minimum of 15 dBa over ambient with a maximum of 110 dBa in any occupiable area. The provisions for audible notification (audibility and intelligibility) must be met with doors, fire shutters, movable partitions, and similar devices closed.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 29 C. Intelligibility Tests
1. Intelligibility testing of the System must be accomplished in accordance with NFPA 72 for Voice Evacuation Systems, and ASA S3.2. Following are the specific requirements for intelligibility tests:
a. Intelligibility Requirements: Verify intelligibility by measurement after installation. b. Ensure that a CIS value greater than the required minimum value is provided in each area where building occupants typically could be found. The minimum required value for CIS is .8. Rounding of values is permitted. c. Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces (such as metal or concrete) that are found to cause excessive sound reflections may be permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum required value if approved by the DFPE, and if building occupants in these areas can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 33 feet to find a location with at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area. d. Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally present are permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum required value if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 50 feet to a location with at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area. e. Take measurements near the head level applicable for most personnel in the space under normal conditions (e.g., standing, sitting, sleeping, as appropriate). f. The distance the occupant must walk to the location meeting the minimum required CIS value must be measured on the floor or other walking surface as follows: 1) Along the centerline of the natural path of travel, starting from any point subject to occupancy with less than the minimum required CIS value. 2) Curving around any corners or obstructions, with a 12 inches clearance there from. 3) Terminating directly below the location where the minimum required CIS value has been obtained.
g. Use commercially available test instrumentation to measure intelligibility as specified by NFPA 72 as applicable. Use the mean value of at least three readings to compute the intelligibility score at each test location.
3.9 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M manuals must be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance. The drawings must show the system as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings must be submitted within two weeks after the final Government test of the system. At least one set of as-built (marked-up) drawings must be provided at the time of, or prior to the Final Government Test.
1. Furnish one set of CDs or DVDs containing software back-up and CAD based drawings in latest version of AutoCAD, DXF and portable document formats of as-built drawings and schematics. 2. Include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment, both factory and field wired. 3. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of devices and equipment. 4. Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 30 3.10 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES
A. Instructor
1. Provide the services of an instructor, who has received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the operation, inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor must train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire alarm system. The instructor must be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor must be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work. Submit the instructors information and qualifications including the training history.
B. Required Instruction Time
1. Provide 8 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction must be given during regular working hours on such dates and times selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer. The training must allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and/or fire department responses.
C. Technical Training
1. Equipment manufacturer or a factory representative must provide 1 days of on site and 5 days of technical training to the Government at the manufacturing facility. Training must allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. Factory training must occur within 6 months of system acceptance.
D. Technical Training Manual
1. Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions, maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The operations training must familiarize designated government personnel with proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course must provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to the system.
3.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Repair Service/Replacement Parts
1. Repair services and replacement parts for the system must be available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting Officer. During the warranty period, the service technician must be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs must be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site. 2. During the warranty period, the installing fire alarm contractor is responsible for conducting all required testing and maintenance in accordance with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 72 and the system manufacturer. Installing fire alarm contractor is NOT responsible for any damage resulting from abuse, misuse, or neglect of equipment by the end user.
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 31 B. Spare Parts
1. Spare parts furnished must be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts must be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts must be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the Government testing and must be accompanied by an inventory list.
C. Document Storage Cabinet
1. Upon completion of the project, but prior to project close-out, place in the document storage cabinet copies of the following record documentation:
a. As-built shop drawings b. Product data sheets c. Design calculations d. Site-specific software data package e. All documentation required by SD-06.
END OF SECTION 283900
07/15/21 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESSABLE Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 283900 - 32 FT. IRWIN EXPRESS
MECHANICAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS DIVISION 33
MECHANICAL INDEX
33 50 00 GASOLINE DISPENSING AND UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK SYSTEMS
07/15/21 Ft. Irwin Express (20014) MECHANICAL INDEX
SECTION 335000 - GASOLINE DISPENSING & UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide a complete gasoline fueling system, including but not limited to underground storage tanks, submersible turbine pumps, electrical wiring, electronic control/monitoring/leak detection system, Stage I and Stage II enhanced vapor recovery systems, vent lines, fill risers, product piping, fittings, valves, caps, unions, and necessary appurtenances, as specified, shown on the drawings, and as required for a complete and operating system. The complete fueling system shall include EXCHANGE-furnished, Contractor-installed gasoline dispensers, and electrical controls (POS) system. Provide a complete continuously monitored secondary containment system for tanks, tank sumps, product piping, dispenser sumps, transitions sumps, stage I and II vapor recovery piping, vent/vapor containment sumps and clean air separator. System shall also include complete ISD system for vapor recovery system.
B. The complete operational gasoline dispensing system must be successfully tested, certified, and registered, and shall have all necessary permits to conduct sales of gasoline. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required testing, certifications, and registrations. The complete operational gasoline dispensing system shall be installed and certified in strict conformance with the current California Environmental Protection Agency, Air Resources Board (ARB) approved executive Orders for both stage I and Stage II vapor recovery including ISD. Installation shall be in complete conformance with the Mojave Desert Air Quality Management District and the San Bernardino County Environmental Health District Requirements.
C. Provide complete double-wall product piping system, including secondary containment and accessories as specified, shown on the drawings, and as required to prevent the possibility of contamination of air, soil, water, or groundwater.
D. Install EXCHANGE-furnished electronic gasoline dispensing system including dispensers, Data Distribution Cabinet and AE Isolation Board furnished by EXCHANGE and as required for a complete and operating system.
E. Provide submersible turbine fuel pumps including pump riser pipe as specified, shown on the drawings, and required for a complete and operating installation. Provide check valves, ball valves, metal flex connectors and shut-off (isolation) valves as required.
F. Provide fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) double-wall underground fuel storage tanks including deadmen, as recommended by the tank manufacturer, and sealed double wall turbine pump enclosures as specified, shown on the drawings, and required for a complete and operating system.
G. Provide tank monitoring/inventory control/release detection system including console with alarm capability, automatic tank gauging equipment, electronic line leak detectors, vapor flow meter and vapor sensors for all vapor recovery piping. Provide complete continuously monitored vacuum assisted secondary containment monitoring system
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 1 (including tank, tank sumps, vapor/vent piping, product piping, dispenser sumps and transition sumps), an overfill alarm with acknowledgement switch, and accessories as specified, shown on the drawings, and required for a complete and operating system.
H. Provide the excavation, trenching, and backfilling required for installation of the fuel system.
I. Contractor shall prepare and pay for all required State, County, and Local permits, applications and registrations or other documents required for the installation and operation of gasoline storage and dispensing facilities. Coordination and preparation of submission documents must be routed through the Post or Base Environmental Office.
J. Coordinate installation construction with applicable sections within Division 26 - Electrical work.
K. Related work specified elsewhere (as applicable to the project):
1. Utility Excavating - Section 02219. 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300. 3. Mechanical Work - Division 23. 4. Electrical work - Division 26.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following codes and standards (use the most recent version):
1. NFPA No. 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 2. NFPA No. 30A, Automotive and Marine Service Station Code. 3. NFPA No. 70, National Electrical Code 4. NFPA No. 329, Handling Underground Release of Flammable and Combustible Liquids 5. EPA 40 CFR Part 280, Technical Standards and Corrective Action Requirements for Contracting Officers and Operators of Underground Storage. 6. OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910.106, Flammable and Combustible Liquids. 7. ASTM D2310, Latest standard Classification for Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin Pipe. 8. ASTM D2517, Latest standard Specification for Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 9. ASTM D2996, Latest standard Specification for Filament-Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe. 10. ASTM D4021, Latest standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Underground Petroleum Storage Tanks. 11. UL 79, Power-Operated Pumps for Petroleum Product Dispensing Systems. 12. UL 87, Power-Operated Dispensing Devices for Petroleum Products. 13. UL 567, Pipe Connections for Flammable and Combustible Liquids and LP-Gas. 14. UL 842, Valves for Flammable Fluids. 15. UL 860, Pipe Unions for Flammable and Combustible Fluids and Fire Protection Service. 16. UL 1238, Control Equipment for Use with Flammable Liquid Dispensing Devices. 17. UL 1316, Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Underground Storage Tanks for
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 2 Petroleum Products. 18. API 1615 (2011) Installation of Underground Petroleum Storage Systems. 19. API 1628 (1996) A Guide to the Assessment and Remediation of Underground Petroleum Releases (if a release is expected). 20. Most Recent California Air Resources Board (CARB) Executive Orders applicable to system. 21. Most Recent California Air Resources Board (CARB) Test Procedures applicable to system. 22. PEI RP 100-20 Recommended Practices for Installation of Underground Liquid Storage Systems. 23. PEI RP 300-19 Recommended Practices for Installation and Testing of Vapor Recovery Systems at Vehicle Fueling Sites. 24. PEI RP 400-18 Recommended Procedure for Testing Electrical Continuity of Fuel- Dispensing 25. All other applicable ASTM and UL standards. 26. Manufacturer’s Instructions 27. All applicable EPA requirements relating to release detection, spill and overfill prevention, and corrosion protection. 28. All other applicable Local, County, State, and Federal codes, standards, licensing and registration requirements. 29. UL 917, UL Listed Non-Metal Pipe. 30. California State Water Resource Control Board.
B. Contractor Experience and Licensing:
1. Contractor shall certify that he (or his installation sub-contractor) has at least four years experience installing retail underground gasoline storage tanks and dispensing equipment and is certified by the State in which the project is to be constructed. He shall also assure that the designed gasoline fuel system shall be installed by skilled workmen, licensed by the State in which the project is constructed (if required by State regulations) and certified by the equipment manufacturers. Contractor’s installer and electrician shall have prior experience with fuel systems and related equipment. As evidence of this experience, a list of the most recent three fuel system installations performed by this contractor with complete descriptions of the location, the project name, and the equipment installed, and date of project shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer before construction begins. At least one of these projects must have been completed in the state of California and include a Veeder-Root ISD system with Healy vacuum assist. Contracting Officer, or the AE should verify the potentially successful offer’s reference regarding completion of a retail gasoline system with Veeder-Root ISD prior to award. 2. Contractor Certification of Licensing and Experience. Contractor shall certify that he (or his installation subcontractor) is a certified installer and/or Authorized Service Contractor for the following equipment manufacturers, as applicable to the system being installed:
a. Dresser Wayne b. Veeder-Root c. Red Jacket d. OPW / Flexworks e. Xerxes
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 3 f. Smith Fibercast g. Containment Solutions h. Phil-Tite
3. Contractor shall also certify that he (or his installation subcontractor) holds all necessary licenses for construction and installation required under this contract at the project location. These certifications shall be submitted in writing to the Contracting Officer before construction begins. 4. Contractor shall certify that the installation of the petroleum-system-related electrical components will be done by an experienced contractor or subcontractor. This contractor shall have fuel electrical system experience with systems like those installed under this contract. (Petroleum-system-related components are those essential to the legal operation of the petroleum storage, dispensing, leak detection, and emergency equipment. They include, but are not limited to dispensers, submersible pumps, pump controllers, leak detection equipment, vapor recovery systems, emergency shut-off switches, and all conduits related to these systems.) As evidence of this experience, a list of the most recent five fuel system installations performed by this contractor with complete descriptions of the location, the project name, and the equipment installed, and date of project shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer before construction begins. NOTE: It is preferred but not mandatory that the petroleum electrical subcontractor be a subcontractor to the petroleum system installer. If the petroleum electrical installer is a subcontractor of the petroleum systems installer described in 1, above, and worked on the projects submitted under that paragraph, contractor shall so certify, and no additional projects need be reported.
C. Detailed drawings of proposed departures due to actual field conditions or other causes shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for coordination of approval. The contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of materials and equipment without substantial alteration. Materials and equipment installed in the system shall be suitable for the pressures and temperatures expected to be encountered and suitable to the climate and environmental conditions of the location of the project.
D. Contractor's responsibilities under this quality assurance section include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Receipt and storage of all items of equipment in a location protected from theft, vandalism, inclement weather, or other damage. 2. Providing required interconnections to product pumps and emergency disconnect systems. 3. Construction of openings, depressions, and sleeves for mechanical and electrical piping and conduit as required. 4. Providing hardware and related items as required to assure that equipment components are properly mounted, securely anchored, adequately ventilated, or where required, are adequately sealed from vapors. 5. Verifying size of components to assure space required for dispensers, consoles and interconnecting devices does not exceed designated space available as indicated on drawings. 6. Determining if unusual conditions or circumstances exist at the site (or in the vicinity of the installation) which could damage the electronic components or
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 4 circuitry, or otherwise impair the proper function of the system, and incorporating, in such event, the necessary protective devices into the installation.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for the following in accordance with Section 01300 requirements:
1. Dispenser Sumps 2. Product piping and fittings 3. Pump Sumps 4. Spill Containers 5. Submersible turbine fuel pumps 6. Underground fuel storage tanks 7. Tank monitoring / inventory control / release detection system 8. Enhanced vapor recovery system to include ISD.
B. No work shall be performed without the shop drawing having been approved by Contracting Officer or his designated agent.
C. Contractor shall provide a proposed schedule of the phases of the work for the installation of the gasoline storage tanks, piping and dispensing systems.
Required Fuel System Documentation and Records
1. Checklist for the A/E and General Contractor final inspection requirements: (Provided by the contractor and must be on-site prior to beginning fuel dispensing operations) At least one set of these records should be given to the on-site Express Station manager before final inspection and kept on file for the life of the system. They should not need to be updated or changed unless the system is modified or has major repairs (except annual permit updates should be added). Other copies go to the EXCHANGE General Manager, the installation environmental office, and the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer.
1. ___ Notification of Construction Activities (EPA Form 7530 or State equivalent)
2. ___ UST registration/permit/certification for each tank (including any changes to registration)
3. ___ Other permits (such as Air Operating Permit)
4. ___ Installer Certification of the UST system
5. ___ As-built plans (or site map with layout of tanks and piping)
6. ___ Third Party Certifications of leak detection systems (equipment or methods)
7. ___ Documentation of corrosion protection, if part of system
8. ___ Manufacturer's manuals (owner's, operator's, and maintenance manuals) for all system components and equipment (including tanks, lines, leak detection components, dispensers, nozzles, etc.). CARB Executive Order for Stage I and II Vapor Recovery
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 5 System.
9. ___ Manufacturer's warranty documentation for all system components and equipment (including tanks, lines, leak detection components, dispensers, nozzles, etc.)
10. ___ Initial Compliance Test Records (if not included with Installer Certification listed above)
(a) ___ Tanks (b) ___ Lines (c ___ Stage I and II Vapor Recovery System. (d ___ Dispenser Calibration (e ___ ISD System installation and testing.
11. ___ Training Roster for O&M Training given to EXCHANGE associates.
12. ___ Fuel System Final Inspection Report
5. Digital photographs of main stages of tank installation and other construction activities, as shown below. Sufficient photographs to adequately document and represent the activity will be taken. Any problems encountered or authorized deviations from the drawings or specifications will be documented with appropriate photographs via the internet to the EXCHANGE Constructware website as soon as possible but no later than 5 business days prior to any scheduled EXCHANGE technical inspection (or 5 business days prior to the final inspection of documenting work done between the last EXCHANGE technical inspection by the EXCHANGE A-E inspection and the final inspection).
6. Four copies of chronological Installation Report of complete tank system installation construction documenting all major activities related to the installation of the underground storage tanks, piping, dispensing and release detection equipment, Stage II Vapor recovery system including ISD and stage I Vapor Recovery system shall be provided to EXCHANGE Contracting Officer. Contractor’s Installation Report shall include documentation of construction activities and photographs of the construction work in progress. Documentation of specific construction activities shall include, at a minimum the following.
D. Other underground fuel storage tank submittals shall include:
1. Contractor shall submit six copies of shop drawings for each tank of same size. Drawings shall include all critical dimensions and show locations of all fittings and accessories, i.e., manways, hold-down straps, etc. All shop drawings shall be submitted at the same time. 2. Contractor shall submit six copies of equipment information from manufacturer's catalog data, installation instructions and calibration charts. 3. Two conversion charts shall be left with the Facilities Manager upon the completion of construction. 4. Four copies of a chronological Installation Report of the complete tank system installation construction documenting all major activities related to the installation of the underground storage tanks, piping, dispensing and release
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 6 detection equipment and Stage II Vapor recovery system shall be provided to EXCHANGE Contracting Officer. Contractor’s Installation Report shall include documentation of construction activities and photographs of the construction work in progress. Documentation of specific construction activities shall include, at a minimum the following:
CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES DOCUMENTED BY REMARKS 1 Excavation of Tank Hole Photographs Report shall include measured dimensions Installation Report of the excavation and details about shoring and site conditions. 2 Final Tank Hole Excavation (with fabric liner as Photographs Report shall include final measured applicable under site specific conditions) Installation Report dimensions of the excavation and details about preparation for tank placement. 3 Delivery of the Underground Storage Tanks Shipping manifest Report shall note delivery condition of tanks 4 Air Test of Tanks Upon Delivery Statement of testing Air test must be conducted at 3-5 PSI. (Pre-Installation) protocol with results (air gauge must be equipped with a of air testing (signed by pressure relief valve set at 5 PSI), and must tank contractor) follow manufacturer’s procedures 5 Deadman Anchors or Slab Construction Photographs, Field notes Report shall note size and quantity of rebar in Installation Report used, as well as final measured dimensions of anchoring devices. Details of construction is not required if manufacturer supplier deadmen are used. 6 Placement of Tanks on Clean Backfill Photographs, Field notes Report shall note placement details to in Installation Report include conditions like wet-hole, caving, amount of backfill beneath the tanks, etc. 7 Tank Hole Excavation Backfilling Operations Photographs, Field notes Report shall indicate how manufacturer’s in Installation report recommended procedures were followed 8 Installing the Product Lines Photographs Follow piping manufacturer’s procedures 9 Installing the Vapor Recovery Lines Photographs Follow CARB and RP300 procedures 10 Installing the Tank Vent lines Photographs Ensure proper slope of vent lines 11 Air / Soap Testing of All Piping Photographs Field notes Air test must follow manufacturer’s (signed) procedures (air gauge must be equipped with a pressure relief valve set @ 60 PSIG) 12 Placement of Containment Sumps Photographs Follow sump manufacturer’s procedures 15 Backfilling the Pipe chase Photographs Document proper installation of piping 16 Installation of Dispensers Photographs 17 Purging of Product Piping of Air Field notes (signed) 18 Notification of System Testing to Regulators Copy of Notification 19 Calibration of Dispensers Field Notes (signed) Verify proper calibration tolerances 20 Flow Rate Determination Field Notes (signed) Verify flow rate not to exceed 10 GPM 21 Certification of Fueling System: Test Reports, copy of the Using an EPA third-party certified method Tank & Line Tightness Tests Performance Criteria for the Test
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 7 22 Certification of Vapor Recovery System: Test Reports Following all applicable CARB Test Stage I and Stage II including ISD Procedures 23 Certification of the Fueling Facility Operators Outline of Course (Training Documentation) Content & Rosters 24 Installer Certification of UST Installation Affidavit/Oath Signed EPA Form 7530 or State Form 25 Registration of Tank System Copy of Registration Signed EPA Form 7530 or State Form 26 Registration of Vapor Recovery System (as Copy of Registration Signed State Form required) 27 Warranty/Registration Paperwork for Equipment Copy of Warranty and Registration
E. Contractor shall submit six copies of catalog data of submersible turbine pumps along with proper pump selection, performance chart, and installation, operation and service manuals.
F. Contractor shall provide for approval the name of the testing company he will use to perform pressure testing of tanks and piping, and startup compliance testing of the Stage I and Stage II Enhanced Vapor Recovery system including ISD per manufacturers' instruction and as specified in this specification. Contractor-retained third-party testing company shall have a minimum of four years of experience in performing such tests for retail gasoline stations and shall be responsible for notifying EXCHANGE of the schedule for testing, following proper testing protocol, and prompt notification of test results.
1. EXCHANGE may retain another independent testing agency to observe and monitor the tanks and piping installation and testing performed by the contractor and his testing agency. EXCHANGE-retained testing agency shall have access to the site, work area, shop drawings and results of testing during the construction period. Any changes or comments recommended by EXCHANGE-retained agency must be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to implementation by the contractor. Any testing conducted by EXCHANGE-retained testing agency is separate and independent of the contractor’s requirements and SHALL NOT be considered a substitute for any tests required to be performed by contractor. The General Contractor’s site superintendent must be notified of any independent testing schedule so that the General Contractor may ensure his representative’s presence during any such test procedure. G. Per EXCHANGE direction, the AE has obtained the ATC (Authority to Construct) as required by the Mojave Desert Air Quality Management District for this project. Contractor shall follow this ATC requirement for equipment, installation, and testing where those differ from or are in addition to the applicable CARB order. Upon completion of installation, Contractor shall pay all fees associated with; schedule and prepare/submit all required documentation to responsible agency(s) for notification of readiness for system testing. Contractor shall pay all fees associated with; schedule and prepare/submit all required documentation to responsible agency(s) as necessary to obtain the PTO (Permit to Operate) for this project. Please refer to copy of the subject ATC inserted at the end of this specifications section.
H. Contractor shall provide six copies of an Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. This manual will describe all systems and equipment installed by the contractor, including but not limited to underground storage tanks, piping and distribution lines, tank monitoring and release detection systems, vapor recovery systems, dispensers, and alarms. O&M Manual will list the manufacturers (including addresses and telephone
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 8 numbers), make, model and serial numbers of all equipment and systems. Photocopies of equipment warranty registrations shall be included in the O&M Manual. The O&M Manual will be written in simple language and will give the operator information necessary to operate and maintain the system. Maintenance that is required but not normally performed by the operator will be so noted. The requirement for an O&M Manual may be met by compiling copies of materials provided by the manufacturers of the systems or equipment. However, if the manufacturer’s materials do not explain how the system or equipment works as installed, Contractor will provide necessary supplemental information.
I. Six copies of the release detection system operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided as follows:
1. The Express Station Manager. 2. The Local General Manager. 3. The Installation Environmental Office. 4. Three copies to the Contracting Officer for internal distribution.
J. Copies of all documents, permits, applications and registrations required State, County, and Local shall be submitted to the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer and the Post or Base Environmental Office in a report documenting details of the installation.
K. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE RECORD DRAWINGS OF COMPLETE FUELING SYSTEM TO EXCHANGE ENGINEER AND CONTRACTING OFFICER PRIOR TO TURNING OVER OF PROJECT.
1.04 UNATTENDED OPERATION
A. Contractor is on notice that the facility to be constructed may be used for 24-hour unattended self-service operation if customer service conditions warrant and all appropriate approvals are obtained.
B. Contractor will use best professional judgement to suggests any other items that may be required by law at the project site for unattended operation or that may facilitate safe and environmentally sound, unattended operation and should identify those items to the Contracting Officer as soon as they are known.
1.05 DRAWINGS
A. Due to the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The contractor shall carefully investigate the site and job conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange his work, accordingly, furnishing such fittings, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.
1.06 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Pipe openings shall be closed and protected with caps or plugs (not tape) during installation. Equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. Backfill material shall be kept clear of all trash and debris. Dispenser and tank sumps shall be closed or covered to prevent water and
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 9 construction debris from accumulating within. Underground storage tanks and piping system shall be protected by barricades and construction fencing. Upon completion of all work, the materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Belts, pulleys, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys and other rotating parts shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded.
1.07 WARRANTIES
A. Contractor shall warrant the work specified according to the terms of the General Provisions. In addition, upon acceptance of the gasoline dispensing system for beneficial use by EXCHANGE, he shall provide to the Contracting Officer the manufacturer's standard equipment warranty or warranties covering both parts and labor for a minimum period of one year. Warranty service shall be provided promptly upon request within 12 hours on weekdays and 24 hours on weekends. Contractor shall be responsible for the warranty of the equipment he furnished. Contractor is responsible for defects in installation of EXCHANGE-furnished equipment.
B. Fuel storage tanks shall carry a thirty-year warranty against failure from internal or external corrosion and from structural failure. Manufacturer’s installation checklist must be completed and submitted to the manufacturer by the Contractor to provide a valid warranty. A photocopy of this document shall be included in the O&M manual and be provided to the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Contractor-furnished materials and equipment shall be as specified and/or as shown on the drawings. Equipment shall be the product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address and catalog number on a durable plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent only will not be acceptable. Substitution of the specified equipment is acceptable upon review and approval by the Contracting Officer or his authorized agent. To obtain approval, Contractor shall make a written request to the Contracting Officer. Contractor’s request will include or attach all data and information available on the equipment including warranties, guarantees, and UL certifications (if applicable).
2.02 PIPING, FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES
A. All pipes, fittings, appurtenances, manways, accessories, and valves shall be provided by the Contractor after submittal to the Contracting Officer of shop drawings showing manufacturer and model number of each.
B. All-metal flex connectors shall be used in all dispenser containment sumps and be as shown in the drawings with all-metal tubes (no Teflon), hose ends, galvanized malleable iron nipples at both ends affixed with crimped fittings, maximum overall length 24".
C. Aboveground vent piping shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with 150 lb. malleable iron screw fittings and couplings. Joints shall be connected using appropriate
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 10 adhesive/sealant compatible with gasoline, alcohol-gasoline blended, and reformulated fuels. Vents shall be a minimum of 12 feet above finished grade or 60 inches above the building exterior wall. Vents shall be mounted (as shown on the drawings) to the building exterior wall or braced to stainless steel or galvanized steel pole which shall extend to 12 inches below the top of the vent. Vents shall be primed and painted with two coats of rust inhibiting paint in a color that has been approved by both EXCHANGE and the installation.
D. Underground vent and vapor recovery primary and secondary containment piping 2”, 3” and 4” in size shall be Underwriters Laboratory, Incorporated approved rigid fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe with primary and secondary clam shell fittings and adapters. Manufacturer for vent and vapor recovery piping is Smith Fibercast “Red Thread II”.
E. Provide buried warning tape or line markers for all underground piping to allow for verification of the piping location in the future. Fill piping and vapor recovery risers shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel piping. As a minimum, couplings and fittings should be 150-pound malleable iron. A thread sealant certified for petroleum service should be used for all fittings. Sealants certified for methanol and other fuels (for example, ethanol and MTBE blends) should be used when these substances are to be placed in the UST system. Projects being built where there are containment requirements for fill risers shall comply with that requirement.
F. Contractor shall provide Xerxes/OPW-Flexworks/Phil-Tite double wall tank sumps and manway covers as shown on the drawings. Each manway cover will be API color-coded with matching skirt, stabilizer kit and locking mechanism. Lifting tools will be supplied for each manway by contractor. An FRP ID plate will be provided by the manufacturer for each manway. The ID plates will specify the tank number, tank capacity, and product type. The manway cover assembly shall be as shown on the drawings.
2.03 DOUBLE-WALL PRODUCT PIPING AND SECONDARY CONTAINMENT SYSTEM
A. All underground product piping shall be 3 inch and 4-inch rigid FRP pipe over 2 inch and 3” rigid FRP with bonded clamshell fittings used for secondary containment manufactured by Smith Fibercast, Red Thread II.
B. The piping installation shall strictly follow the recommended installation practices described by the manufacturer. The secondary containment pipe shall contain product leaked from the product pipe and drain to the sealed pump manway enclosure for leak detection and recovery of the released product. Product piping shall be continuously monitored by a vacuum sensing system.
1. The primary piping shall be capable of successfully passing an air pressure test at sixty pounds per square inch after bleed back pressure stabilization, which shall be established by bringing the line pressure to sixty pounds per square inch for a minimum of three hours. During the pressurizing period, all fittings shall be observed for leaks by applying a soapy water solution. The secondary piping shall be capable of maintaining ten pounds per square inch for a one-hour period during integrity testing. 2. The contractor shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendation that after the primary piping has passed a 60 psig pressure test, the product line pressure
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 11 should be reduced and maintained at a pressure of 25 psig until all paving has been completed, with OPW pressure gauge assemblies in place on each line for daily observation and verification that the pipe is holding pressure. 3. Pressure gauge assemblies for testing shall be calibrated prior to use and be equipped with the proper pressure safety valve as recommended by piping manufacturer’s testing procedures.
C. Termination of product lines shall be within containment sumps with proper sealing of the ends to prevent water, liquid, and debris from entering the sumps.
D. All containment sumps shall be double wall with hydrostatic sensors monitoring the brine solution of the interstitial space and be capable of passing a hydrostatic water test to ensure that the sumps are product and vapor tight.
2.04 ELECTRONIC FUEL DISPENSING SYSTEM: EXCHANGE - FURNISHED/ CONTRACTOR - INSTALLED
A. EXCHANGE shall furnish multi-product, dual-hose type, blending dispensers that are vacuum assisted vapor ready to the contractor for installation. A Wayne data distribution box as well as an Allied Equipment isolation board shall be furnished by EXCHANGE to connect the dispensers as indicated on the drawings. The dispensers shall be delivered directly to the contractor on site. The contractor is responsible for receiving, verifying, storing, uncrating, and protecting the equipment. Contractor shall coordinate the delivery and installation dates with contracting officer in advance to meet the construction schedule.
B. EXCHANGE-furnished dispensers will be Dresser Wayne “Ovation” series three product, blending for Eight (8) dispensers not offering diesel and four products, blending for Two (2) dispensers offering diesel.
C. Dresser Wayne service representative under EXCHANGE equipment contract will review and assist the contractor during installation and will perform initial start-up of each dispenser. Actual installation of the dispenser is not the responsibility of this service representative. The general contractor is responsible for providing knowledgeable Dresser Wayne equipment installers as well as coordinating the assistance of the Dresser Wayne service representative.
2.05 SUBMERSIBLE TURBINE PUMPS
A. Pumps shall have an explosion-proof motor that is electrically compatible with the local power service and shall carry UL listing. Pumps shall have standard 4" NPT tank fitting. Upper assembly shall contain all functional elements, check valve, air eliminator, expansion relief valve, siphon nozzle and venturi, siphon check valve and pressure test screw. The entire assembly shall be removable. The pump shall have a thermal overcurrent overload protector with automatic reset. Capacitors and electric disconnect shall be accessible. Lower assembly shall consist of permanent split-phase capacitor motor, 25% glass-filled "Celcon" impeller and diffuser. Impeller shall be hydraulically balanced providing a positive and evenly distributed drive. The pumps shall be designed or equipped so that no part of the system shall be subjected to pressure above its allowable working pressure. Pumps shall be designed for Class 1, Group D atmosphere. Pump shall be cooled and lubricated by discharging the pumped fluid into the storage
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 12 tank regardless of dispensed quantity. An isolation valve (ball valve) shall be installed in an assembly connecting the pump to the product line to facilitate isolation of the product line during tightness testing. The contractor shall size the pumps for 8 to 10.0 gallons per minute flow rate at the nozzles. Turbines shall include required fittings as required for connection to vacuum sensing tube as required to provide vacuum source for piping secondary containment system. Pumps shall be 4”, 2 HP variable speed pumps. Pumps shall be powered /controlled through the pump panel which will also contain the pump starters and the dispenser hook isolation. The Pump panel and starters are not provided under division 33 5 000. Provide Red Jacket IQ Control box, (1) each for (2) manifolded regular unleaded turbine pumps for alternating operation. IQ Control box is to be installed inside or adjacent to pump panel. See electrical drawings for location, arrangement, and requirements of pump control panel.
B. Manufacturer of Pumps: Red Jacket. No other substitute pumps shall be allowed.
2.06 UNDERGROUND FUEL STORAGE TANKS - DOUBLE-WALL FRP
A. Loading Conditions: Tank shall meet the following design criteria:
1. External hydrostatic pressure: Fuel storage tanks shall be capable of withstanding a maximum 7 feet of over-burden over the top of the tank with the tank hole excavation fully flooded with a 5 to 1 safety factor against buckling. 2. Surface Loads: When installed according to manufacturer’s installation instructions, tank will withstand surface AASHTO H-20 axle loads. 3. Internal Load: Primary and secondary tanks shall withstand an air pressure test (not to exceed 5 PSIG) with 5 to 1 safety factor. 4. Tanks shall be designed to support accessory equipment such as automatic tank gauge, drop tubes, sensor for the tank annulus, etc., when installed according to the manufacturers’ recommendations and limitations.
B. Product Storage Requirements:
1. Primary tank shall be vented. 2. Tanks shall be capable of storing liquids with specific gravity up to 1.1. 3. Maximum temperature: Tanks shall be capable of storing gasoline, or gasohol (minimum 50% methanol or ethanol) fuel at ambient underground temperatures. 4. Tanks shall be chemically compatible with the substance to be stored.
C. Dimensional Requirements:
1. The single compartment gasoline tank shall have a nominal capacity of 20,000 gallons Regular Unleaded, nominal outside diameter of 10 feet 0 inches and approximate overall length of 37 feet 8 3/4 inches. The compartmentalized gasoline tank shall be divided into two compartments of 10, 000 gallons Diesel and 12,000 Premium Unleaded, the nominal outside diameter of 10 foot 0 inches and overall length of 41 feet 10 3/4 inches. 2. All tanks shall be equipped with the fiberglass, brine reservoir. 3. All tanks shall show hold down strap locations.
D. The single compartment tank shall be equipped with (2) 22-inch diameter manways with UL approved gasket, bolts, and liquid tight steel cover. The turbine enclosure manway
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 13 cover shall have three 4" NPT in line fittings welded in place on center line of cover, spaced 8 inches center to center. The Vent/Vapor/TLM manway cover shall have four 4” NPT in line fittings welded in place in an equal distant radius of the cover as shown on the drawings. Each manway cover shall be liquid tight and shall have a containment collar around it. Each compartment of the compartmentalized tank shall be equipped with (2) 22-inch diameter manways with UL approved gasket, bolts, liquid tight steel cover. The (2) turbine enclosure manway covers shall have three 4" NPT in line fittings welded in place on center line of cover, spaced 8 inches center to center. The (2) Vent/Vapor/TLM manway cover shall have four 4” NPT in line fittings welded in place in an equal distant radius around the cover as shown on the drawings. Each manway cover shall be liquid tight and shall have a containment collar around it. Each tank shall be equipped with a hydrostatic monitoring reservoir with 4” NPT fitting.
E. Materials: Tanks shall be manufactured with fiberglass reinforced resin.
F. Annular Space:
1. Tank shall have a full 360 degrees space between the primary and secondary shell walls to allow for the free flow and containment of any released product from the primary tank. 2. Tanks shall be designed to provide hydrostatic monitoring capability. Tanks shall have one 4" NPT fitting located at one end of the tank for accessibility to the tank bottom between the primary and secondary walls. This fitting shall have counter-sunk pipe plug provided by manufacturer.
G. Anchor Straps: Provide glass fiber-reinforced plastic anchor straps for each tank. Location and quantities of straps shall be as specified by manufacturer. Straps shall be standard as supplied by the tank manufacturer.
H. Certification Plate:
1. Underwriter's Laboratory label shall be permanently affixed to each individual underground storage tank.
I. NPT Fittings:
1. All threaded fittings on UL-listed tanks shall be constructed of a material consistent with the requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories’ listing. All fittings shall be supplied with threaded plugs. 2. All standard threaded fittings are four-inch in diameter and shall be half couplings. Reducers shall be used for smaller sizes where specified and shall be provided by the contractor. 3. Thread Standards: All threaded fittings shall have machine tolerances in accordance with the ANSI standard for each fitting size. 4. Strength: NPT fittings shall withstand a minimum of 150-foot/pounds of torque and 1,000 foot/pounds of bending, both with 2 to 1 factor of safety.
J. Lifting Lugs:
1. Provide lifting lugs on all tanks. Lugs shall be capable of withstanding weight of tank with a safety factor of 3-to-1.
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 14 K. Deflector Gauge:
1. Tank bottom deflector gauge plates shall be provided under all primary tank fittings to prevent tank damage.
L. Containment Collar:
1. Provide containment collar around the tank manway.
M. Hydrostatic Monitoring System for Double-Wall Fiberglass Tanks:
1. Fiberglass tanks shall have hydrostatic monitoring system. System shall be an integral part of the tank. 2. Reservoir shall be fiberglass integrally constructed to the top of the tank. UL approved liquid head-pressure monitoring system shall be used. 3. Brine anti-freeze solution shall be liquid calcium chloride or other UL approved equal anti-freeze solution. Brine anti-freeze shall be factory installed and shall contain a color tracer. 4. Reservoir sensor shall be as specified in paragraph 2.07 of this specification. 5. Hydrostatic monitoring system shall have third party certification that it meets EPA and NFPA 329 criteria as a precision tank test. The test procedure shall be documented. 6. The system shall be able to perform automatic, continuous leak sensing by monitoring the liquid level in the reservoir of a brine-filled interstitial space (annulus) of a double- wall tank to detect a breach in the inner or outer shell. 7. The system shall differentiate between a high liquid level and a low liquid level in the brine reservoir of a double-wall tank and provide a high-liquid alarm or a low-liquid alarm.
M. Hydrostatic Monitoring System for Double-Wall Fiberglass Tank Sumps:
1. Fiberglass tank sumps shall have hydrostatic monitoring system. System shall be an integral part of the sump. 2. Reservoir shall be fiberglass integrally constructed to the top of the sump. UL approved liquid head-pressure monitoring system shall be used. 3. Brine anti-freeze solution shall be liquid calcium chloride or other UL approved equal anti-freeze solution. Brine anti-freeze shall be factory installed and shall contain a color tracer. 4. Reservoir sensor shall be as specified in paragraph 2.07 of this specification. 5. Hydrostatic monitoring system shall have third party certification that it meets EPA and NFPA 329 criteria as a precision tank test. The test procedure shall be documented. 6. The system shall be able to perform automatic, continuous leak sensing by monitoring the liquid level in the reservoir of a brine-filled interstitial space (annulus) of a double- wall tank sump to detect a breach in the inner or outer shell. 7. The system shall differentiate between a high liquid level and a low liquid level in the brine reservoir of a double-wall tank sump and provide a high-liquid alarm or a low- liquid alarm.
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 15 N. Manufacturer of Tanks and Tank Sumps:
1. Xerxes Corporation. 2. Containment Solutions
2.07 TANK INVENTORY CONTROL AND RELEASE DETECTION SYSTEM
A. Provide (2) Veeder-Root model TLS-350 Plus consoles, (1) for the No-Lead component and (1) for the Diesel component of the project. Provide the No-Lead Console complete with RS- 485/RS-232 dual Interface Module, SiteFax interface module and CSLD (329362-001, 330149- 002 and 330160-002) module, ISD interface module, UST monitoring system. Provide the Diesel Console complete with RS-232/RS-485 dual Interface Module, SiteFax interface module and CSLD (329362-001, 330149-002 and 330160-002) module, UST monitoring system. Each Veeder-Root system consists of tank inventory control, release detection system (for tank, piping, and all sumps), smart sensor interface module with Embedded pressure module for product piping & vent/vapor piping vacuum sensing system, control console, integral printer, tank probes, hydrostatic interstitial tank and sump monitoring sensors, Hydrostatic interstitial transition sump sensors, product & vent/vapor secondary containment piping vacuum/liquid sensors, fittings, etc., for a complete and operating system. Console shall be v30B or higher for compatibility with Phase-Two water detector float kit.
B. Tank, piping and sump monitor, and inventory control system shall have the following features including but not limited to (See drawings for number of each item required):
1. Console- 68340 Microprocessor-based, 16.78MHZ system clock, 2.0M ROM and 2.0M RAM on Central Processing Unit. Approximate console size 20" X 11" X 7". The console shall be wall mounted using external mounting tabs, at a height of not more than 5 feet from the floor. 2. Mag Plus 9 Inventory Probe with Phase – Two float kit: Veeder-Root Series 846390- 109/886100-010. 3. Submersible Pump Sump Sensor: Veeder-Root Series 857080-112 dual-float, discriminating Mag Sump Sensor. 4. Line leak detectors: Complete assemblies for detecting 0.1 GPH leaks in product piping (this capability requires Risk Management Software), Veeder-Root Series 848480-001 for Red Jacket Pumps connected to controller in the building. 5. Hydrostatic Reservoir Sensor (dual-point): Veeder-Root Series 794390-303 to be incorporated into the integral tank reservoir. 6. Dispenser Sump Sensor: Veeder-Root Series 857080-111 dual-float, discriminating Mag Sump Sensor. 7. Overfill Alarm and Acknowledgement Switch: Veeder-Root Series 790091-001 for the alarm and Series 790095-001 for the acknowledgement switch. 8. Hydrostatic Reservoir Sensor (Single-Point): Veeder-Root Series 794380-304 9. Vacuum Sensor Kit (1) (two sensor) Veeder-Root series 330020-480 10. Vacuum Sensor Kit (2) (three sensor) Veeder-Root series 330020-485 11. Vapor Flow meter Kit Veeder-Root series 330020-445 12. Vapor Pressure Sensor Kit Veeder-Root series 330020-515
13. Modules:(No-Lead Console) a. (1) SiteFax Interface Module #330149-002. b. (1) RS-485/232 dual port Module #330586-001.
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 16 c. (1) CSLD Software Enhancement Module #330160-002. d. (1) PLLD module. e. (1) Four-Input Probe Interface Module #329356-002. f. (3) Eight-input Smart Sensor Module #329356-004. g. (1) Seven-input Smart Sensor Module #332250-001. h. (1) Six-Input Pressurized Line Leak Interface Module #330843-001 with Risk Management Software Package #330160-060. i. Pressurized Line Leak Controller Interface Module #330374-001. j. (2) Eight-Input Interstitial Sensor Interface Module #329358-001. k. (1) Four-Relay Output Interface Module #329359-001.
14. Modules:(Diesel Console) a. (1) SiteFax Interface Module #330149-002. b. (1) RS-485/232 dual port Module #330586-001. c. (1) CSLD Software Enhancement Module #330160-002. d. (1) PLLD module. e. (1) Four-Input Probe Interface Module #329356-002. f. (1) Eight-input Smart Sensor Module #329356-004. g. (1) Seven-input Smart Sensor Module #332250-001. h. (1) Six-Input Pressurized Line Leak Interface Module #330843-001 with Risk Management Software Package #330160-060. i. Pressurized Line Leak Controller Interface Module #330374-001. j. (1) Eight-Input Interstitial Sensor Interface Module #329358-001. k. (1) Four-Relay Output Interface Module #329359-001.
15. Console Features for Each Console: a. Printer: 24 column thermal printer, 2-1/4" paper drive, standard adding machine. b. Keyboard: 24 button keypad. c. Display: Liquid crystal, 2-line, 24-character Alpha-Numeric character per line
16. Veeder Root Riser Diagram: a. As part of the submittal process, Veeder Root, or the Veeder Root certified installing Contractor to provide a complete wiring riser diagram indicating all fuel sensors and wire types for the project.
2.08 DISPENSER, TANK AND PIPING SUMPS
A. The contractor shall furnish and install double wall pump and piping sump/enclosure as shown on the drawings. Depending upon the burial depth of the tanks, the contractor shall furnish and install the appropriate sump with the required extension as directed by the manufacturer. Depending on the presence of high groundwater, the contractor shall ensure the selection of a sump that is designed for keeping water out of the sumps under such high groundwater conditions. The contractor shall furnish and install tank sump accessories including, but not limited to, manway adapter kit, tank fitting adapters, collar adapter kit, sump access covers, and flexible entry boots for sump as manufactured and designed by the piping manufacturer selected.
B. The sumps and accessories shall be chemically comparable with products to be stored
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 17 (gasoline, gasoline with 9.5% oxinol, gasoline with 5% methanol and cosolvent, gasoline with 10% ethanol, and gasoline with 20% MTBE).
C. All joints, connections, covers, pipe, and conduit entries (including angular entries) shall be product and vapor tight.
D. Sumps shall not be deformed by backfill pressure or backfilling operations.
E. The contractor shall furnish and install double wall product and vapor tight dispenser containment sumps under the product dispensers, and double wall transitions sumps for vapor /vent piping to prevent any leaks or spills from escaping into the environment. The dispenser sumps shall be made of non-corrosive material and shall be compatible with the product being dispensed and with the chemicals and conditions found naturally in the underground environment.
F. Dispenser sumps shall be specifically designed for installation with Dresser Wayne dispensers. All required stabilizers for shear valves and pipe entry conduits shall be factory-furnished. All sumps shall be product and vapor tight to ground and surface water.
G. Dispenser containment sumps shall be as compatible with the piping system selected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE-WALL PIPING SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY CONTAINMENT
A. The Contractor shall install the double-wall piping system in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation practices and instructions. Particular attention will be paid to connection of fittings according to manufacturer’s specifications. If the piping manufacturer specifies the use of tools to avoid over-tightening of fittings and damage to O- rings, contractor shall obtain and use recommended tools.
B. The interstitial space of the double-wall product, and vapor/vent line shall be air tested at the pressure recommended by the manufacturer and not to exceed 10 psig and the primary product line shall be tested at 1-1/2 times the operating pressure. The test pressure shall be held for one hour. The contractor shall conduct at least two tests, one at the time of installation, and the other during system startup. The Contractor shall furnish written reports of the test results to the Contracting Officer.
C. Contractor shall test all secondary containment and demonstrate that it meets the State of California requirements.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ALL-METAL FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. All-Metal flexible connectors (flex connectors) are to be installed as indicated on the drawings.
B. Flexible connectors shall be installed so that there is no radial stress or twist in the hose when joints are assembled. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 18 C. Flex connectors shall be UL-listed for such application and meet the requirements of NFPA 30A for being fire-safe. Teflon-lined flex connectors will not be permitted.
3.03 SLOPING OF VENT LINES AND VAPOR RETURN PIPING
A. A minimum slope of 1/8" per foot (sloping downward toward the tanks) is required for all underground vent and vapor return piping. No less than this minimum slope shall be used within requirements for cover over piping and depth of tanks. Only rigid FRP piping compatible with the fuel stored shall be permitted for vent and vapor return piping. Pipe cover requirements are detailed on the drawings. Piping shall be installed on pre-graded compacted bed material. No support or spacing material other than the bed and backfill will be left in contact with the piping. This method of installation should prevent the possibility of any sags or sumps which might cause a liquid trap in the lines and which will not be permitted.
B. If a uniform minimum slope of 1/8" per foot in the vapor lines (from the dispenser islands to the storage tanks) results in the line being deeper than the tank connection, a condensate trap and thief port (which automatically evacuates any accumulated gasoline condensation) shall be installed in the line just outside the tank excavation.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF TANK FITTINGS, MANWAYS AND APPURTENANCES
A. Requirements for Tank Fittings, Manways, and Appurtenances:
1. Contractor shall be responsible to provide proper clearance between tank shell and submerged pumps or fill tubes. Contractor shall check the tank diameter at the pump and fill pipe opening and make necessary adjustments to maintain the specified minimum clearance of six inches from the bottom of the tank. Drop tube will include a flapper valve as shown on the drawings and will be carefully installed to shut off flow when the tank is filled to 95% capacity.” 2. When installing spill containment basins at the fill points and Stage I vapor recovery adapters, contractor shall provide a minimum of 3" and a maximum of 6" clearance between the top of the cap and bottom of the manway cover. Proper clearance shall be provided between the top of the automatic tank gauge and its cover, and the interstitial monitoring probe and its cover. 3. Pump and fill manways and/or connecting piping shall be self-supporting and shall not contact the tank. No spacing materials shall be allowed on the top of the tank. 4. All manway covers, and lids will be API color-coded according to the following: Regular unleaded covers will be white with a black cross, mid-grade unleaded covers will be blue with a white cross, and high-grade (premium) will be red with a white cross. Vapor Recovery covers will be orange. Observation well covers will be white with a black triangle. If applicable to the project, used oil covers will be marked with a purple square.
3.05 TRENCHING AND PIPE CHASES
A. Pipe trenches must be large enough to accommodate the piping, together with sufficient spacing and backfill material to provide protection from damage that might be caused by settlement, abrasion, vibration, expansion, contraction, or foreign materials. Vapor-return piping will be separated from product piping by at least twice the largest nominal pipe
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 19 diameter, with at least six inches of distance between the piping and the trench excavation walls. Trenching width shall be sufficient to maintain the clearance between the pipes and side walls as shown on the drawings and of a depth sufficient to provide the proper bed and cover, and pitch of the lines. Note that the minimum cover to finish grade over product lines in paved areas is 12 inches and 18 inches in non-paved areas. Pipe chase in the concrete or asphalt paving shall be constructed as detailed on the drawings and as located on the plot plan. The minimum spacing between adjacent pipes is twice the pipe diameter between pipes; however, piping runs shall not be layered. Piping crossover must be minimized, but where piping runs must cross, the manufacturer's crossover fittings shall be used. Piping will be installed in a manner that will facilitate testing, resist corrosion, and prevent damage and movement of system components.
3.06 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Pea Gravel: Standard bedding and backfill material shall be a naturally rounded aggregate, clean and free flowing, with particle size not less than 1/8" or more than 1/2" in diameter. The pea gravel sieve analysis shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer by the contractor from the supplier.
B. Storage and Handling of Bed/Backfill Material on Site:
1. Contractor shall store these materials so as not to allow bed/backfill material to intermix with any excavated soil or other material on site. Contamination of self-compacting gravel could result in need for mechanical compaction, as the minimum/maximum particle sizes specified are critical for self-compaction. 2. In freezing conditions, material must be kept dry and free of ice. 3. Do not intermix gravel, stone or gravel crushing, or sand in the same excavation or connected excavations.
C. Poor Soil Conditions/Soils Stabilization and Filter Fabric:
1. Where soils of low bearing capacity are found such as plastic clays or where sand/sand- gravel may be of a free-flowing nature, a separation is necessary between the pea gravel backfill and the soil to prevent penetration or migration. 2. Contractor shall line the excavation completely with an inert filter fabric, as per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Approved manufacturers are: a. DuPont "Typar" Style 3401 - 4 oz./Sq. Yd. b. Monsanto "Bidim" C-22 - 4 oz./Sq. Yd. c. Phillips "Supac" Fabric - 4.1 oz./Sq. Yd. d. Celanese "Mirafi" 140 Fabric - 4.1 oz./Sq. Yd. 4. Material shall be cut to an appropriate width for the depth and width of the excavation so that there is sufficient material to overlay the top edges of the excavation during installation. Laps of material along the excavation should be a minimum of 2 feet.
D. Bedding of Product Lines: A minimum of six inches deep compacted bed, graded to give the proper slope of depth of pipe runs, shall be laid in the trench before pipe runs are installed. Pipe runs shall be fabricated at grade and installed and properly spaced on the completed bed. After making necessary connections of runs, branches or fittings which shall be made up in the trench, bed material should be placed back under the piping and
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 20 properly compacted.
3.07 BACKFILLING OF PIPING
A. After satisfactory completion of required testing and observation of piping, backfilling of trenches to subgrade elevation shall be completed. A minimum of six inches of backfill shall be bedded under the piping and minimum of 18 inches of combined cover (including surface paving and backfill material) over the piping is required. Ensure that marking tape or wire (for future location of piping) has been placed in the backfill at this time.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS
A. Pumps shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Installer shall be familiar with such practices and procedures and shall strictly follow the same during installation.
B. Contractor shall measure the diameter of each tank at each 4" NPT tank fitting.
C. Contractor shall verify length of submersible pump. In any case, there shall be minimum 6" clearance between the tank and the bottom of the pump.
D. Pump shall be installed in 4" tank opening with approved non-setting thread sealant. Sealant shall be compatible/suitable for use with product being stored in the tank.
E. 4" riser pipe shall be tightened, and pump shall be lined up with discharge outlet and fuel lines.
F. Electrical connections shall be made with approved fittings to junction box. Install ground wire using standard color codes.
G. Submersible pumps shall not be wired to run continuously.
H. Submersible pumps shall never be used to pump water from the tank.
3.09 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND TANKS
A. Tanks shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Only pea gravel not less than 1/8" or more than 1/2" shall be used. Proper burial depth shall be determined by a float-out calculation and shall allow for sloping the piping from the dispensers back to the tanks (minimum depth is 44 inches and maximum depth is 7 feet). Anchoring and tank spacing shall be as shown on the drawings. If there is any conflict between the procedure provided in the specification and manufacturer's instructions, contractor shall contact Contracting Officer prior to proceeding with work. EXCHANGE assumes no responsibility or liability for the consequences of any testing practice.
B. During construction and prior to final acceptance, all installed tanks shall be ballasted as required per manufacturer's recommendations. Upon acceptance by EXCHANGE, contractor shall empty the tanks for product fill, disposing of the ballast material in an environmentally safe manner.
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 21 3.10 INSTALLATION OF FUEL DISPENSING EQUIPMENT
A. Dispensers will be mounted on islands that are protected from damage from vehicle collisions by posts, bollards or concrete bumpers as denoted on the plans. Installation shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. If unusual conditions or circumstances exist which could damage or impair the system and the special protective measures required are not covered in these instructions, their installation shall be coordinated directly with the manufacturer. Actual installation of equipment and related components shall be always under direct supervision to assure compliance with specified requirements. Shear valves or breakaway devices will be installed on each product line and on each vapor return line and carefully tested for functioning. Actuation must be free and unobstructed. Shear valves for the product line must be double-poppetted. Dispenser sumps shall be placed such that the sump edge sets ½ inch above the finished surface of the dispenser island. Dispensers will be securely bolted to their mounting surface and solidly affixed to the concrete dispenser island according to the manufacturer’s instructions to ensure proper functioning of the shear valves.
B. Bottom of excavation and hold-down pad or deadmen should be covered with at least 12 inches of graded and compacted backfill. Install tanks to facilitate removal of water. Carefully place backfill around bottom of one-fourth of tank and tank ends by hand shoveling and tamping to insure full and even support. Place backfill carefully to avoid damage to tanks.
3.11 INSTALLATION OF INVENTORY/LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
A. Installation of Veeder-Root tank inventory control and release detection system shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall retain the services of the nearest authorized Veeder-Root distributor/installer. Name of the nearest distributor can be obtained by contacting Veeder-Root. This distributor shall be responsible for receiving and storing equipment, helping contractor to locate the conduits as shown on the drawings and installing the entire system excluding conduits and power wiring. At the completion of the installation, the contractor and installer shall test and shall certify the entire system. This distributor shall provide warranty for his work excluding hardware failure. Hanging hardware for dispensers shall be tested for continuity by experienced and knowledgeable personnel, in accordance with PEI/RP 400-02.
B. Programming shall be in accordance with local operational conditions and applicable regulations. The program shall include, but not limited to, tank and line tightness monitoring, tank level monitoring, interstitial monitoring, tank overfill alarms, tank low level alarms, and tank/dispenser sump monitoring. The contractor shall print a complete Veeder-Root program report and leave with the manager. Programming and operations of the Veeder-Root system shall be documented by a certified Veeder-Root technical.
C. All circuits shall be run in rigid conduit. Conduit shall be sealed off and jointed in explosion proof boxes. Conductor runs between all inventory and leak detection equipment, and the Veeder-Root system shall be made with continuous conductors (no splices). Inventory and leak detection circuits shall be in separate conduits for dispenser and pump power runs.
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 22 3.11 INSTALLATION OF THE VAPOR RECOVERY SYSTEM WITH ISD
A. Installation of a complete Veeder-Root Vapor Recovery with (ISD) In Station Diagnostics System shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, the (ATC) Authority to Construct and applicable CARB orders. The Contractor shall insure that the system equipment, installation, and testing is in accordance with the ATC and applicable CARB orders.
3.12 INSTALLATION OF OVERFILL ALARM AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT SWITCH
A. The mounting location for the overfill alarm and acknowledgment switch shall be in the immediate vicinity of the storage tank delivery points and shall be clearly visible to and easily accessible to the fuel delivery driver. Alarm shall activate at 90% of the tank’s actual storage capacity.
3.13 EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF SWITCH
A. Install the master emergency shut-off switch inside the building at the register areas. Add (2) additional emergency shut-off switches outside at a well-lighted location that is not less than 20 feet from the nearest dispenser nor more than 100 feet from the farthest dispenser. The switch shall be visible from all dispenser locations; if this requires more than one switch, the appropriate number of duplicate switches will be provided and installed. Each switch will be identified by a metal, all weather sign with letters at least 2 inches high with text as shown in the drawings. Letters will be red in color with a sign background color of white. The switch shall be installed in such a manner this it is clearly visible from the dispensers and meets the maximum height above ground level per ADA requirements. See electrical drawings for exact location.
B. The emergency shut-off switch shall terminate electric power to all dispensers, pumps, and dispenser control devices. Power for the illumination of all dispensing areas will not be affected by the activation of the switch. The switch shall be of such a design or installed in such a way that it cannot be reset by customers. Unless a fire alarm box or automatically self-dialing telephone is located adjacent to the emergency shut-off, activation of the emergency shut-off switch shall transmit an alarm to the fire station or 24-hour security desk or another emergency agency. Contractor shall coordinate with facility officials regarding the final location of the alarm transmittal.
3.14 SYSTEM CHECKING
A. In addition to normal construction observation, three formal system checks shall be conducted. The Contractor shall inform the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer one week in advance of the day and time of each test. Each test shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor is cautioned that all components of the system being tested shall be installed, prepared for testing, exposed and in proper operating condition for each test. All costs associated with retesting or additional visits by the Contracting Officer, Architect/Engineer or other third-party technicians shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
B. The manufacturer’s recommendations for installation, in addition to the codes and standards listed in paragraph 1.02, A of this specification shall be referenced to determine
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 23 proper installation and procedures for each system check. Documentation of each test (including copies of field notes) shall be provided to Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer. EXCHANGE and the Architect/Engineer assume no responsibility or liability for the consequences of any testing practice.
C. The Contractor shall provide labors and technicians to assist the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer in the system operation and testing. All testing procedures shall be conducted by the Contactor for observation by the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer. At the preconstruction meeting, the Contractor will be provided a copy of the checklist used by the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer for each test. The following system checks shall be conducted:
1. Tank Installation. Observed for proper installation and use of materials in conformance with plans and specifications. Pressure and soap testing of each tank. Tank bedding and deadman placement shall be observed. Bedding material shall be observed for conformance to specifications. Excavation size and maximum burial depth confirmed. Placement of the tanks observed. Backfill of tank excavation observed. 2. Product/Vent Lines and Sumps. Observed for proper installation and use of materials in conformance with plans and specifications. Observation of proper line placement, bedding, and slope. Pressure test of the complete piping system prior to backfilling of piping. Soap test all pipe runs including fittings and joints. Water test all dispenser and tank pump sumps. 3. Final System Check: Observed for proper installation and use of materials in conformance with plans and specifications. Observation of dispenser sumps and sensors. Observation of tank pump, fill, vent and hydrostatic systems, sumps and sensors. Observation of Veeder-Root system programming and detection of sensors flats.
D. At the end of each system check, all results shall be noted. The Contractor shall provide copies of the manufactures certifications indicating designation as a certified installer, authorized service contractor and technician shall be provided during final system check. Copies of the technician’s certifications (i.e., Veeder-Root) provided shall be from the individuals responsible for installation of the appropriate system component. Full documentation of test results, including the test procedure used (and a copy of the test procedure’s third-party certification) shall be provided to the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer.
E. System checks listed above are not intended to be exhaustive checks or detailed inspections of the work. Therefore, EXCHANGE and the Architect/Engineer assume no responsibility or liability for the completeness or proper installation of the work. The system checks listed above do not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities under this Contract or relieve him of any portion of the system warranty.
3.15 FINAL ITEMS
A. All product piping (including dispensers) shall be bled completely of all trapped air as submerged pumps are tested. System shall be tested for tightness and proper operation of leak detectors and impact valves. At least 300 gallons (100 gallons of each product) of fuel shall be pumped through each nozzle of each dispenser to ensure that all trapped air is purged from the product lines.
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 24 B. After meter calibration of each dispenser, filters shall be removed and replaced.
C. Flow restriction devices must be installed if the system is determined to dispense fuel at more than 10 gallons per minute (GPM).
D. Stage I Vapor Recovery Systems shall meet efficiency standards and shall be successfully tested by the contractor according to CARB Test Procedures.
E. Stage II Vapor Recovery will be brought on-line immediately shall have appropriate compliance testing conducted by the contractor prior to gasoline being offered for commercial sales. Such testing shall include a Pressure Decay test, Dynamic Backpressure (or liquid blockage) test, a Flow rate Determination, and Air/Liquid Ratio test or Vapor/Liquid Ratio test for vacuum assist systems. Any other testing or monitoring required by the California Air Resources Board (CARB) Executive Order for that system shall be conducted or be provided in accordance with the test procedure or monitoring described therein. Where State or local rules allow, contractor may elect to perform Stage II start-up compliance testing after the station has been open. However, the contractor must complete testing within the time allowed by State or local authorities. Complete documentation of successful Stage I and applicable Stage II testing will be provided by the contractor.
3.16 TESTING
A. During installation and upon completion of installation, the UST system shall be tested in the presence of the Contracting Officer or his representative. This testing shall be conducted using EPA third-party and CARB certified methods and such other test procedures as required and approved by the state or local authorities having jurisdiction. (Where applicable, contractor shall perform and report the results of a full start-up compliance test of the Stage I and Stage II vapor recovery systems as noted above.) At a minimum, tank and line tightness tests, pressure decay and dynamic backpressure (liquid blockage) tests of the vapor recovery system shall be performed by the contractor’s tester and a written report documenting all the results shall be provided to the Contracting Officer. Following testing and certification, the system shall be shown to function under simulated actual use conditions, demonstrating the function and operation of the equipment. As a condition of acceptance, written certification shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer in evidence of full compliance with the requirements specified herein.
3.17 TRAINING OF EXCHANGE PERSONNEL
A. Contractor shall provide total 8 hours of training of EXCHANGE employees on the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. Training shall not be conducted during final testing and testing of the tank system, so that the quality of instruction is not compromised. A training attendance roster shall be completed for each training session held. The roster shall indicate the training subject, training date, length of the training class, the name, phone number and signature of the instructor, the name of the company he represents, as well as the full name, office symbol and complete telephone number of each attendee. A copy of class rosters and accompanying photograph of the class attending each session and instructor will be placed in each copy of the O&M manual.
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 25 END OF SECTION 335000
07/15/21 Gasoline Dispensing & Underground Storage Tank Systems Ft. Irwin Express (20014) 33 50 00 - 26